Professional Documents
Culture Documents
PVElite Manual
PVElite Manual
480
Houston, TX 77070
Tel: 281 890-4566
FAX: 281 890-3301
Web: www.coade.com
January 1, 2002
Dear PVElite User,
Enclosed please find Version 4.3 of the PVElite Pressure Vessel Design and Analysis software program.
This package includes a CD-ROM and update pages to the manual. The program installs using the Setup
program on the CD. The CD contains an auto-run feature that should automatically start the installation
process. If it does not start, execute the setup program contained on the CD. The installation serial
number is located on the inside of the CD jacket. Do not discard the jacket.
Some New Features of Version 4.3 are:
This version of PVElite has been extensively tested according to the QA standards established at COADE.
At least 115 different vessel jobs have been run to verify the results of the program.
Sincerely,
PVElite Development Staff
PVElite
User's
Guide
Version 4.3
PVElite is a PC-based
pressure vessel design
and analysis software
program developed,
marketed, and sold by
COADE Engineering
Software.
Version 4.30
Revised 1/2002
Contents
Preface
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT P-2
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER P-2
LICENSE GRANT P-2
TERM P-2
LIMITED WARRANTY P-3
ENTIRE AGREEMENT P-3
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES P-3
GENERAL P-4
DISCLAIMER - PVElite P-4
Chapter: 1 Introduction
What is PVElite? 1-1
What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program? 1-1What distinguishes PVElite from other
commercial pressure vessel packages? 1-3
What Applications are Available? 1-4
General Vessels 1-4
Complete Vertical Vessels 1-4
Complete Horizontal Vessels 1-4
Individual Shells & Heads 1-4
Conical Sections 1-4
Vessel Nozzles 1-4
Flanges 1-4
Base Rings 1-5
Lifting Lug 1-5
Pipe & Pad 1-5
Local Stress Calculation Due To Attached Loads 1-5
Thin-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Thick-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
TEMA Tubesheets 1-5
ASME Tubesheets 1-5
Floating Heads 1-5
Half-Pipe Jacket 1-6
Large Openings 1-6
Rectangular Vessels 1-6
Shells & Heads 1-6
Nozzles 1-6
Flanges 1-6
Horizontal Vessels 1-6
Legs & Lugs 1-7
WRC 107 1-7
Summary 1-7
WRC 297 1-7
Appendix Y Flanges 1-7
Updates 1-10
Licenses 1-10
Full Run 1-10
Lease 1-10
Limited Run 1-10
ii
iii
iv
Rings 5-7
Inside Diameter of Ring 5-8
Outside Diameter of Ring 5-8
Thickness of Ring 5-8
Ring Material 5-8
Moment of Inertia 5-8
Cross Sectional Area 5-8
Distance to Ring Centroid 5-8
Name of Section Type 5-8
Nozzles 5-10
Overriding Nozzle Weight 5-10
vi
Lugs 5-19
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint 5-19
Lug Bearing Width 5-19
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate 5-19
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate 5-19
Thickness of Bottom Plate 5-20
Distance between Gussets 5-20
Mean Width of Gussets 5-20
Height of Gussets 5-20
Thickness of Gussets 5-20
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring 5-20
Thickness of Top Plate/Ring 5-20
Overall Height of Lug 5-20
Overall Width of Lug 5-20
Weight of One Lug 5-20
Number of Lugs 5-20
Perform WRC 107 Calc 5-20
Pad Width 5-20
Pad Thickness 5-21
Pad Length 5-21
Weight 5-22
Miscellaneous Weight 5-22
Offset from Centerline 5-22
Platforms 5-24
Platform Start Angle (degrees) 5-24
Platform End Angle (degrees) 5-24
Platform Wind Area 5-24
Platform Weight 5-24
Platform Railing Weight 5-24
Platform Grating Weight 5-24
Platform Width 5-25
Platform Height 5-25
Platform Clearance 5-25
Platform Force Coefficient 5-25
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options] 5-25
Platform Length (Non- Circular) 5-25
Saddles 5-26
Width of Saddle 5-26
Centerline Dimension (B) 5-26
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees) 5-26
Height of Composite Stiffener 5-26
Width of Wear Plate 5-26
vii
Trays 5-28
Number of Trays 5-28
Tray Spacing 5-28
Tray Weight Per Unit Area 5-28
Height of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Density of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Legs 5-29
Distance from Outside Diameter: or Diameter at Leg Centerline 5-29
Leg Orientation 5-29
Number of Legs 5-30
Section Identifier 5-30
Length of Leg 5-30
Packing 5-31
Height of Packed Section 5-31
Density of Packing 5-31
Liquid 5-33
Height/Length of Liquid 5-33
Density of Liquid 5-33
Insulation 5-35
Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing 5-35
Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing 5-35
Insulation Density 5-35
Lining 5-36
Height/Length of Lining 5-36
Thickness of Lining 5-36
Density of Lining 5-36
viii
ix
xi
xii
xiii
Results 10-13
Status Bar 10-13
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure 10-13
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness 10-13
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New & Cold 10-14
Actual Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness 10-14
Summary of Internal Pressure Results 10-14
Minimum Metal Temperatures 10-14
Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance 10-14
Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure 10-14
Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure 10-15
Summary of External Pressure Results 10-15
xiv
xv
xvi
Conclusions 15-11
xvii
xviii
Chapter: 24
The Half-Pipe Module
Introduction 24-1
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis 24-1
Discussion of Input Data 24-3
Discussion of Results 24-6
Example Problem 24-8
xix
xx
3UHIDFH
7KH3UHIDFHSURYLGHVLPSRUWDQW
OHJDOLQIRUPDWLRQIRU39(OLWHXVHUV
&RQWHQWV
$FFHSWDQFHRI7HUPVRI
$JUHHPHQWE\WKH8VHU
/LFHQVH*UDQW
7HUP
/LPLWHG:DUUDQW\
(QWLUH$JUHHPHQW
/LPLWDWLRQVRI5HPHGLHV
*HQHUDO
'LVFODLPHU
39(OLWH
LICENSE GRANT
In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed
Program(s) from COADE, COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights
with regard to the Licensed Programs(s):
a. Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the
License Program to be executed without a COADE External Software Lock
(ESL).
b. To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party
acknowledges in writing its agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement; if you transfer the Licensed
Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether printed or
in machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so transferred; the requirement to transfer and/or destroy copies of the Licensed Program(s) also pertains to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed
Program(s) contained or merged into other programs.
You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Program(s) on any copy, modification or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s).
THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR
TRANSFER THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR
MERGED PORTION THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED
PORTION OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY, THE LICENSE
GRANTED HEREUNDER TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.
TERM
This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s)
until terminated in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You may terminate the License Agreement at any time by destroying the Licensed Program(s) together
with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form. This License
Preface
Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement or
automatically in the event you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License
Agreement. You hereby agree upon such termination to destroy the Licensed Program(s)
together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided AS IS
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AND
EXPLICITLY EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and
performance of the Licensed Program(s) is with you.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdictions the above exclusions may not apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal
rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from one jurisdiction to another.
COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will
meet your requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error
free.
COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on
which the Licensed Program(s) is furnished, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you
as evidenced by a copy of your receipt.
COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADEs expense,
as soon as possible after the problem is reported and verified. However, only those customers current on their update/maintenance contracts are eligible to receive the corrected
version of the program.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning
the Licensed Program(s). No agent, distributor, salesman or other person acting or representing themselves to act on behalf of COADE has the authority to modify or supplement
the limited warranty contained herein, nor any of the other specific provisions of this
Agreement, and no such modifications or supplements shall be effective unless agreed to
in writing by an officer of COADE having authority to act on behalf of COADE in this
regard.
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES
COADEs entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:
a. the replacement of any CD not meeting COADEs Limited Warranty as defined
herein and which is returned to COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a
copy of your receipt, or
b. if COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of
defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this License Agreement
by returning the Licensed Program(s) and associated documentation and you will
be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed Program(s).
Preface
GENERAL
You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or
the Licensed Program(s) except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any
attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations
hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this License Agreement giving COADE the
right to terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State
of Texas, United States of America.
The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the
program. After the first 1 year term, such updates and support are optional at the then current update fee.
Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein, shall be
made by contacting COADE in writing at COADE, 12777 Jones RD., Ste. 480, Houston,
Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-890-4566.
DISCLAIMER - PVElite
Copyright(c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2002, all rights reserved.
This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc.
and is provided to the user pursuant to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement containing restrictions on its use. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner except as
expressly permitted by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license
agreement.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER IN EXCESS OF
THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING
PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS SOFTWARE. IN
NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE LIABLE
TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN
Preface
Preface
Preface
&KDSWHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
What is PVElite?
PVElite is a PC-based pressure vessel design and analysis software program developed,
marketed, and sold by COADE Engineering Software. The PVElite program is a package
of nineteen applications for the design and analysis of pressure vessels and heat exchangers. The purpose of the program is to provide the vessel engineer, designer, or estimator
with easy-to-use, technically sound, well documented calculations which will speed and
simplify the task of vessel design or re-rating. The popularity of PVElite is a reflection of
COADEs expertise in programming and engineering, as well as COADEs dedication to
service and quality.
Introduction
Graphical User Interface, which lists model data and control with a vessel display.
Both horizontal and vertical vessels may be composed of cylinders, conic sections,
body flanges and elliptical, torispherical, hemispherical, conical and flat heads.
Saddle supports for horizontal vessels. Leg and skirt supports at any location for vertical vessels.
Extensive on-line help.
Deadweight calculation from vessel details such as nozzles, lugs, rings, trays, insulation, packing and lining.
Wall thickness calculations for internal and external pressure in accordance with the
rules of ASME Section VIII Division 1 and Division 2, and also BS 5500. Stiffener
ring evaluation for external pressure.
Wind and seismic data using the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) standard, the Uniform Building Code (UBC), and the National (Canadian) Building Code,
and the India Standard.
User defined unit system.
A complete examination of the vessels structural loads combining the effects of pressure, deadweight and live loads in the empty, operating and hydrotest conditions.
Logic to automatically increase wall thickness to satisfy requirements for pressure and
structural loads and introduce stiffener rings to address external pressure rules.
1-1
1-2
Structural load evaluation in terms of both tensile and compressive stress ratios (to the
allowable limits).
Detailed analysis of nozzles, flanges, and base rings.
A complete material library for all three design standards.
A component library containing pipe diameter and wall thickness, ANSI B16.5 flange
pressure vs. temperature charts, and section properties for AISC beams.
Printed output from the PVElite program is exceptionally clear and complete, with
user definable headings on each page. User comments and additions may be inserted
at any point in the output.
Introduction
Introduction
1-3
Wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic combinations of pressure,
deadweight, nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules, and the rules of BS 5500. These calculations address minimum wall thickness for pressure and allowable longitudinal stress (both tension and
compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load combinations.
Complete Vertical Vessels
Vessels supported by either skirts, legs or lugs can be defined for complete dead load and
live load analysis. Stacked vessels with liquid are also addressed. Hydrotest conditions
may be specified for either vertical or horizontal test positions. Vessel MAWP includes
hydrostatic head and ANSI B16.5 flange pressure limitations.
Complete Horizontal Vessels
Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L. P. Zick.
Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads.
Individual Shells & Heads
Internal and external pressure design of vessels using any of the three design standards.
Components include cylinders; conical sections; and elliptical, torispherical, flat, and
spherical heads. PVElite calculates required thickness and maximum allowable internal
pressure for the given component. It also determines the minimum design metal temperature per UCS-66, and evaluates stiffening rings for external pressure design.
Conical Sections
Internal and external pressure analysis of conical sections and stiffening rings. Complete
area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations for the cone under both internal
and external pressure are included.
Vessel Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement per the applicable code (Div. 1 or Div. 2) under
internal, and external pressures and under MAPNC conditions for nozzles in shells and
heads. The program includes tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal
pipe diameters and schedules. The program also calculates the strength of reinforcement
and evaluates failure paths for the nozzle.
Flanges
MAWP and MAP are listed for all nozzle flanges. For those flanges requiring stress analysis (e.g. body flanges), complete Appendix 2 stress analysis is provided. PVElite can also
design flanges either by increasing the flange thickness or by changing several flange
parameters.
1-4
Introduction
Base Rings
Stress and thickness evaluation for tailing lugs, skirts and base rings. Results from both the
neutral axis shift and simplified method for basering required thickness are reported.
The following pressure vessel components, while unincorporated in the general vessel
model, may be modeled and analyzed on an individual basis in PVElite.
Lifting Lug
The stresses on legs, supporting lugs, lifting lugs, and their allowable limits can be calculated. Stresses on cap type and continuous top support rings (girder rings) can also be calculated. Trunnion and shell stress as well as baseplate thickness is also computed.
Pipe & Pad
Required wall thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for two pipes, and
branch reinforcement requirements for the same two pipes considered as a branch and a
header. Based on ANSI B31.3 rules, this program includes tables of outside diameter and
wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules.
Local Stress Calculation Due To Attached Loads
Stress and life cycle evaluation for thin walled expansion joints in accordance with ASME
VIII Div. 1 Appendix 26.
Thick-Walled Expansion Joints
Stress, life cycle and spring rate calculations for flanged and flued expansion joints in
accordance with ASME VIII Div. 1 Appendix CC. The spring rate computation is per
TEMA 8th edition.
TEMA Tubesheets
Analysis of all types of tubesheets using the Seventh Edition of the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association. The program takes full account of the effects of
tubesheets extended as flanges, and for fixed tubesheets also includes the effects of differential thermal expansion and the presence of an expansion joint.
ASME Tubesheets
This program determines required thickness of tubesheets for fixed or U-tube exchangers
per the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA.
Floating Heads
Internal and external pressure analysis of bolted dished heads (floating heads) using the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. An additional calculations technique allowed
by the Code (Soehrens calculation) is also implemented by this program.
Introduction
1-5
Half-Pipe Jacket
This program determines required thickness and MAWP for half-pipe jacketed vessels per
the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix EE.
Large Openings
This program analyzes large openings in integral flat heads per the ASME Code Section
VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 and Appendix 14. Required thickness, MAWP and weights
are computed for geometries that have no nozzle or an attached nozzle.
Rectangular Vessels
This program analyzes non-circular pressure vessels using the rules of the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 13. Most of the vessel types in Appendix 13 are analyzed for internal pressure, including reinforced or stayed rectangular vessels with a
diametral staying plate. All membrane and bending stresses are computed and compared
to the appropriate allowables.
Shells & Heads
Internal and external pressure design of vessels and exchangers using the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1 rules. Components include cylinders, conical sections, elliptical
heads, torispherical heads, flat heads, and spherical shells and heads. This program calculates required thickness and maximum allowable internal pressure for the given component. It also calculates the minimum design metal temperature per UCS-66, and evaluates
stiffening rings for external pressure design.
Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement under internal pressure for nozzles in shells
and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules and including tables of
outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. The
program also calculates the strength of reinforcement and evaluates failure paths for the
nozzle.
Flanges
Stress analysis and geometry selection for all types of flanges using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. This program both designs and analyzes the following types of
flanges:
Horizontal Vessels
Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L.P. Zick.
Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads. Stiffening rings used in the design of the vessel are also evaluated. Wind and seismic loadings are
1-6
Introduction
also considered. Additionally, the saddle, webs and baseplate are checked for external
seismic and wind loads.
Legs & Lugs
Analysis of vessel support legs, support lugs, and lifting lugs. This analysis is based on
industry standard calculation techniques, and the resulting stresses are compared to the
AISC Handbook of Steel Construction or the ASME Code. A full table of 929 AISC
beams, channels and angles is included in the program.
WRC 107
Description and evaluation of all the components of a pressure vessel or heat exchanger.
Design pressure, temperature, material, actual thickness, and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure are shown for each component.
WRC 297
Stresses in cylindrical shells and nozzles due to external loading, per Welding Research
Council Bulletin 297 and PD5500 Annex G.
Appendix Y Flanges
Required thickness and MAWP for Class 1 flanges with metal to metal contact outside the
bolt circle per Appendix Y.
Introduction
1-7
The purpose and scope of the application and its technical basis
Notes on the input to the program and results of the program
A figure showing the relevant geometry
One or more example problems
1-8
Introduction
Introduction
Phone: 281-890-4566
E-mail: techsupport@coade.com
Fax:
WEB: www.coade.com
281-890-3301
1-9
Updates
Updates
PVElite update sets are identified by their version number. The current release of PVElite
is Version 4.2.
Licenses
There are 3 types of PVElite licenses:
Full Run
Provides unlimited access to PVElite and one year of updates, maintenance, and support.
Updates, maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
Lease
Provides unlimited access to PVElite with updates, maintenance, and support provided as
long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run
Provides 50 analyses over an unlimited period of time, but does not include program
updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 runs is purchased.
A run is decremented when the Analyze Option is selected from the menu bar and the
Analyze submenu item is selected.
1-10
Introduction
A-99 addenda changes have been incorporated, including the higher allowable
stresses for Div. 1
The pre 99 addenda is available as an option (uses the 98 addenda material database,
etc.)
Other FVC nozzles such as types F, V1, V2, and V3 are now included (with or with
nut relief)
Nozzle calculations in ANSI blind flanges can now be performed (full area replacement)
An ANSI flange dimension lookup feature has been added
Required flange thickness calculations based on Rigidity considerations are included
A saddle copy feature has been incorporated
The programs documentation is now available on-line in PDF format
Several enhancements to the user interface have been made
Dimensional Solutions Foundation 3-D interface has been added
MAWP and MAPnc can now be manually defined
The 3/32 min. thickness requirement based on the Service type (Unfired Steam) is
accounted for
The Maximum hydrotest pressure is computed in the case of overstressed geometries
The ESL will automatically be updated for current users (obviating the need for the
phone call)
An option for the pneumatic hydrotest type has been added
The material database editor can select materials from the database for editing purposes
Introduction
A-99 addenda changes have been incorporated, including the higher allowable
stresses for Div. 1
The pre 99 addenda is available as an option (uses the 98 addenda material database,
etc.)
Required flange thickness calculations based on Rigidity considerations
TEMA Eighth edition changes are included
Code Case 2260 has been added
The CodeCalc User interface has been re-written and now has lower memory requirements
The material database editor can select materials from the database for editing purposes
Thick Walled Cylinder and Sphere equations are implemented per Appendix 1
1-11
1-12
Introduction
Introduction
Computation of Slen (allowable length between stiffeners) displays on the status bar
Computation of Tr for external pressure displays on the Status bar
Computation of EMAWP for heads displays on the Status bar
Computation of Areas (Required and Available) in the Nozzle dialog
Computation of Inertias (Required and Available) in the Stiffener Ring dialog
Inputs for Type and Material of Construction for Nozzle flanges
Nozzles on heads are now listed allowing the ability to copy and paste nozzles
between heads (cut and paste)
The program will automatically design a ring on entry in to the Ring dialog once the
minimum parameters are entered in or if the ring OD is zeroed out and you tab around
the data fields
A standard Bar Ring Selection table is now available
Minimum leg size is calculated if the leg selected fails the AISC Unity Check
Minimum thickness of Gusset plates, bottom, and top lug plates are now shown
Minimum size of Cone/Shell junction rings are computed if the selected ring fails on
area or inertia
The Liquid dialog was reworked to allow entry of Specific Gravity and Distance of
Liquid from datum line
A group of Stiffening Rings can be added at one time
ANSI Flange MAWP displays on the Status bar
FVC Studding Outlets added to the FVC database
WRC 107 Calcs performed for Legs and Lugs automatically
Percent Liquid Holdup and SP specification added to Packing dialog
Y forces now add/subtract to axial stress for cases with FW or FS added to them
Nozzle Flange Rating displays on the Status bar
Pressing the F5 key in Nozzle, Ring, and Flange dialog acts as a Refresh (recalc) Key
Added offset dimension in the Weight dialog
Flange Calcs are now available from the Flange dialog
Added 48 character element descriptions for each element
From Nodes now display on the printout of the sketch input
Diameter and length dimensions now display on the sketch
Option to print a sketch in color
Several default values can be set such as pressure, temperature, thickness, material,
etc.
Computed Cone Half Apex angle now displays on the Status bar
Option to vary the temperature used to determine the compressive allowables for load
cases involving internal and external pressure
Overall MDMT now reported in the Vessel Summary report
Required Blind Flange Thickness at the Gasket location now computed
A search facility in the Material Database is now included
The 3D graphics were updated to include showing elevations, element names and
weights
Added Flange MDMT calculations
1-13
1-14
Introduction
&KDSWHU
Overview of the Installation/
Configuration Process
The PVElite program is installed on the system hard disk using the program setup
located on the CD. This installation program has been designed to allow total or partial installations, diagnostic checks of the installation, multi-language support, and
ease of updating. This section will explain the process of running the PVElite setup
application.
For users upgrading to a new version of PVElite, the installation program can be
instructed to place the new files in the same directory where the current version
resides. The new version files will overwrite the old version files where appropriate.
The PVElite program can be run from anywhere on the system hard disk. It is recommended that job files be kept in one or more data or project directories separate from
the PVElite installation directory.
The installation process consists of the following steps:
Note
2-1
The ESL can be easily attached to the parallel port of the computer in a matter of seconds.
The printer cable should then be attached to the other side of the ESL. The essential
requirement for the successful operation of the ESL is that the port must be a Centronics
compatible DB-25 pin parallel port. This is the IBM PC standard read/write printer port.
The ESL contains the PVElite licensing data, and other client-specific information. This
information includes the client company name and user ID number. Additional data may
be stored on the ESL depending on the specific program and the specific client.
2-2
Control Panel
This brings up the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. Click on the Install button to start
the installation process.
The next screen prompts the user for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. This
folder may be entered by selecting the Browse button. The folder may be the current location of an existing PVElite installation, or a new location.
2-3
This starts the installation process by prompting you to place the CD in the CD-ROM
drive and clicking on the Next button. The Add/Remove Programs application searches
for the SETUP.EXE file located on the CD and prompts the user for verification of the file
to be installed. Clicking the Finish button runs the PVElite setup program.
Installing PVElite
Note
2-4
The serial number is located on the sticker that is attached to the CD. Do not discard the jewel case!
The next screen prompts the user for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. This
folder may be entered by selecting the Browse button. The folder may be the current location of an existing PVElite installation or a new location.
Next the install routine prompts for the type of installation, with a Full Install being the
default choice and recommended for most users.
2-5
The program then prompts for the folder in which to add the program icons.
The user then specifies the color of the ESL being used. This ensures that the correct drivers get loaded during the installation.
ESL Selection
Note
2-6
After loading the ESL drivers, the computer will have to be rebooted in order for
them to become operative.
The Setup program treats a network drive no different than a local hard drive. Simply
specify the target installation drive and directory and the software will be copied and
expanded accordingly.
Some networks protect installation directories from subsequent modification by users.
This involves setting the access rights in the installation directory to usually read,
share, and scan. Since COADE software utilizes data files specific to the installation
(i.e., accounting, files, material files, etc....) which a user may need to modify, these files
cannot be located in the protected installation directory. These data files are located in a
sub-directory named SYSTEM, underneath the installation directory. Users should be
given all access rights to this SYSTEM directory. While the actual name of the programs
installation directory can be specified by the person installing the software, the SYSTEM
sub-directory name is fixed, and is automatically created. Renaming this sub-directory
will cause the software to fail and generate an error report.
Note
The SYSTEM subdirectory is not the primary top level SYSTEM directory containing the network operating system.
Once the software has been installed on the network drive, the installation program
invokes the configuration program which generates a default configuration file. Once the
installation directory is write protected this file cannot be modified. Leaving this file as
read only would insure the configuration file can then only be used as a starting template
to generate other configuration files located in the various user data directories.
2-7
can be found in the subdirectory ASSIDRV beneath the PVElite program directory. The
documentation files in this subdirectory contain instructions for a variety of networks and
operating systems.
Note
If the network ESL is to be located on a Novell file server, the driver HASPSERV.NLM is
needed. This driver should be copied onto the file server, into the top level SYSTEM
directory. Then, the system startup file (AUTOEXEC.NCF) should be modified to include
the command:
LOAD HASPSERV
This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming Supervisor rights.
Novell Workstation ESL Installation
HASPSERV
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands which load the network drivers. The workstation does not need to be logged in. Note however, the workstation must always be up and running for users to access the software.
Windows Server Installation
For a Windows server installation, please refer to the documentation files NETHASP.TXT
and ESL_RED.TXT found in the ASSIDRV subdirectory for network specific instructions.
2-8
licenses are on the ESL, a user must then be logged into the network to access the software. A few local ESLs provide much greater operating flexibility.
Note
The number of licenses assigned to a network ESL is not a parameter that can be
modified remotely by COADE software.
Local users running the software from a network drive should run the file "Netuser.bct"
one time to update all locations.
2-9
2-10
&KDSWHU
Tutorial / Master Menu
PVELITE:
Project #1:
Project #2:
SYSTEM:
EXAMPLES:
Most files in the data subdirectories are identified by a user-defined filename with a given
extension. The remaining files hold data controlling the programs operation. These files
and their description follow:
jobname.PVI
jobname.TAB
jobname.T80
jobname.CCI
units.FIL
*.BIN
UMAT1.BIN
3-1
3-2
PVElite is a Windows package and exploits the advantages of the Graphical User Interface
or GUI. Looking at the input screen above, no direct path through the processor is evident;
control can jump to many other points in the program. This style of control is called an
event driven, graphic environment.
This screen has a Main Menu across the top which controls the major routing through the
processor. These items File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, etc. may be accessed
directly from this menu at any point in the processor. In a row directly below the Main
Menu appears a series of toolbars and buttons specific to the current screen. In the screen
above, the buttons manipulate the elements (Insert, Delete, Update), specify unique data
(Material, Share), or change the view or input method (Zoom, Layout view). The three
toolbars control the data file, add elements and add details to the current element. These
toolbars and buttons may be relocated on the screen.
The body of the screen contains either two or three areas - a table of the Element Basic
Data, a table of the Element Additional Data (when required), and the graphic area which
contains an image of the current status of the entire vessel or the current element. A status
bar runs across the bottom of the screen. The status bar displays an element count, the
3-3
position and orientation of the current element, and quick internal pressure calculations for
the current element.
How are the menu selections made, how are the buttons pushed, how is the data entered?
Most operations are obvious when using a mouse; simply point to the item and click the
left mouse button1 to open drop down menus from the menu line, activate the button commands, pick a tool or move control to one of the screen areas. All buttons and toolbars
have fly-out definitions which are activated when the mouse rests on the button.
When a mouse click occurs in the data area(s), the Tab key moves the highlight (and control) through its input cells. In most element data areas, the Enter key has no function; it is
the tab key which moves the cursor to the next input cell. The exception is at combo
boxes2 where a click on the arrow will display the available choices and a down arrow
will step through the choices. An example of the combo box is found on the Input screen
shown above where the element is chosen from a list of available types. Throughout the
program, the [F1] key shows the help screen for the highlighted data item. Once familiar
with these screen controls, a combination of mouse and keystroke commands will provide
the most efficient navigation through the program.
Note
The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic.
Note
Combo boxes have the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.
Main Menu
Toolbars and Buttons (Default)
Status Bar
When the graphics area of the Input screen is active a few more keys are available. No
special highlight will appear but the string PgUp/PgDn/Home/End will appear at the
bottom graphics area. This indicates these keys are now active. The image in the graphics
3-4
area shows the current state of the input for the vessel model with its elements and the
details on these elements. One element is highlighted. This is the current element and the
element data (Element Basic Data and Element Additional Data) shown on the screen
defines this element. By pressing PgUp or PgDn, the highlight changes from one element
to the next through the vessel. Home and End keys are pressed to move the highlight to the
first and last elements in the vessel. Clicking the left mouse button on the element will also
highlight it. Once an element is highlighted the detail information for that element may be
accessed. With the mouse, simply click the right mouse button for the existing detail
image to be displayed. To add details to the current element, simply click on the appropriate detail on the toolbar and provide the necessary data.
Once the control of this screen is understood, all the remaining input processors will
present no difficulties as they all have the same control structure with mouse and keyboard
commands.
3-5
Input Menu
Enter
Vessel Data
Other than the Vessel Data there are four other categories of vessel input which must be
addressed - component analysis data, report headings, the guidelines for the vessel design
or analysis, and a definition of the live (wind and seismic) loads. These input processors
are entered through Input on the Main Menu. The drop down menu here can be used to
switch between the Build and Define mode and also enter the Heading definition and the
Global processor. The Design/Analysis Constraints are important here as this is where the
overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled.
Finished thickness is required input for each vessel element but the user may allow the
program to increase element thickness so that each element passes the requirements for
internal pressure, external pressure, and the combined loads of pressure, dead and live
loads. Remember that the status bar lists internal pressure information about the current
element including the required thickness. A switch is also available to locate stiffener
rings on the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements.
The Component Analysis Data option allows the user to enter data and analyze without
building a vessel. These are COADEs remaining CodeCalc analysis modules some of
which cannot be incorporated directly in PVElite. CodeCalc, COADEs popular vessel
component analysis package is included in PVElite.
3-6
Component
Analysis
Processor
Report
Headings
3-7
Design/
Analysis
Constraints
3-8
Error Checking
Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor will create an error message if the user tries to specify a nozzle 20
feet from the bottom of a 10 foot shell element. Not all pieces of data can be confirmed on
input. For that reason, a general error processor is executed prior to the analysis. This error
processor can be run in a stand-alone mode as well. The error checker may be accessed
from the pull down menu under Analyze. In addition to the notes that are presented on the
screen during error checking, these error messages also appear in the output report accessible through the output review processor.
3-9
Analysis
Analysis
PVElite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The program also provides direct design capabilities in which the wall thickness of individual elements are increased to meet the code requirements for internal and external pressure and
longitudinal stress from a variety of dead and live loads. Whether or not the program
changes wall thickness during the analysis is controlled through a Design/Analysis Constraint specification under Design Modification. (See Design/Analysis Constraints screen
above). A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags for Select t for ... are all
unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program will automatically step up the
wall thickness until the constraint is satisfied. The users input in the resulting output
report is automatically updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addition to wall thickness, a fourth flag can be set - Set Stiffener Rings?. In this case, rather
than increasing the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel to satisfy the
external pressure requirements. As with the wall thickness changes, these stiffener rings
are added to the model input for this analysis.
PVElite will analyze each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal
and external pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules or
PD:5500 rules. The program then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to
four categories of vessel loads: pressure, deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel
attachments or applied loads, and moments due to the live loads - wind and earthquake.
These four categories are set for three different load conditions: empty, operating, and
hydrotest. The sensible combination of these various categories and conditions produce
the default set of 12 load cases that are found in the Design/Analysis Contraints processor.
For each load case, PVElite will calculate the maximum longitudinal stress around the circumference of the elements and compare these values to the allowable stress for the material, both tensile and compressive. If stresses in the vessel wall exceed the design limits,
PVElite will proceed according to the design modification settings in the input.
Once the program finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program
design modifications. If any data was changed by the program, PVElite automatically reruns the complete analysis to review the impact of the changes.
There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These controls, however, are more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job.
Instead, these seven computational control directives are set for all jobs executed in the
Data subdirectory. These controls are viewed and modified through the Tools item on the
Main Menu. Here, select Configuration to display the setup parameters dialogue.
3-10
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
3-11
3-13
3-14
WRC 107 Input Screen (by clicking on WRC 107 in Component Pulldown Menu):
3-15
Main Menu
Main Menu
PVElite always starts with the Vessel Data Input Screen. Across the top of this screen is a
line of items which is called the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions
of the program. This chapter reviews the functions available in each of these menu items.
The PVElite Vessel Data screen has the following structure:
Main Menu
Toolbars and Buttons (Default)
Status Bar
The items in the Main Menu, File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, Diagnostics, View, ESL,
and Help, may be selected with a mouse click or by pressing the underlined character
while pressing the [Alt] key. For example, the Output processor may be selected by pressing [Alt]+ [O].
3-16
File Menu
File Menu
File Menu
The File options control the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed
in the menu with an ellipsis () cause a file manage window to appear when selected. The
file manager is described in the chapter titled Miscellaneous Processors. The following
options are available from the Main Menu item - File:
New
3-17
File Menu
Open
Save
Save Dialog
3-18
Save AsAllows the user to either save a file that has not been named or to save the
current file under another name.
Print PreviewDisplays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above)
ExitAllows the user to exit PVElite. A message window will appear to give the user
a last opportunity to save any modification to the current job.
Export
File Menu
The File Menu will also list the last four vessel input files. Any of these files may be
opened with a mouse click.
3-19
Input Menu
Input Menu
Input Menu
The Input options controls the general operations of PVElite program input processes. The
following options are available:
Enter
Vessel Data
Component
Analysis
Processor
Report
Headings
Design/
Analysis
Constraints
3-20
Vessel DataThis is the main input processor of the program, which allows the user
to input and edit the element data (shell, heads, body flange, skirt and cone) and the
detail data (saddle, platform, packing, liquid, insulation, lining, ring, nozzle, tray, leg,
lug, weight, force and moment). Also in this option the user can add, delete, insert elements and details. The user can click on an elements graphic field to bring this elements data to the screen for further editing. The user can right click on an element for
further editing. The Individual Detail button on the Detail toolbar also allows the
user to edit the detail data. This processor is discussed later in this section. See the
Element Data and the Detail Data chapters for more information.
Report HeadingsThis option allows the user to input and edit a three line heading,
which will be placed in the first three lines of each report page. It will also print on the
title page, which will be the first page of the report.
Design/Analysis ConstraintsThis option allows the user to input and edit the global
data, which includes the general vessel description, design control data, and the structural load analyses to be performed. This is where ASME Section VIII Division 1,
Input Menu
Division 2, or PD:5500 is specified as the design code. If the user does not select this
option, the program will set the default data.
Enter
Live Load
Data
Live Load DataThis option switches to the wind and seismic data edit mode where
the wind loads and seismic loads are defined through the specification of the appropriate load parameters.
3-21
Analyze Menu
Analyze Menu
Analyze Menu
The Analyze options cause program to quit the input process and enter the analysis process. PVElite will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename, then
process the analysis. The following options are available:
3-22
AnalyzeThis option quits the input process and begins the error checking process.
After finishing the error checking, if no error is detected, the program will implement
the analysis process. A description of the PVElite analysis is found in Chapter 7 of this
users guide. The output from the analysis processor, whether error messages or
results, may be examined by the Review function in Output. Once an analysis is completed, the program will automatically switch to the Review processor.
Error Check OnlyThis option will only process the error checking, and will not
implement the analysis process. The error report may be examined in the Review
option found in the Output item from this Main Menu.
Output Menu
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output options allow the user to review the analysis results, and print the graphics of
the vessel. The following options are available under Output:
ReviewThis option allows the user to review the analysis results of the current job,
if these results are already available.
3-23
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools options control utility processors. Options that are displayed in the menu with
... cause a window to appear when selected. The configuration option allows the user to
define a variety of system variables for the program:
Configuration Menu
The Configuration Option lets some specific program computation control parameters be
set. These controls let you set some options in some programs that control the results of
some computations. Following is a description of the options:
Print Water Volume in Gallons?
3-24
Tools Menu
This setup parameter is used for the computation of the vertical thickness limit. The formulas for computing these limits are found in paragraph AD-540.2 of the ASME Code
Section VIII Division 2. Sketch (b) of Fig. Ad-540.1 shows an integral connection with a
smooth radius. Figure (d) shows a similar geometry with an alternative pad plate and fillet.
By default PVElite uses sketch (d) to compute the vertical thickness limit. However if you
would like to use sketch (b) then check this directive.
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size?
If you would like to have your thicknesses rounded to the nearest 1/16 of an inch (if you
are in English units) or the nearest 1mm if you are in MM units, then check this directive.
The program will increase the thickness of an element if you specify for it to do so in the
Design/Analysis Constraints and the element thickness is inadequate.
If this directive is not checked then no thickness rounding will be performed.
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness?
In many cases pressure vessels are designed and built long before the piping system is
attached to them. This means that the nozzle loadings are unknown. If this field is
checked, then your minimum nozzle thickness (trn) will be the maximum of:
trn = max (.134, trn for internal pressure ) <=Nps 18
trn = max (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) > Nps 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some
additional metal to work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels
are designed for.
Note carefully, that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input.
If you do so, that will override this calculation.
Compute and Print Areas for Small Nozzles?
The Code paragraph UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area replacement
calculations when small nozzles are involved. The Code states:
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less
2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this parameter is not checked, then the nozzle
reinforcement areas and MAWPs will not be computed.
Print Equations and Substitutions?
By default PVElite will provide you with formulas and substitutions for internal and external pressure calculations. If you do not want these formulas and substitutions, do not
check this box.
Increase Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement?
For Section VIII Division 1, paragraph UG-39(d)(2) provides a consideration for bypassing reinforcement of a single opening of a flat end connection. This effectively increases
3-25
Tools Menu
the required thickness of the blind flange cover. Please note that this can only be used if
there is only 1 nozzle located in the blind flange.
Use OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick?
By default PVElite uses the ID basis on which to perform Zick analysis calculations. In
general, this is more conservative than using the OD. However if you wish to use the OD
as the basis, then check this box. Checking this box will change the r value used in the
stress calculation equations.
Allowable Tower Deflection
This setup directive applies to vertical tower geometries. By default PVElite uses a criteria
of 6 inches per 100 feet for the allowable tower deflection. If your design specification
requires a different value of allowable deflection then enter it here.
Wind Shape Factor
Based on the wind design specification, PVElite will compute the wind shape factor. If
your design requirement calls for a specific value for the shape factor that does not correspond to the calculated value, then enter that number here. For cylindrical structures it is
typically 0.7.
Do not use the bolt correction factor.
For the design of heat exchanger flanges and tubesheets, TEMA (like Taylor-Forge) provide a correction factor when the actual bolt spacing exceeds the allowable bolt spacing.
The correction factor is then multiplied by the moment to design a thicker flange. The use
of this term is very standard in industry and is used in other pressure vessel design Codes
such as PD:5500.
However, ASME Section VIII does not specifically address this subject. Thus, for a pure
flange design per Appendix 2, there is no bolt-spacing correction factor. If you do not wish
to use the factor, then check this box.
The default is to use the bolt space correction factor.
Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only.
As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of the ASME Code is mandatory. This mandatory
revision includes changes to the material properties of many materials used for Division 1
vessel construction found in Section 2 Part D. Namely, the allowable stresses were
increased in certain ranges. PV Elite contains 2 databases of material properties. The
default behavior is to use the current higher allowable stress database. If you are re-rating
an older vessel to the pre 99 addenda and would like to use the older material allowables,
then you should check this box.
Since the program uses this directive to connect to the database, it should be checked
before any vessel modelling occurs. Other design codes will not be affected by this directive.
Use Code Case 2260/2261.
Use of this code case calculates required thickness of elliptical and torispherical heads.
The required thickness is less than that of the equations in UG-32 or Appendix 1 for these
heads.
3-26
Tools Menu
Use EigenSolver
The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than 1 method. The traditional method is to use the analysis technique of Freese or Rayleigh-Ritz. For the skirt
supported freestanding structure, this method provides acceptable results. When the support configuration is not the skirt/base type such as legs, lugs, or intermediate skirt, this
analysis may not provide accurate results.
To solve this problem generically, PVElite has a natural frequency solver that uses numerical methods to solve the general equations motion. Namely, the program must solve the
following: [ [K] - Z 2[M]] {a}={0}. Which for the general case is a set of n homogenous
(right hand side equal to zero, in this case abs[ [K] - Z 2[M]] {a}=0. This requires an iterative solution.
After building a stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrix of the model with appropriate boundary conditions (anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, at support lugs etc.) the program can
extract a number of modes that is meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem,
particularly the modal response spectrum analysis. Using this generic frequency Eigensolution method, PVElite can accurately extract modes of vibration for models that do not fit
neatly into the cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration codes. The natural frequency of the vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic method. For PVElite
files earlier than 4.3, the default is to use the Freese method. The default version for 4.3
and later is to use the EigenSolver. Check or uncheck this box as necessary.
Edit/Add MaterialsThis option allows the user to create and edit a user defined material
in the programs material database. The screen appears as follows:
Tutorial / Master Menu
3-27
Tools Menu
To use this processor, fill in all of the values in all cells. If more than one material is to be
entered, use the Next button to enter the new material. After all materials have been
entered, save the file with the Save button. Finally, press the Merge key to join the user
defined material database with the supplied material database.
3-28
CalculatorThis option allows the user to perform simple calculations and paste the
results in the input field in which the cursor resides.
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Crc CheckThis option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
Build Version CheckThis option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
3-29
View Menu
View Menu
View Menu
The View Option allows the user to specify the toolbars to be displayed. The following
options are available:
3-30
Standard Bar
Element BarPVElite allows the user to create a vessel with the default data by simply clicking an icon on the Element Toolbar. The following options are available:
CylinderCauses a cylindrical shell to be added to the end of the vessel under construction.
Detail BarBy clicking an icon on the Detail toolbar, certain details such as stiffeners, nozzles, forces, moments, platforms, liquid, lining, etc. can be added to the current element when applicable.
View Menu
Utility Bar
Plan / Layout Viewdraws the head or cylinder from the top showing the
orientation of the nozzles and their diameter limits.
Auxiliary Bar
List Dialog
The list dialog allows the editing of some types of vessel details. One feature of the list is that the location of the detail can be specified from the
datum position. To use the list dialog, select the type of detail to edit by
3-31
View Menu
pressing its tab. Then simply enter the data as necessary for each cell. If
the list is empty, then press the plus button (+) to add a row.
The entry of the From Node is optional. The program will assign that
value automatically. The description is a required mandatory input. If it is
not entered, the program will treat that row as if it did not exist and that
data will be lost. All of the other data must be entered as required.
Rows of data can be duplicated from on row to the next. Click on the listing number of the item to copy. That row should turn black (selected).
Next copy the data to the clipboard by pressing [ctrl-c]. Next paste it to a
blank line by using [ctrl-v]. Next change any data that might be different
for that detail.
Status Bar
SplitAllows the user to split the screen by moving the line left or right.
Input BarAllows selection of the various options as described earlier in this chapter.
Analyze BarAllows the user to analyze the current model, review previous results,
error-check the model, or review the previously created DXF file.
The viewer is started by pressing the blue sphere icon on the PVElite Auxilliary toolbar. A
vessel model should be open and ready for viewing.
The PVElite 3D viewer is a stand alone application that can render any PVElite input file
showing the actual vessel geometry in 3 dimensions. In addition to showing the outer surfaces, the model can also be viewed in wire frame and hidden line mode. Different shading
modes such as flat shaded, Gourard and Phong are all supported. This program is capable
of viewing more that one file at a time making this a multi-document application. Other
operations such as panning, zooming and model rotation are also supported. Help is also
available in the application by pressing the F1 key or by selecting Help under the Help
Menu Option.
Open
Copy
CopyCopies the contents of the current window to the clipboard. This image can
3-32
View Menu
then be pasted into an application such as Microsoft Word. If this option is used,
we suggest changing the background color to white instead of the default background color of black.
Print
Reset View
Reset ViewPut the model back into its original location when the program
started
Front
Zoom
Extents
Zoom
Window
Rotate
Pan
Zoom
Camera
PanThe pan operator allows the model to be translated in the direction the
mouse is being dragged. Pressing the mouse wheel and holding it down while
moving the mouse will also pan the model.
Select by
Window
Zoom CameraThis operator zooms in or out. Press this button then press the left
mouse button and move the mouse diagonally across the screen to zoom in or out.
Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Select by
Click
Insert
Cutting
Plane
Translate
Selection
Rotate
Selection
Insert Text
Edit
Properties
3-33
View Menu
gram will remember them in between sessions. This option is also available by
right clicking on the model window and selecting properties. The properties dialog
is shown below:
You can also add an elements transparency attribute by clicking the Change This Items
Color button and checking the transparency option on the color dialog.
3-34
View Menu
The floating toolbar show in the window above is produced by right clicking in the window. These menus allow the model to be manipulated. Here it is seen that the grid used to
slice the model has been turned off. Within this menu structure it is possible to change the
shading algorithm, alter the appearance of surfaces and to change the selection level of
various entities. The Options command brings up the Options (Properties) dialog.
3-35
View Menu
Here some of the internals have been selected and translated out of the model. The viewer
is a very powerful and useful processor. One of the greatest benefits is its ability to show
interference between vessel details like rings, nozzles, platforms, and others.
3-36
View Menu
This is a wire frame view of the 3D model. This option is available under the Render
Mode option. After viewing the model close the 3D viewer to return to PVElite.
3-37
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities which interact with the External Software Lock.
The options are as follows:
3-38
Show DataThis option will display the data stored on the ESL.
Phone UpdateThis option will allow the user to obtain phone update authorization
information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.
Generate Fax CodesThis option will provide the user with access codes for remote
ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
Enter Fax Authorization CodesChoose this option to enter the remote authorization
codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the
data stored on your ESL
Help Menu
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help Menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support
for PVElite. The options available are as follows:
3-39
Before starting PVElite, most users will collect the necessary data for the vessel design or
analysis. PVElite breaks the vessel into an assemblage of individual elementsheads,
shells, cones, body flanges, and/or a skirtand the components on these elements. Vessels
are defined one element to the next - from bottom to top for vertical vessels and from left
to right for horizontal vessels. Collecting data to define these elements before starting the
program is not required but it will make the most efficient use of the designers time. Typical input items include actual or proposed values for vessel material, inside diameter,
operating temperatures and pressures, wind and seismic site data, nozzle and ring location
to name a few. If necessary, the input processor can be terminated at any time and restarted
later if any missing data need be collected. With the programs graphic display of the vessel input, it is easy to recall the current state of an unfinished model or identify where data
is missing or incomplete.
Start PVElite by clicking on the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs.
PVElite will start with a Vessel Input Screen for the job currently called Untitled.
PVElite displays the Element Basic Data, an empty graphic area, three tool bars (File Handling, Elements, and Details) and a button bar. Items which cannot be used are grayed out.
Vertical vessels are built bottom to top and horizontal vessels are built left to right. It is not
necessary to build an entire vessel if only thickness for pressure is desired. Before the first
element can be placed on the screen, the Element Basic Data must be set. Start with Inside
Diameter as both the node numbers and the Element Type will be set by using the element
tool bar. Once the Basic Data is entered, elements are quickly assembled one after another
by simply clicking on the Element tool bar and making any changes to the Basic Data. The
complete vessel is created from the following elements (in their tool bar order):
3-40
Shell
Elliptical head
Torispherical head
Spherical head
Cone
Body flange
Skirt
If the vessel begins with a skirt element it will be a vertical vessel. Both vertical vessels on
legs and horizontal vessels would start with a head element. If that first head element is
improperly oriented for the vessel in mind (horizontal or vertical), simple click on the
FLIP button to correct the orientation. Once the second element is added, the vessel can no
longer be flipped between horizontal and vertical. Later, if heads, body flanges or cone
elements show incorrect orientation, use the FLIP button to fix them. From Nodes and To
Nodes are automatically assigned by the program; they start with node 10 and are incremented by 10s throughout the model. The element data set at the beginning of the session
carries forward from one element to the next. Any data changes on the last element will
carry forward onto any new elements to be added. The element data displayed belongs to
the highlighted element in the vessel image. Use the mouse to change the highlighted and
displayed element by clicking on the element of interest. The Page Up and Page Down
keys can also be used to scroll through the vessel elements.
Data may be updated one element at a time but there are more efficient ways to change an
item through several elements. Say, for example, the circumferential weld joint efficiency
for the skirt (from node 10 to 20) is set at 0.7. If this value was not changed to 1.0 on the
bottom head as it was created, this (incorrect) value is carried from one element to the next
in the Build Mode to the top of the vessel element (say, From Node 50 To Node 60). In this
situation, it is easiest to change the data on the bottom head element (20 to 30) and then
use the SHARE button to share this item through the elements in the list with From
Node 30 through From Node 50. Certain data is automatically shared. Inside diameter, for example is automatically changed for all elements (stopping at cones) attached to
the element where the change occurs. Some changes to the element data do not immediately appear on the vessel image. To refresh the image click on the Update button.
3-41
Adding Details
Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure calculations but the total vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified as element details. Nozzles, insulation, operating fluid, platforms and the like are all entered as
details on the various elements. PVElite will calculate the weight of each of these items
and account for them in the various analyses. Details such as saddles, lugs and legs are
also used to locate support points on the vesselimportant data for load calculations.
Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight
(make current) the element which will hold the detail and click on the appropriate
DETAIL button. Allowing the cursor to rest on the Tool Bar Button will produce a fly out
definition of the button. Select the detail and enter the data in the screen that follows. Use
the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about the requested data.
Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.
Help Screen ([F1]) for a Nozzle Detail:
3-42
Graphics dumped to a PCX file, inserted into this document, and scaled:
3-43
Screen dumped to a PCX file, inserted into this document, and scaled:
3-44
Note
These pressure calculations should not be confused with those used for the wall
thickness requirements defined in ASME Section VIII and PD:5500. Here, internal and hydrostatic pressures are used to calculate a longitudinal, tensile stress in
the vessel wall and the external pressure a similar compressive stress in the wall.
The fourth area, Nozzle Design Modification, is used to set the overall pressure requirements for the nozzles on this vessel and also to include the maximum allowable pressure new and cold (MAP nc) case in the nozzle checks. There is also a button on this screen Install Option. Clicking on this button will produce a screen which allows the user to spec-
3-45
ify where certain vessel details will be added - either at the fabrication shop or in the field.
This data is used to properly set the detail weights for the empty and operating conditions.
Pressure
Weight
Live Load
NP - No Pressure
EW - Empty Weight
WI -
IP - Internal Pressure
OW - Operating Weight
EQ - Earthquake
EP - External Pressure
HW - Hydrostatic Weight
HI -
Wind at Hydrostatic
Weight conditions
HP - Hydrostatic Pressure
CW Empty Weight NO CA
HE -
Earthquake at
Hydrostatic Weight
conditions
VF -
Wind
VO - Vortex Shedding
Operating
VE -
Vortex Shedding
Empty
Wind and earthquake information is supplied through the Live Load Data Screen. PVElite
generates the live loads based on the criteria established by one of four standards - the
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASC), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the
(Canadian) National Building Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads
may also be specified directly by the user as a wind pressure profile. PVElite references
3-46
these codes for live loads only. The ASME Section VIII or PD 5500 rules apply for all
other calculations. The screen below shows the data required for the default codes.
PVElite will use these criteria to set the magnitude of the live load and bending moment
on each element of the vessel.
Live Load Data Screen:
Once the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for
error processing and analysis.
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-50
Shell / Head:
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
&KDSWHU
Element Data
PVElite has eight basic element types from which all vessels are constructed. PVElite
terms for these elements are as follows:
Cylindrical
Cylindrical Shell
Elliptical
Elliptical Head
Torispherical
Torispherical Head
Spherical
Conical
Welded Flat
Flange
Body Flange
Skirt
PVElite does not require the complete construction of a vessel for the analysis. Individual
elements or groups of elements may be defined and at least partially analyzed. Only complete vessels, that is, vessels with proper supports, can be analyzed for deadweight and
live loads.
Except for the skirt element, all elements can be used to create either horizontal or vertical
vessels. Models for vertical vessels are built from bottom to top and models for horizontal
vessels are built from left to right. The vessel orientation is established with the first element. If starting with a skirt, its a vertical vessel. If starting with a head, the head may be
flipped between a bottom head (vertical model) and a left head (horizontal model) by
clicking on the FLIP button. Once the second element is added to the model, the orientation is fixed. Skirts are the only vessel support that are modelled as elements. Other supports such as legs and lugs for vertical vessels and saddles for horizontal vessels are
modelled as details on the elements. These vessel details are in the next chapter.
Element Data
4-1
Enter a number associated with the starting point and ending point of this element. For
Heads, the From and To Nodes mark the straight flange attachment to the head, not the
overall extent of the head. (The straight flange length cannot equal zero.)
The From node number for this element will also be used to define details such as nozzles, insulation, and packing which are associated with this element. The location of the
To node will be calculated by the program by adding the length of this element to the
location of the From node. The From and To nodes establish the overall organization of
the vessel.
When creating a vessel model in the BUILD mode, node numbers are automatically
assigned to each element. The BUILD mode starts with node 10 and increments by 10
throughout the vessel. When DELETEing elements, the program will reconnect the ves-
4-2
Element Data
sel elements by changing the From node of the following element to the To node of the
previous element. When INSERTing elements, PVElite will ask for the new (added) To
node number and again reconnect the elements so that the From and To nodes match
with the previous and next elements in the model.
The program defines a vertical vessel from the bottom to the top. If the vertical vessel is
on a skirt, the first element would be the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element
would be a head and the legs or lugs are defined as details on the appropriate shell element.
The program defines a horizontal vessel from the left end to the right end. The first element in a horizontal vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details
on the appropriate shell element.
Elements To Node
Enter the number associated with the starting point of this element, the From node.
Inside Diameter
For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, this should be the inside diameter of
the straight flange.
For cones, this is the inside diameter at the From node end.
For skirts, this is the inside diameter at the top of the skirt.
Distance
For a cylindrical shell, enter the length of the shell from seam to seam.
For an elliptical, torispherical, or spherical head, enter the length of the straight flange.
The straight flange length cannot equal zero.
For a conical head or shell segment, enter the length of the cone (including toriconical
sections, if any) from seam to seam.
For a body flange, enter the through thickness of the flange including the weld neck, if
any.
For a skirt support, enter the distance from the bottom of the basering to the skirt/head/
shell seam.
Finished Thickness
Enter the finished thickness of the element. This is typically the nominal thickness minus
any mill undertolerance, and taking into account any thinning due to forming. Note that
the corrosion allowance is automatically subtracted from this thickness by the program
and should not be subtracted by the user.
Element Data
For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, you may have to reduce the nominal
thickness of the plate used in order to take into account the thinning of the head due to
forming.
4-3
For cylindrical shells made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible
mill undertolerance from nominal pipe wall thickness.
For welded flat heads, enter the through thickness of the flange portion, but do not
include the hub and weld neck.
For a skirt, this is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and
taking into account any thinning due to forming. For cylindrical skirts made from
pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible mill undertolerance from the
nominal pipe wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The analysis program will subtract this value from the
entered thickness and add this value to inside diameter.
Wind Load Diameter Multiplier
Enter the wind load diameter multiplier. The value entered here will be multiplied by the
element outside diameter in order to determine the overall element diameter to be used in
wind load calculations. The element outside diameter will include the insulation.
When a number greater than 1 is used, it should be carefully chosen to account for the tributary area of external attachments such as nozzles, piping, or ladders. The typical multiplier used to determine wind load diameter is 1.2. Thus if the actual element OD was 50
inches, the overall wind load diameter for this element would be 50 * 1.2 = 60.
The range of this value is normally greater than 1 and less than 2. However in some cases
it can be used to turn the wind loads off of certain elements. You can turn the wind load off
on the current element by setting this value to 0. A vessel that is supported by an intermediate skirt whose lower elements are protected from the wind would see no wind load on
those elements.
Material Name
Enter the material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by selecting the [Mat] button from the toolbar. Selecting one of the material names from the list will display the
significant material parameters for the analysis. If the current element temperature is outside the valid temperature range for the material, the material may not be specified or
selected. (Likewise, a temperature may not be entered if it exceeds the limits for the material.)
Pressing Enter while on this field will display the material properties of the current element or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are
directly from the programs material database, otherwise the data are from the data structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in the
programs material database, the program will assume that it is a User-defined material,
in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell section with welded longitudinal seams.
This will be the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in
spherical shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically seamless but may require a
4-4
Element Data
stress reduction which my be entered as a joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
The Joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formulas is a measure of the
inspection quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography
have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7.
Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the
same vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For example, if circumferential seams receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have
a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. The practical effect of this
rule is circumferential seams, which are usually less highly stressed may be spot radiographed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This results in the
same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Except for the skirt, these values should be set to 1.0 for PD:5500 and Division II.
Design Internal Pressure
Enter the design internal pressure for the component. This pressure need not include any
pressure due to liquid head, as that value is calculated automatically by the program
through the liquid Detail definition.
For skirts, this value is preset to zero and cannot be modified.
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the metal design temperature for the internal pressure condition. This value will be
used to collect the material allowable stress in the operating condition.
PVElite will check the entered value against the valid temperature range for the current
element material. The program will not allow the entry of a temperature outside the materials range. This value will be used to determine the material allowable stress.
Design External Pressure
Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value,
i.e. 14.7 psia. If you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations. For skirts, this value is preset to zero and cannot be modified.
Examples of external pressure
Enter the design temperature for external pressure. This value will be used as the metal
design temperature for external pressure calculations. When performing these calculations, the program will use the external design temperature along with the external chart
name (found on the material edit window) to access the material tables and thus determine
the allowable external pressure.
The maximum design temperature will be used for the allowable compressive stress on
each element.
Element Data
4-5
Cylindrical Shell
There is no additional data for cylinders.
Elliptical Head
Head Factor
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. A value of 2 is typical, that is, the major axis
(vessel diameter) is twice the minor axis (two times the head height). For example, a 60
inch diameter elliptical head would extend 15 inches beyond the straight flange.
Inside Head Depth
Enter the inside depth of the elliptical in this field. This value is in the new condition and
does not include the corrosion allowance. PVElite will compute the outer depth H and
uses this item in the calculation of the parameters needed to compute the required thickness of the ellipse. This depth value is only required for PD:5500.
4-6
Element Data
Torispherical Head
Torispherical Head
Crown Radius
Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged and
Dished head, this is equal to the outside diameter of the shell. See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). The crown radius is L in this figure.
For PD:5500, this is equal to the outside diameter of crown section of torispherical end
measured to tangent between crown and knuckle, as shown in Figure 3.5.2.1.
Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for the toroidal portion of the torispherical head. For a standard
ASME Flanged and Dished head, this is equal to 6 percent of the crown radius. Allowable
values range from 6 percent of the crown radius to 100 percent of the crown radius (hemispherical head). See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 14(b). The knuckle radius is r in this figure.
Element Data
4-7
Spherical Head
Spherical Head
There is no additional data for spherical heads.
Conical Head or Shell Segment
To Node Diameter
The diameter entered in the Element Basic Data for a cone is the inside diameter of the
cone at the From end of the cone. Enter the inside diameter of the cone at the To end
here. For a conical head, either the From node or To node will have a diameter equal to
zero or two times the small end knuckle radius.
Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects the
conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical section.
Cone Length
Enter the design length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate
the effective length of the cone for internal and external pressure calculations.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex
angle, or the design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given
angle against the calculated angle. For cases where there is a knuckle or a flare, you must
enter both the length and the angle.
Half Apex Angle
Enter the half apex angle of the cone. Refer to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
paragraph UG-33, figure UG-33.1 for a sketch of the half apex angle for some typical
geometries.
4-8
Element Data
Spherical Head
For internal pressure calculations the half apex angle should not be greater than 30
degrees, though the program will give results for up to 60 degrees. For external pressure
calculations it must not be greater than 60 degrees.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex
angle, or the design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given
angle against the calculated angle.
Toriconical
Check this field if this cone has either a flare (at the small end) or a knuckle (at the large
end). See ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for an
illustration of a toriconical section. By checking the field, the Cone Knuckle Data Edit
window will appear.
Toricone Dialog
The Toricone Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the knuckles which are parts of
a cone component. The following options are available:
Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the large end. Note that the Code requires
this radius to be no less than 6 percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than
three time the knuckle thickness (ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG31(h)).
Large End Knuckle Thickness
Enter the minimum thickness after forming the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
Small End Knuckle Radius
Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the small end. Note that the Code requires
this radius to be no less than 6 percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than
three times the knuckle thickness (ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG31(h)).
Small End Knuckle Thickness
Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the small end.
Element Data
4-9
Attachment Factor
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from either the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, or the British Standard PD:5500. For PD:5500, enter the factor C
computed per figures 3.5.5(1-2). Typical values are 0.35 or 0.41. For ASME Code, refer to
Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are as follows:
0.17
(b-1)
0.20
(b-2)
0.20
(c)
0.13
(d)
0.20
(e f g)
0.33
(h)
0.20
(i)
0.30
(j k)
0.30
(m n o)
0.25
(p)
0.75
(q)
0.33
(r s)
If the flat head is circular, you can leave this field at zero. However, if the flat head is noncircular, the program can still calculate the required thickness, etc., using the formulas in
the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34. In this case the program
assumes that you entered the larger dimension of the flat head in the Diameter field, and
that you will enter the smaller dimension of the head here.
4-10
Element Data
Flange Analysis
Flange Analysis
Body Flange
PVElite calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules
found in Appendix 2 of the ASME Code, latest addenda.
The flange design rules incorporated in the Code were based on a paper written in 1937 by
Waters, Westrom, Rossheim, and Williams. These rules were subsequently published by
Taylor Forge in 1937, and were incorporated into the Code in 1942. For all practical purposes they have been unchanged since that time. The Taylor Forge bulletin, frequently
republished, is also still available, and is one of the most useful tools for flange analysis.
The input and results for the PVElite flange program are roughly modeled on the Taylor
Forge flange design sheets.
The flange analysis model assumes that the flange can be modeled as stiff elements (the
flange and hub) and springs (the bolts and gaskets). The initial bolt loads compress the
gasket. This load needs to be high enough to seat (deform) the gasket, and needs to be high
enough to seal even when pressure is applied. The pressure load adds to the bolt load and
unloads the gasket.
Analysis of a typical flange includes the following steps:
1. Identify operating conditions and materials: determine allowable stresses for the
flange material and the bolting at both ambient and operating temperatures, from the
Code tables of allowable stress.
2. Identify the gasket material and flange facing type. Determine the effective width and
effective diameter of the gasket and the gasket factors from the Code charts.
3. From the design pressure and the gasket information, calculate the required area of the
bolts. Calculate the actual area of the bolts, and make sure it is greater than the
Element Data
4-11
Flange Analysis
required area. Based on the bolt areas and allowable stresses, calculate the flange
design bolt loads.
4. Calculate the bending moments on the flange. In each case the bending moment is the
product of a load (pressure, gasket load, etc.) and the distance from the bolt circle to
the point of application of the load. The final result is one bending moment for operating conditions and a second for gasket seating conditions.
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the
flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., counterclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in
integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5. Based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4) calculate hub factors and other geometry
factors for the flange. These are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5,
and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consistently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix.
These formulae are implemented in this flange program.
6. Calculate stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and flange thickness.
7. Finally, calculate flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending
moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
The form of the stress equations is:
S = k(geometry)*M/t2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment, divided
by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given
in Modern Flange Design, Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge. This
program includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting loads imposed
by a mating flange. The program also takes full account of corrosion allowance. The user
enters uncorroded thicknesses and diameters which the program adjusts before performing
the calculations. The program can treat corrosion in a special manner based on the input of
a Yes/No question in the input.
4-12
Element Data
Flange Analysis
The figure below shows geometry for the Flange analysis program:
Element Data
4-13
Click the button for the type of flange that is being analyzed.
TYPE
Integral Weld Neck
Integral Slip On
Integral Ring
Loose Slip On
Loose Ring
Lap Joint
Blind
Reverse
There are essentially only two categories of flanges for purposes of analysis. These are
integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a
unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these
categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions.
Weld Neck Flanges
These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral
type flanges they require a full penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges
These do not have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange.
They are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a full penetration
weld is used between the flange and the vessel.
Lap Joint Flanges
These flanges may or may not have a hub, but they are completely disconnected from the
vessel, bearing only on a vessel lap. They are always analyzed as loose.
Reverse Geometry Flanges
Here the gasket seat is on the inside of the shell diameter. These use integral flange rules,
which are suitably modified for the reversal of the bending moments. See Appendix 2-13.
Split Loose-type Flanges (mostly with lap joints)
A split is used when it is required to have the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design moment for the flange
is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring shall be
designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment.
4-14
Element Data
The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 degrees from
the splits in the other.
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets
A special type of gasket geometry, which is not included in the Code sketches, nor even in
the Code design rules, is the flange with a flat face and a gasket that extend from the ID of
the flange to the OD, beyond the bolt circle. The gaskets used with this type of flange are
usually quite soft. These flanges can be analyzed using the Taylor Forge calculation
sheets.
Integral Ring (3) & Loose Ring (5) Additional Data
Element Data
4-15
This cell indicates whether or not the current flange is a TEMA channel cover. A separate thickness and MAWP are computed for channel covers, as well as the deflection.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (LONG SPAN)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the long side of the flange. This diameter is used to calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind
flanges. This factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (SHORT SPAN) (d)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the short side of the flange. This diameter is used to calculate the non-circular flange correction factor for ASME blind
flanges. This factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Allowed Channel Cover Deflection
For TEMA Channel Covers, enter the magnitude of the allowed deflection at the center of the cover. This value will be used in computing the channel cover thickness and
MAWP, even if it is larger than the allowed deflection. However, a warning message
will be printed stating this problem exists.
Perimeter along the Center of the Bolt Holes (L)
Enter the perimeter of the bolted head measured along the centerline of the bolts. This
value (L) is needed for both non-circular and circular geometries. For a circular head,
enter the value of (3.14159 * bolt circle diameter). For non-circular heads this value
will have to be computed and entered.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations?
The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states
that every dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the
flange thickness is used. However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off
of the thickness for the stress calculations. Answering yes or no to this question will
inform the program what it is you wish to do.
Flange ID ( B for Reverse Types)
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be
the inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as B in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance
will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the user. For a blind flange this entry
should be 0 (in flange dialog only).
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as A in the ASME
code.
Flange Face Outer Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the
flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange
contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is
done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket.
Flange Face Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the
flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
4-16
Element Data
Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as g0 in the
ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. For weld neck
flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip-on flange
geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries without
hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as zero.
Hub Thickness, Large End
Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as g1 in the
ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. It is permissible
for the hub thickness at the large end to equal the hub thickness at the small end. For
flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as
zero.
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. When analyzing
an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of
the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When
you analyze a flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc., you should
enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However, when you design as a loose flange or a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back,
enter the size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the
program designs the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a
wrench around the nuts.
Bolt Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by using [D]
command. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties
can be entered manually.
Bolt Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
Element Data
4-17
Caution
You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Caution
You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range
from 0.5 to 4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the
nominal size in this field, and also enter the root area of one bolt in the Thread Series
cell.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table, 2 - UNC Bolt Table, 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt.
User-Specified Root-Area Additional Data
The gasket factor m is one of two parameters defined by the ASME Code to characterize
the behavior of the gasket material. The gasket factor is the multiple of the line pressure
required as a stress on the gasket to ensure no leakage. For example, a gasket material with
a factor of 4 requires a gasket stress of 200 psi if the line pressure is 50 psi. The gasket factor m is listed in ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1. This table is
reproduced at the end of this Flange Analysis section.
Gasket Design Seating Stress y
The gasket design seating stress is the second of two parameters defined by the ASME
Code to characterize the behavior of the gasket material. The gasket seating stress is the
minimum stress required to seat the gasket in the flange. The gasket design seating stress y
is listed in ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1. This table is reproduced at the end of this Flange Analysis section.
4-18
Element Data
The facing sketch characterizes the shape of the gasket and therefore its ability to seal the
flanged joint. Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number
according to the following correlation:
FACING SKETCH
DESCRIPTION
1a
1b
1c
1d
2
3
4
5
Enter 1 for Column I and 2 for Column II. This value is used with the facing sketch
(above) to calculate the basic gasket seating width b0. Most gaskets are Column II gaskets;
solid flat metal and ring joint gaskets are Column I gaskets.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Nubbin Width (or width of Ring Joint)
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Partition Gasket Additional Data
Element Data
4-19
External Loads
External Loads
Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pressure. The program calculates a roughly approximate equivalent pressure for flanges
loaded axially and/or in bending using the following formula:
=
=
=
=
=
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
External Loads Additional Data
Axial Force
Enter the magnitude of the external axial force which acts on this flange.
Bending Moment
Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment which acts on this flange.
4-20
Element Data
Element Data
Gasket Factor
m
Seating Stress
y
0.00
Flat Elastomers:
Below 75A Shore Durometer
75A Shore Durometer or higher
0.50
1.00
0
200
2.00
2.75
3.50
1600
3700
6500
1.25
400
2200
2900
3700
Vegetable Fiber
1.75
1100
2.50
3.00
10000
10000
2900
3700
4500
5500
6500
4-21
Gasket Material
Corrugated metal, not filled:
Soft aluminum
Soft copper or brass
Iron or soft steel
Monel or 4-6% Chrome
Stainless Steel
4-22
Gasket Factor
m
Seating Stress
y
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
3700
4500
5500
6500
7600
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.50
3.75
3.75
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.75
4.25
5500
6500
7600
8000
9000
9000
5500
6500
7600
9000
10100
4.00
4.75
5.50
6.00
6.50
8800
13000
18000
21800
26000
Ring Joint:
Iron or soft steel
Monel or 4-6% Chrome
Stainless Steel
5.50
6.00
6.50
18000
21800
26000
Element Data
Enter the inside diameter at the bottom of the skirt. This value must be larger than or equal
to the inside diameter at the top of the skirt.
Basering Dialog
The Basering Dialog lets the user input the basering data.
Note
Element Data
Use the Plot key to get a detailed sketch of the geometry you typed in.
4-23
Basering Analysis
Basering Analysis
The PVElite basering module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate
baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets found on skirts for vertical vessels. These calculations are performed using industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
Thickness of a Basering Under Compression
The equation for the thickness of the basering is the equation for a simple cantilever beam.
The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load caused
by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and bending
moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for the cantilever thickness is found in most of the common vessel design textbooks, including Jawad
& Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, page 434, formula 12.12:
t
SQRT ( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
fc
Where:
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the concrete. The approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete
assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area
of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr equation 12.1, equal to:
fc
-W / A - M * c / I
Where:
However, when a steel skirt and basering are supported on a concrete foundation, the
behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net
bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced
by the force downward on the concrete. But because these two materials have different
elastic modulii, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the
strain in the basering at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the combined bolt/
concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors,
including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed
this phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical
Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This formulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabulated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method:
In this case a neutral axis parallel to the y axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is
identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and
the angle alpha.
4-24
Element Data
Basering Analysis
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a
thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base
plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution
which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area
of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to
replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle
diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting
around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the
neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Youngs moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally
varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (nonadhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base
plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results:
p
(2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
(2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
alpha
acos[ (s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
t3
r1-r4
four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh &
Soler equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
Where:
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely
p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below
converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so
and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed]. Then
alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless parameters
r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values of p and s
(say po and so). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
s1
.5 * (so + so )
p1
.5 * (po + po )
This process is continue until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within specified tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value), where:
e
(si - si) / si
(pi - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the
starting values of so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
basering is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate
method.
Element Data
4-25
Basering Analysis
On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are gussets, there is disagreement on
how to do the analysis. For example, Megyesy uses a Table F to calculate an equivalent
bending moment. Dennis R. Moss uses the same approach but provides a table of coefficients in his book (pp 126-129 1st ed.), and Jawad & Farr use a yield-line theory (page
435-436). Since Jawad & Farr is both accepted and explicit, the program uses their equation 12.13:
t
2*b/a
a / (2 * l)
d * ( 2 / a + 1 / [2 * l])
Where:
If there is a top ring or plate, its thickness is calculated using a simple beam formula. Taking the plate to be a beam supported between two gussets with a point load in the middle
equal to the maximum bolt load, we derive the following equation:
t
SQRT(6 * M / s)
Ft
Wt * t2 / 6.0
Where:
Wt
If there are gussets, they must be analyzed for both tension and compression. The stress
formula in tension is just the force over the area, where the force is taken to be the allowable bolt stress times the bolt area, and the area of the gusset is the thickness of the gusset
times one half the width of the gusset (because gussets normally taper).
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression
In compression (as a column) we must iteratively calculate the required thickness. Taking
the actual thickness as the starting point, we perform the calculation in AISC 1.5.1.3. The
radius of gyration for the gusset is taken as 0.289 t per Megyesy, Fifth edition, page 404.
4-26
Element Data
Basering Analysis
The actual compression is calculated as described above, then compared to the allowed
compression per AISC. The thickness is then modified and another calculation performed
until the actual and allowed compressions are within one half of one percent of one
another.
Basering Design
When the user requests a basering design, the program performs the following additional
calculations to determine the design geometry.
Selection of Number of Bolts
This selection is made on the basis of Megyesys table in Pressure Vessel Handbook
(Table C, page 67 in the fifth edition). Above the diameter shown, the selection is made to
keep the anchor bolt spacing at about 24 inches.
Calculation of Load per Bolt: This calculation is made per Jawad & Farr, equation 12.3:
P
-W / N + W * M / (N * R)
Weight of vessel
Number of bolts
Bending moment
Where:
This is just the load per bolt divided by the allowable stress.
Selection of the Bolt Size
The program has a table of bolt areas, and selects smallest bolt with area greater than the
area calculated above.
Selection of Preliminary Basering Geometry
The table of bolt areas also contains the required clearances in order to successfully
tighten the selected bolt (wrench clearances and edge clearances). The program selects a
preliminary basering geometry based on these clearances. Values selected at this point are
the bolt circle, basering outside diameter, and basering inside diameter.
Analysis of Preliminary Basering Geometry
Using the methods described above for the analysis section, the program determines the
approximate compressive stress in the concrete for the preliminary geometry.
Selection of Final Basering Geometry
If the compressive stress calculated above is acceptable, then the preliminary geometry
becomes the final geometry. If not, then the bolt circle and basering diameters are scaled
up to the point where the compressive stress will be acceptable. These become the final
basering geometry values.
Element Data
4-27
Basering Analysis
The analysis then continues through the thickness calculation described above, determining required thicknesses for the basering, top ring, and gussets.
Basic Skirt Thickness
The required thickness of the skirt under tension and compression loads is determined
using the same formula used for the compressive stress in the concrete, except using the
thickness of the skirt rather than the width of the basering:
s
-W / A - M * c / I
Where
W
Distance from the center of the basering to the skirt (radius of skirt).
In tension this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required
thickness can be calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the
allowable stress must be calculated from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where
the geometry factor is calculated from the skirt thickness and radius, and the materials factor is found in the Code external pressure charts. As with all external pressure chart calculations, this is an iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress is calculated,
the allowable stress is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allowable stress approaches the actual stress.
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring
If there are gussets or gussets and a top ring included in the base plate geometry, there is
an additional load in the skirt. Jawad & Farr have analyzed this load and determined that
the stress in the skirt due to the bolt load on the base plate is calculated as follows:
s
(1.5 * F * b) / ( * h * t ** 2)
Where
F
Jawad & Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight
and bending moment, and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They
thus categorize this stress as secondary bending. The program performs the calculation of
this stress, and then repeats the iterative procedure described above to determine the
required thickness of the skirt at the top of the basering.
Brownell and Young Method
The Brownell and Young Method computes the required thickness of the baseplate, the
gussets and the top plate or top ring (if there is one). This method is discussed in the book,
4-28
Element Data
Basering Analysis
Process Equipment Design, by Brownell and Young. It is also discussed in the book, Pressure Vessel Design Manual, by Dennis R. Moss. This baseplate design method is based on
the neutral axis shift method and will in general design a thinner basering than the method
discussed in the previous paragraphs.
Element Data
4-29
The basering processor can either analyze existing baserings or design new ones. The
valid entries are
1. Analyze an existing basering
2. Design a new basering
3. Brownell and Young analyze
4. Brownell and Young design
The design mode may change the following items:
Number of Bolts
Size of Bolts
Normally baserings operate at temperatures which are near ambient. If the basering is at a
higher temperature, enter it here, otherwise leave the default temperature.
Thickness of Basering
Enter the actual thickness of basering. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance etc.
should be subtracted from this entered thickness. PVElite will compute the required
basering thickness using the simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user
entered thickness value will be used only for comparison.
Basering Material Specification
Enter the basering material. Plate materials such as SA-516 70 and SA-36 are commonly
used. Use the material button to look at materials contained in the database. If your material is not present, enter the allowable stresses at the basering design metal temperature.
Inside Diameter of Basering
Enter the inside diameter of the basering. This entry must be greater than 0 and less than
the bolt circle diameter and the basering OD. If the you have specified the program to
design the basering, the program may change this value. A good approximation for the
basering ID should be entered when using either the analyze or design option.
Outside Diameter of Basering
Enter the outside diameter of the basering. This entry must be greater than the basering ID
and the bolt circle diameter. When in design mode, the program may change this value.
4-30
Element Data
Enter the bolt material. Use the material button to look at materials contained in the database. If your material is not present, enter the allowable stresses at the bolt design metal
temperature.
Nominal Bolt Diameter
The nominal bolt diameters accepted by PVElite range between 1/2 and 4 inches (1.27
and 10.16) centimeters. Values outside of this range will not be accepted. When in design
mode the program may change the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters are
Bolt Size
(inches)
Root Area
(sq. in.)
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 3/8
1 1/2
1 5/8
1 3/4
0.12
0.202
0.302
0.419
0.551
0.728
0.929
1.155
1.405
1.680
1.980
Bolt Size
(inches)
1 7/8
2
2 1/4
2 1/2
2 3/4
3
3 1/4
3 1/2
3 3/4
4
Root Area
(sq. in.)
2.304
2.652
3.423
4.292
5.259
6.324
7.487
8.749
10.108
11.566
This bolt information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of
Process Equipment, (c) 1984, p 425.
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the basering design calls for. If in design mode, the program may
change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the maximum load
per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad
and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 12ty0.
Diameter at Bolt Circle
Enter the diameter of the bolt circle. This value must be greater than the basering ID and
less than the basering OD. When in design mode, the program may change the bolt circle
diameter. Whenever this happens, it will be reported in the output. The word DESIGN will
appear followed by the value and description of the input the program has changed.
Bolt Table (Fine Thread, TEMA ), (Coarse, UNC ) User
Enter the thread series identifier. If table 3 is selected, you will be prompted to enter the
root area of a single bolt. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering
handbook.
Element Data
4-31
If your basering design calls for special bolts, enter the root area of a single bolt in this file.
Note, however, this option is mutually exclusive from the design option. If this condition
is detected, the numbers from Table 2 (UNC) will be used.
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete
Enter the nominal compressive stress of the concrete to which the basering is bolted. This
value is fc in Jawad and Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Allowable Compressive Strength of Concrete
Enter the allowable compressive stress of the concrete to which the basering is bolted.
This value is fc in Brownell and Young. A typical entry is 1200 psi.
Bolt Corrosion Allowance
Enter the value of the corrosion allowance the bolts will be subjected to.
Gussets Additional Data
Thickness of Gusset Plates
Enter the thickness of the gusset plates to be used for this basering. Any allowances for
corrosion should be considered when making this entry.
Height of Gussets
Enter the gusset dimension from the basering to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in
the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
Distance between Gussets
Enter the distance between the inside edges of the gusset plates.
Average Width of Gusset Plates
The elastic modulus is used to determine the allowable stress for plates in compression
according to AISC. This is a required value. For most common steels, this value is 29E6
psi.
Yield Stress for Plates
Enter the yield stress for the gusset plates. This value is typically 36,000 psi.
Thickness of Top Ring
If your basering design incorporates a top ring, enter its thickness here. If a thickness
greater than 0.0 is entered, the program will compute the required thickness of the top
plate. If no top ring thickness is entered, no top ring thickness calculations will be made.
4-32
Element Data
If your basering design has a continuous top ring, enter its radial width here. This value
will normally be close to the (skirt OD - basering OD) /2. If this were an inside chair cap
type design, that would probably not be a good approximation.
External Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance that would be applied to the skirt, baseplate, gussets and top
ring. The external corrosion allowance will simply be added to the required thickness of
these components.
Element Data
4-33
The tailing lug calculation is included in the basering analysis for a single or dual type
design as depicted in the figure on the following page. The design is based on a lift position where no bending occurs on the tailing lug. The main considerations for the design
are the section modulus, shear and bearing stress at the pinhole and the weld strength.
The location of the center of the pin hole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer
most of the top ring or the basering, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/
plate the height of the tailing lug is required. The tailing lug material is assumed to be the
same material as the gusset or basering. Note that all input fields pertain to one tail lug.
4-34
Element Data
Select the type of tailing lug (single or dual) used as illustrated on the
Centerline Offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the pin hole diameter. The center of the pin hole will be placed radially in line with
the larger of the outer most edge of the top ring or the basering (OD).
Weld Size Thickness
Enter the tailing lug height measured from the top of basering.
Element Data
4-35
Discussion of Results
It is assumed that there is no bending in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only
the basering and the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation.
The table below lists the allowable stresses used to check the design strength.
4-36
Stress Type
Allowable Value
0.4 Sy
Bearing Stress
0.75 Sy
Weld Stress
0.49 Sallow
Element Data
&KDSWHU
Vessel Detail Data
Introduction
PVElite vessel models are composed of the basic elements (heads, shells, cones, etc.) with
details added to these elements. Vessel details are included for two reasonsto develop
the total vessel deadweight loads, and to collect information for the analysis of vessel
components. Not all of these details are sensible additions to every element. The following
table defines the application of these vessel details to the different elements.
Cylinder
Elliptical
Head
Torispherical
Head
Spherical
Head
Flat
Head
Cone
Body
Flange
Skirt
Ring
#1
Nozzle
Lugs
Weight
Forces /
Moments
Platform 2
Saddle 3
Tray
Y/N 4
Legs5
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Packing
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Liquid
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Insulation
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Lining
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
# indicates that this element type may have several of these details defined
Vertical vessels only
3
Horizontal vessels only
4
Y/N (Yes or No) indicates that this element may have this detail turned on or turned off
5
Vertical vessels only and only if no skirt is defined
2
5-1
Introduction
It is also useful to note here the positioning of certain vessel details are applied at a
point, such as over a length of the element. A good example is insulation. For a bottom (or
left) head, the insulation (element detail) actually starts before the From node and covers the head to the To node. For a 60 inch diameter elliptical bottom head, the start point
of the insulation is 15 inches below the From node (enter -15 for the Distance from
From Node). If the head has the standard 3 inch straight flange, then the insulation covers
18 inches of the element (enter 18 for the Height/Length of the Insulation). See the
chapter on Details for more information.
5-2
5-3
The individual detail windows generally have the following buttons available:
PREV. - Saves the current detail data to memory and displays the previous detail of
the same type for the element. If there is no previous detail, an error message will be
displayed.
NEXT - Saves the current detail data to memory and displays the next detail of the
same type for the element. If no additional detail of this type exists, the program will
create a default detail for the users modification. PVElite registers details by the
Detail ID. If the current detail does not have a Detail ID defined, the program will display an error message if this button is used.
DELETE - Deletes the current detail and displays the data of the next detail of this
type, if it exists. If there is not a next detail, the data of the previous detail, if it exists,
will be displayed on the window. If no previous detail exists for the element, a new
detail listing will be created.
OK - Allows the user to save the data of the current detail and close the window. Note
that the program will generate an error and not save the data if no Detail ID is specified.
5-4
SECTIONID - This option is available for leg details. Clicking here will bring up the
database names for the wide variety of cross section data stored in PVElite. As with
MATERIAL..., clicking on a name in the database will close the database and copy the
selected name into the Section ID field.
FULL - This option appears with those details which involve some length such as
insulation, packing and liquid. These details require a start position and end position
(entered as a distance from From node and height/length of detail). If the detail
extends throughout the element, clicking on this button will automatically calculate
and enter these values so that the detail covers" the entire element. This feature is
very useful for heads where these two terms (distance and height/length) may not be
obvious. Remember that the From node and To node mark the ends of the straight
flange portion of the head element and the head itself starts before or extends beyond
this node pair. This leads to negative distances from the From node or a larger height/
length of the detail.
ALL - This option allows some detail types such as insulation to be applied over the
entire vessel at one time. Of course the detail type can be edited on an individual basis
on any element if the ALL feature has been used.
Note that only the details of the current element are accessible. To review or define details
on other elements, the element of interest must be made current by clicking on it first.
Note
The Detail Edit window may also be accessed directly from the graphic image
found in the Build and Define modes. Simply click the left mouse button on the
element to make it current and then click the right mouse button on the detail of
interest. For details that cannot be right button clicked such as liquid, simply
click the detail on the detail toolbar and its associated edit dialog will appear.
5-5
The From Node is an element identifier that cannot be entered or modified. The From
Node (and the highlighted element on the graphic) indicates the element which contains
the detail.
Distance from From Node or Offset from Vessel Centerline
Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to the start of the item to be
defined. Be aware that for heads this may be a negative value; for example, insulation on a
bottom head starts before the From node since the From node marks the beginning of
the straight flange. For nozzles on heads, enter the radial distance between the vessel centerline and the centerline of the nozzle.
For the Detail
Enter the axial distance between the From node and the
following location:
Ring
Nozzle
Lug
Weight
Force/Moment
Platform
Saddle
Trays
Legs
Packing
Liquid
Insulation
Lining
Detail ID
Enter any alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. While not required, it is suggested to
assign unique names for unique items for clear reporting. For example, nozzles should be
unique as their individual identification is important while insulation on all elements, if
consistent throughout, may be named INSUL on each element. Some consistency will
help your naming process. You may wish to use the From node number with an alphabetical extension showing the detail type and the number of such details if needed. For example, for a nozzle, insulation and ring defined on the element From node 20 To node 30 you
may have Detail IDs of NOZL A, INSUL, and 20 RING 1 of 2, respectively.
5-6
Rings
Rings
The Stiffening Ring Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the rings which are
attached to the current element. These data are used in the calculation of the weight of the
ring and, for external pressure checks, in the calculation of the ring area and inertia.
When using the ASME Code, the following data screen is displayed.
As the stiffening ring data is entered, PVElite will automatically compute the inertias
required and available provided it is not a cone to cylinder junction ring. For bar rings, the
program will size a new ring based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the value
given in the Miscellaneous Options dialog located on the Design/Analysis window.
The Check Standards Bars button helps you to select a suitable ring. As you cursor
through the rings, the program will compute the results and place them in a display area at
the bottom of the dialog. A ring that meets the Code requirements is shown in blue and a
failed ring is displayed in red along with a failed message. Ensure the entire vessel is modeled prior to placing and sizing the rings. The Bar Selection dialog is shown below. Use
the mouse, space bar, and arrow keys to navigate this tree.
5-7
Rings
Enter the inside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually equal to the outside
diameter of the shell, except for the relatively rare case of a stiffening ring inside of the
vessel.
Outside Diameter of Ring
Enter the outside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually greater than the outside diameter of the shell.
Thickness of Ring
Enter a name of the ring material from the programs material database or select the material name by first clicking on the Ring Material button. Individual material parameters
may be viewed and modified by pressing Enter when the cursor is in this field.
PVElite allows entry of the generic entry of any type of stiffener. To do this you must
know the cross sectional area of the stiffener as well as the moment of inertia and the distance from the shell surface to the ring centroid. If you are using an American type structural shape simply click on the section type button and then click on the type of geometry
being used. If a non-American type section ring is being used, enter in the properties for
your section type.
Moment of Inertia
A property of the stiffener typically taken from a structural handbook. Units of inertia are
length to the 4th power.
Cross Sectional Area
This is the distance from the surface of the shell to the center of the rings area. Again this
property is typically taken from a structural handbook.
Name of Section Type
This value is used for documentation purposes and it is used to look up the total height of
the stiffener for the horizontal vessel analysis (if a section type ring is used).
5-8
Rings
When using British Standard PD:5500 for a cylindrical section, the following screen is
shown:
5-9
Nozzles
Nozzles
Nozzle Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the nozzles which are attached to the
current element. These nozzles will add to the total deadweight of the vessel. Even if the
deadweight is not significant, entering the nozzles may be very important as the data
entered here will be used to evaluate the flanges and vessels maximum allowable pressure (MAP). The nozzle flange MAP will be set according to the element temperature, the
nozzle class and the flange grade according to ANSI B16.5.
If one of the nozzles controls the vessels MAP and a vertical hydrotest is carried out in
accordance with ASME UG 99(c), be sure to enter the correct Flange Distance to Top in
the Global Design Data. Flange distance to top will be the distance from the controlling
flange to the top of the vessel. See the Global Data chapter for more information.
Normally the program calculates the weight of the nozzle from the information the user
has already entered and from internal tables of typical weights. If your nozzle is significantly different from a standard weight nozzle, you can enter the weight here, and it will
override the program calculated weight.
Note
5-10
Nozzle Analysis
Nozzle Analysis
PVElite calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a
pressure vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, nozzle and optional reinforcing pad. The program also calculates the strength of failure paths
for the nozzles. This calculation is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45, 1995. The calculation procedure is based on figure UG37.1.
The program calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on
inside diameter for the following vessel components:
Component
Paragraph
Limitations
Cylinder
None
None
Torispherical Head
None
None
The program evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
The NOZZLE program takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when
making calculations for the corroded condition.
The NOZZLE program also performs UCS-66 Minimum Design Metal Temperature
(MDMT) calculations for nozzles.
As the nozzle data is entered, PVElite will automatically perform the ASME area of
replacement or PD:5500 nozzle compensation calculations. A calculation is performed
every time the cursor is moved in between input cells. If there is any error in the input that
will not allow the analysis to be performed, a status of failed will appear at the bottom of
the Nozzle Dialog. The calculation is initiated once the pipe size is specified. If you are
changing data, such as the pad thickness and are not moving between cells, press F5 to
force PVElite to recalculate and display the results. If the calculation has failed, the result
will appear in red. A nozzle that has passed will have blue results. The result is typically
the area and minimum nozzle overstress per 1-7. The program will display the text failed
in brackets, even though the area of replacement may be sufficient. To effectively use this
feature, we suggest that the entire vessel be modeled first, along with the liquid and nozzle
pressure design options set. Also for vessels that have ANSI flanges note that the ANSI
flange rating will be shown on the main Status bar.
5-11
Nozzle Analysis
5-12
Enter a 15 character or less description of this nozzle. If you type in the description
MANWAY the UG-45 check for minimum nozzle neck thickness will not be performed.
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell
Enter the angle between the centerline of the nozzle and a tangent to the vessel at the point
where the nozzle centerline intersects the vessel outside diameter. If left blank, and an offset is entered, the program will compute the angle.
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1)
Enter the distance from the center of the head to the nozzle centerline.
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange
Enter the letters CL followed by a space and the number corresponding to the flange
class. The following flange classes are available:
CL 150, CL 300, CL 400, CL 600, CL 900, CL 1500, CL 2500
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange
Enter the letters GR followed by a space and the number corresponding to the flange
material grade. The following flange grades are available:
GR 1.1
GR 1.2
GR 1.4
Austenitic Steels:
GR 2.1
Type 304
GR 2.2
Type 316
GR 2.3
Type 304L,316L
GR 2.4
Type 321
GR 2.5
Type 347,348
GR 2.6
Type 309
GR 2.7
Type 310
Alloy Steels:
GR 1.5
C-1/2Mo
GR 1.7
1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo
GR 1.9
1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.10
2-1/4Cr-1Mo
GR 1.13
5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14
9Cr-1Mo
NI-FE-MO-CB
NI Alloy 200
NI CU 400, 500
NI-CR-FE 600
NI CR-FE 800
NI-MO B2
Nickel Alloys
5-13
Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a diameter limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for
which you did not want to take an available area reduction.
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit
Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a thickness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not
extend normal to the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.
Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0
In some vessel design specifications it is mandated that no credit be taken for the area contributed by the shell or nozzle. You can enter the text A1 or A2 in this field. If you do
so, that area will be set equal to 0. You can also enter A1 A2. This would give you no
credit for Area1 - available area in the vessel wall or Area2 - available area in the nozzle
wall.
Nozzle Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by pressing
D when the cursor is in the material field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its
specification and properties can be entered manually.
Nozzle Diameter Basis
Enter 0 for nozzles where the diameter you give is inside diameter. Enter 1 for nozzles
where the diameter you give is outside diameter.
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle
Enter the diameter of the nozzle. If you specify nominal or minimum for the nozzle size
and thickness basis, then you must enter the nominal diameter of the nozzle in this field.
Valid nominal diameters are
0.125
2
10
0.25
2.5
12
0.375
3
14
0.5
3.5
16
0.75
4
18
1
5
20
1.25
6
24
1.5
8
30
5-14
The program will use the actual diameter entered in the field above and the actual thickness entered in the field below.
Nominal Diameter and Thickness
The program will look up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the
nozzle size and thickness basis field, and will look up the nominal thickness based on the
schedule entered in the nominal schedule of nozzle field.
Minimum Diameter and Thickness
The program will look up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the
nozzle size and thickness basis field, and will look up the nominal thickness based on the
schedule entered in the nominal schedule of nozzle field. It will then multiply the nominal
thickness by a factor of 0.875.
Actual Thickness of Nozzle
Enter the minimum actual thickness of the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if
you selected ACTUAL for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a
schedule in the field below.
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle
Enter the schedule for the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected
NOMINAL or MINIMUM for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a
thickness in the field above. Type in the schedule for the nozzle, i.e. SCH 40. Available
nozzle schedules are
SCH 10
SCH 20
SCH 30
SCH 40
SCH 60
SCH 80
SCH 100
SCH 120
SCH 140
SCH 160
SCH 10S
SCH 40S
SCH 80S
SCH STD
SCH X-STG
SCH XX-STG
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes
Enter the seam efficiency. The seam efficiency is used in the area available calculations
to reduce the area available in the shell. Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness calculations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0.
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck
Enter the seam efficiency of the nozzle. The seam efficiency is used in the UG45 calculation to determine the minimum required thickness of the nozzle due to internal pressure.
Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness calculations, the seam efficiency is always
1.0.
5-15
The nozzle type and depth of groove welds are used to determine the required weld thicknesses and failure paths for the nozzle. If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel
wall, it is abutting the vessel wall. If the hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD
and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is inserted. Figure UW-16.1 shows typical insert
and abutting nozzles.
Nozzle Outside Projection
Enter the distance the nozzle projects outward from the surface of the vessel. This will
usually be to the attached flange or cover. This length will be used for weight calculations
and for external pressure calculations.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the nozzle and the
vessel are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the
depth of the component, that is the thickness of the nozzle. If the nozzle is attached with a
partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a
zero, respectively, in this field.
Nozzle Inside Projection
Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel. The program uses the least of the inside
projection and the thickness limit with no pad to calculate the area available in the inward
nozzle. Therefore, you may safely enter a large number such as six or twelve inches if the
nozzle continues into the vessel a long distance.
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the inward nozzle and the inside shell.
Local Shell Thickness
Some vessels have insert plates which are thicker than the surrounding shell. If your vessel
uses insert plates, enter the thickness of the plate here. This value will be thicker than the
shell course thickness this nozzle is located on. The maximum of this value and the element thickness will be used in the nozzle reinforcement calculations. A basic assumption
here is that the diameter of the insert plate is greater than the diameter limit of reinforcement which is roughly twice the diameter of the finished opening.
Shell Tr Value
For some vessel designs the nozzle reinforcement is governed by bending and normal
stresses in the local shell area where the nozzle is located. Normally the value of Tr (shell
required thickness) is based on internal pressure requirements. Some specifications call
out for "Full Replacement." If this is the case, enter in the actual shell thickness less the
corrosion allowance.
For another option, review the Nozzle Design Modification Section in the Design/Analysis Constraints. The check box titled "Base Nozzle tr on Max. Stress ratio" can also satisfy
external loading criteria by computing the exact requirement for tr. If you enter the Shell
Tr, this is the value the program will use. If you do not wish to use this value, enter a 0.
5-16
This directive is for vertical vessels only. This option should not be checked if the vessel is
a horizontal vessel.
Tapped Hole Area Loss
This entry is for the exclusion of area needed when holes are tapped into studding outlets
and other similar connection elements. The traditional industry standard is to increase the
area required by the tapped area loss. Values for tapped area loss are shown in the table
below adapted from the Pressure Vessel Design Manual.
Please note that PVElite will not multiply the tapped area loss by 2. It will simply use the
value that has been supplied.
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length
along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, although these two
values will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into
account for the pad thickness.
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad OD and the shell. Note that if
any part of this weld falls outside the diameter limit, the weld will not be included in the
available area.
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the pad and the nozzle are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the depth
of the component, that is the thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero,
respectively, in this field.
Pad Material
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by pressing
the button "Pad Material" when the cursor is in the material field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually.
ASME Code Weld Type
In many cases the Code does not require weld strength/path calculations for full penetration groove welds for pressure loadings. If your weld detail is per UW-16.1 sketch (a), (b),
(c), (d), (e), (f-1), (f-2), (f-3), (f-4), (g), (x-1), (y-1) or (z-1) and you do not wish the program to perform the weld strength calculation, enter in a designation such as A. If you
wish PVElite to perform this calculation regardless of the type of weld, leave this field
blank.
ASME Code Weld Type
If it is a type I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 weld, then PVElite will perform the additional weld
size calculations per UW-16(d)(1).
5-17
Flange Type
This is the type of nozzle flange. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out
for documentation purposes.
Flange Material
This is the material the flange is constructed of. This value is not used by the program, but
is echoed out for documentation purposes. The flange material should correspond to the
type listed for the flange grade.
5-18
Lugs
Lugs
The Lugs Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the sets of lugs which
are attached to the current element. If no skirt or legs are defined for a vertical vessel, the
lowest set of lugs will be used as the vessel support point for deadload and levelled calculations.
PVElite allows the entry of one of three types of support lug geometries:
1 - simple geometry with gussets
2 - gusseted geometry with top plate
3 - gusseted geometry with continuous top ring
Depending on the type of geometry selected, additional data will need to be entered.
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint
This is the radial distance from the wall of the vessel to the point where the lug attaches to
the structural steel.
Lug Bearing Width
This is the width of the structure that is in contact with the bottom lug support plate.
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate
This is the distance the bottom support plate extends from the OD of the vessel. This value
must be greater than or equal to the average gusset width.
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate
This value is typically equal to the distance between gussets plus two times the gusset
plate thickness.
5-19
Lugs
This value is equal to the gusset width at the top plus the gusset width at the bottom
divided by two. PVElite uses the mean gusset width in order to compute the actual
stresses in the gusset plates.
Height of Gussets
This is the radial dimension from the OD of the shell to the edge of the top plate. This
value should be less than or equal to the mean gusset width.
Thickness of Top Plate/Ring
Enter the thickness of the top plate which sits above the gussets.
Overall Height of Lug
Enter the distance from the bottom of the support lug to the top.
Overall Width of Lug
The program does not gather enough information to be able to do the detailed calculation
of the support lug weight. Therefore you must enter the actual weight of one support lug.
Number of Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this location.
Perform WRC 107 Calc
If the box is checked to perform the WRC 107 local stress and analysis, you will need to
fill out the pad dimensions (if there is a pad) and the allowable stress increase factor.
Pad Width
The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel.
The pad width must be greater than the attachment width. The length of the attachment is
measured along the axis of the vessel.If the box is checked to perform the analysis
5-20
Lugs
and the pad properties are filled in, the program will compute the stresses at the edge of
the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness o of the pad. Any allowances for the external corrosion should be
taken in to account for the pad thickness.
Pad Length
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length
along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, though these two values will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
5-21
Weight
Weight
The Weight Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the weights which
are added to the current element.
Miscellaneous Weight
Enter a weight value. This could be generated by an attached piece of equipment such as a
motor, by internals such as piping, or by externals such as structural elements. Note that
this value will affect the seismic analysis.
Offset from Centerline
Enter the distance of this generic weight from the centerline of the vessel. The value will
be multiplied by the weight to obtain a moment that will be a part of the stress calculations.
For horizontal vessels, the weight will add to the saddle loads and the offset dimension
will not be used, but will be echoed for documentation purposes.
5-22
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction
Enter the force in the selected direction. Note that the Y direction is always vertically up,
the X direction is from left to right, and the Z direction is out of the page. Loads perpendicular to the vessel will be resolved into a single vector and applied to create the worst
combination with the live load. Unlike miscellaneous weight, this force is not included in
the seismic analysis.
Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis
Enter the moment about the selected axis. The rules stated for the forces apply here as
well.
Acts During Wind or Seismic
If the force or moment acts during either the Wind or Seismic case, check the appropriate
box. Please note you can check both boxes but you must at least check one.
5-23
Platforms
Platforms
The Platform Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the platforms
which are attached to the current vertical vessel element.
Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel, and the start angle of
the platform.
Platform End Angle (degrees)
Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel, and the ending angle
of the platform.
Platform Wind Area
Enter the tributary wind area of the platform. Typically this value will be the greatest span
of the platform perpendicular to the vessel multiplied by a nominal platform height,
between 12 and 36 inches on the hand rails and other equipment on the platform.
Platform Weight
Enter the weight of the railing in units of force/length in this field. This input will be used
to compute the weight of the platform when the calculate weight button is pressed.
Platform Grating Weight
The grating is the plate that one stands on while standing on a platform. This input will be
used to compute the weight of the platform when the calculate weight button is pressed.
5-24
Platforms
Platform Width
Enter the radial width of the platform. The platform width, grating weight and railing
weight are used to compute the weight of the platform when the Calculate Weight button is pressed.
Platform Height
The platform height is the distance from the floor plate to the top hand rail. This dimension is usually 42 inches. The program uses this value to compute the wind area when one
of the Wind area calculation buttons is pressed.
Platform Clearance
The platform clearance is distance between the outer shell surface and the inner diameter
of the platform. The value is used to compute the floor area of the platform.
Platform Force Coefficient
The force coefficient is a term used to compute the wind area and consequently the wind
force acting on a platform. This value is taken from ASCE7-95 from Table 6-9 and is
referred to as Cf. A typical value for Cf is 1.2. This value should always be greater than or
equal to 1.0.
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options]
PVElite can perform platform area wind calculations in one of four ways. The methods are
The height times the width times the force coefficient (conservative).
One half of the floor plate area times the force coefficient.
The height times the width times the force coefficient divided by 3.
The projected area of the platform times the force coefficient divided by 3. Note that
this option will yield the same results as option 3 for platforms that have a sweep
angle of greater than 180 degrees.
To have the program compute the area, simply fill in the required data such as the platform
height , width, start and end angles and the force coefficient. As you enter the data the program will compute the result and insert it into the wind area cell. If you want to use your
own value, type it in and do not press one of the area options.
Platform Length (Non- Circular)
If the platform is the non-circular top head type, enter the long dimension of the
platform.
5-25
Saddles
Saddles
The Saddle Edit Window lets the user input and edit the data of the saddles which are
attached to the current horizontal cylinder. The size and location of the saddles are important for the Zick calculations of local stresses on horizontal vessels with saddle supports.
For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be defined and they do not have to be
symmetrically placed about the center of the vessel axis. If no saddles are defined for a
horizontal vessel, the deadload and live load calculations will not be performed.
Width of Saddle
Enter the width of the saddle support. This width does not include any wear pad on the
vessel side.
Centerline Dimension (B)
Enter the distance from the base of the saddle to the centerline of the vessel. This is
referred to as dimension "B" in some pressure vessel texts. This value is used in determining additional saddle loads due to wind or seismic events.
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees)
Enter the angle contained between the two horns (contact points) of the saddle, measured
from the axial center of the vessel. Typically this value ranges from 120 to 150 degrees.
Height of Composite Stiffener
Enter the overall height of the composite stiffener over the saddle (if there is one).
Width of Wear Plate
Enter the width of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support.
Thickness of Wear Plate
Enter the thickness of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support.
5-26
Saddles
Enter the angle contained from one edge of the wear plate to the other edge, measured
from the axial center of the vessel. Typically this value is approximately 130 degrees.
Saddle Dimension A
This distance is the length between the centerline of the saddle support and the tangent line
of the nearest head. This dimension is usually labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.
Perform Saddle Check (Y/N)
By answering Y to this prompt and pressing <Enter> and entering the following information PVElite will perform a structural design check on the saddle supports.
Material Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress for the saddles at their design temperature.
E for Plates
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the material used to make the saddles.
Baseplate Length
This is the long dimension of the baseplate which is in contact with the supporting surface.
This value is comparable with the vessel diameter.
Baseplate Thickness
The ribs run parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Enter the number of ribs on one saddle
support.
Rib Thickness
The web is the part of the support structure to which the ribs are attached. Enter the thickness of the web here.
Web Location
There are 2 possible locations for the webs, Center or Side. Enter a 0 for center and a 1 for
side.
Height of Center Web
Enter the distance from the bottom of the center rib to top plus the thickness of the shell.
5-27
Trays
Trays
The Tray Edit Window allows the user to enter and edit the one set of equally spaced trays
with a set liquid height for the current element. The Distance from From Node will be to
the bottom of the lowest tray. Trays may only be entered for vertical vessels.
Number of Trays
Enter the unit weight of each tray. Do not enter the total weight, since the program will
multiply the unit weight by the cross sectional area of the element.
Height of Liquid on Tray
5-28
Legs
Legs
The Legs Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the legs which are
attached to the current element. Legs may be entered for vertical vessels that have no skirt
element.
For shell elements enter the distance between the centerline of the leg to the element outside diameter. Usually, this data is the half value of the legs width. For heads where the
legs may not necessarily attach at the vessel OD but somewhere else along the head, enter
the distance between the centerlines of two legs that are opposite to one another. If there
are an odd number of legs (therefore no two are opposite), then enter the diameter of a circle drawn through the centerlines of the legs; this would be the outside diameter at the
head attachment elevation plus the depth of the leg.
Leg Orientation
Select the orientation of the leg to the centerline. Here each selection stands for
P. Strong Axis - Strong axis perpendicular to vessel:
5-29
Legs
Number of Legs
Enter the AISC section identifier for the vessel. The program holds data on 929 different
AISC sections. The Section ID database may be displayed by pressing the SectionID
button or press [Alt-S] keystroke combination. The section identifier can be selected
directly from the database.
Length of Leg
Enter the distance from the attachment point of the leg to the ground.
5-30
Packing
Packing
The Packing Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the packing which
is attached to the current element.
Enter the height of the packed section on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the packed section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the packed
section will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have a packed horizontal vessel (rare) the value entered in this cell will be
the length of the packed section.
Density of Packing
Enter the density of the packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in
lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Size
(in.)
Density
(lb/ft3)
Size
(in.)
Density
(lb/ft3)
1/4
60.0
1/4
46.0
3/8
61.0
1/2
27.0
1/2
55.0
3/4
34.0
5/8
56.0
27.0
3/4
50.0
1 1/4
31.0
5-31
Packing
42.0
1 1/2
34.0
1 1/4
46.0
27.0
1 1/2
46.0
23.0
41.0
37.0
5/8
37.0
36.0
30.0
1 1/2
26.0
24.0
5-32
1/4
133.0
3/8
94.0
1/2
75.0
5/8
7.25
5/8
62.0
5.50
3/4
52.0
1 1/2
4.75
39.0
4.50
1 1/2
42.0
4.50
37.0
25.0
Liquid
Liquid
The Liquid Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the liquid which
exists in the current element.
Height/Length of Liquid
Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the liquid section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the liquid
section will be taken at half this height. This value is also used to calculate the operating
pressure at all points below the liquid.
Density of Liquid
Enter the density of the liquid. Some typical specific gravities and densities are shown
below in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you use another units system.
Name
Gravity
Density
(lb/ft3)
Ethane
0.3564
22.23
Propane
0.5077
31.66
N-butane
0.5844
36.44
Iso-butane
0.5631
35.11
N-Pentane
0.6247
38.96
Iso-Pentane
0.6247
38.96
N-hexane
0.6640
41.41
2-methypentane
0.6579
41.03
5-33
Liquid
5-34
3-methylpentane
0.6689
41.71
2,2-dimethylbutane
0.6540
40.78
2,3-dimethylbutane
0.6664
41.56
N-heptane
0.6882
42.92
2-methylheptane
0.6830
42.59
3-methylheptane
0.6917
43.13
2,2-dimethylpentane
0.6782
42.29
2,4-dimethylpentane
0.6773
42.24
1,1-dimethylcyclopentane
0.7592
47.34
N-octane
0.7068
44.08
Cyclopentane
0.7504
46.79
Methylcyclopentane
0.7536
46.99
Cyclohexane
0.7834
48.85
Methylcyclohexane
0.7740
48.27
Benzene
0.8844
55.15
Toluene
0.8718
54.37
Alcohol
0.7900
49.26
Ammonia
0.8900
55.50
Benzine
0.6900
43.03
Gasoline
0.7000
43.65
Kerosene
0.8000
49.89
Mineral oil
0.9200
57.37
Petroleum oil
0.8200
51.14
Insulation
Insulation
The Insulation Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the insulation
which is attached to the current element.
Enter the height or length of the insulation on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight of the insulation. For seismic calculations the weight center of the insulated section will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have insulation on a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be
the length of the insulated section. Note also that the only distinction between insulation
and lining, from the programs point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of the element,
while lining is on the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to enter OD
fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing
Enter the density of the insulation. The following table lists some typical densities, shown
in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Name
Density
(lbs/ft3)
Calcium Silicate
22.5
Foam Glass
16.0
Mineral Wool
14.0
Glass Fiber
11.0
Asbestos
30.0
Careytemp
18.0
Kaylo 10
22.0
Perlite/Celo-temp 1500
23.0
Polyurethane
4.0
Styrofoam
3.0
5-35
Lining
Lining
The Lining Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the lining which is
attached to the current element.
Height/Length of Lining
Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the lined section will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have lining in a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be the
length of the lined section.
Thickness of Lining
Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing. Note that the only distinction between
insulation and lining, from the programs point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of
the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to
enter OD fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Density of Lining
Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using
another units system.
Name
5-36
Density
(lbs/ft3)
Alumina Brick
170.0
Fire Clay
130.0
High Alumina
130.0
Kaolin
135.0
Magnesite
180.0
Silica
110.0
Concrete
140.0
Cement
100.0
&KDSWHU
General Vessel Data
Global data edit mode allows the user to input and edit the data used by the whole vessel
for analysis and design purposes. Global data includes hydrotest information, structural
load cases, and program re-design instructions.
Rev. A
6-1
Design Data
Design Data
Following is a discussion of the design data parameters that are used for overall vessel
analysis:
Design Internal Pressure
Enter the specified design internal pressure for the vessel. This value is used as general
design data and also to set the UG-99(b) footnote 34 hydrotest pressure.
Design Internal Temperature
This value is simply used by the input echo to help insure the correct design data was
entered. This value is not used by the analysis portion of the program.
Datum Line Distance
Enter the location of the datum line from the first elements from node. After this is done
you can use the list command to enter the locations of nozzles, platforms, etc. from the
datum line.
Hydrotest Type
The Internal Pressure Calculations report from PVElite will list hydrotest pressures for all
three test types described below. It is important to properly identify the information
requested throughout this input group. That is, even though Hydrotest Test Position,
Projection from Top, Projection from Bottom, and Flange Distance to Top are not
used for ASME UG-99(b) or for ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34, these data are necessary to
report the proper hydrostatic test pressure for ASME UG-99(c).
Select the hydrotest type. The analysis program provides three different ways to determine
hydrotest pressure:
1 - ASME UG-99(b)
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure for the
vessel multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the
stress value S for the design temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for noncarbon steel vessels where the allowable stress changes with temperature starting even at a
somewhat low temperature.
2 - ASME UG-99(c)
The hydrotest pressure will be determined by multiplying the minimum MAP by 1.3 and
reducing this value by the hydrostatic head on that element or flange. If the vessel is tested
in the horizontal position, the hydrostatic head will be based on the maximum shell diameter plus the Projection from Top plus the Projection from Bottom specified later in
this input group. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position and a vessel element sets the
minimum MAP, then the hydrostatic head is set by the distance of that element from the
top of the vessel plus the Projection from Top. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position and a flange has the minimum MAP, the hydrostatic head is composed of the Flange
Distance to Top plus the Projection from Top.
6-2
Design Data
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the Design Internal Pressure specified at the
beginning of this input group, multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the
test temperature to the stress value S for the design temperature.
Hydrotest Position
This input is required so that the total static head can be determined and subtracted in
accordance with UG-99(c). This field is used in conjunction with the Projection from
Top, Projection from Bottom, and Flange Distance to Top fields to determine the
total static head.
Select one of the following Hydrotest Positions.
Verticalthe vessel would be tested in the upright or vertical position. Note that not
very many vessels are tested in the vertical position.
Horizontalthis is the position for the majority of vessels tested. The vessel would
normally be on its side (in the case of a vertical vessel) or in its normal position (for a
horizontal vessel).
Enter the distance from the outer surface of the vessel in its test position to the face of the
highest flange in the test position. This distance is added to the height (for vertical test
positions) or to the maximum diameter of the vessel (for horizontal test positions) to determine the static head for the UG-99(c) hydrostatic test.
Projection from Bottom
Enter this distance from the outer surface of the vessel in its test position to the face of the
lowest flange in the test position. This distance is added to the height (for vertical test
positions) or to the maximum vessel diameter (for horizontal test positions) to determine
the static head for the UG-99(c) hydrostatic test.
Min. Metal Temperature
Enter the specified minimum design metal temperature for the vessel. This value is listed
in the Internal Pressure Calculations report for comparison with the calculated UCS-66
minimum temperature.
Flange Distance to Top
If a flange controls the MAP of the vessel, the hydrostatic head associated with that flange
may be important in determining the overall MAP of the vessel. The value entered here
will be used by PVElite to calculate the hydrostatic head at this point and adjust the UG99(c) MAP for vertically tested vessels. Once the controlling flange is identified (usually
through a previous analysis) the distance from that flange to the top of the vessel is entered
in this field. If the vessel is to be tested in the vertical position in accordance with UG99(c), this value and the Projection from Top will be used to adjust hydrostatic test pressure should a (the) flange govern.
Construction Type
Select the type of construction to be included on the name plate. This data is for information only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of construction are:
6-3
Design Data
WeldedWelded
BrazedBrazed
Special Service
Select a type of special service in which the vessel will be used. This data is for information only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of special service are:
NoneNone
LethalLethal Service
Degree of Radiography
Select the symbolic representation of the degree of radiography. This data is for information only; it is reported in the input echo. Options include:
RT 1When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW11(a) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have not been
applied.
RT 2When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW11(a)(5) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been
applied.
RT 3When the complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of UW11(b).
RT 4When only part of the vessel has met the other category requirements, or when
none of the other requirements are applied.
Miscellaneous Weight
Many designers like to include extra weight to account for vessel attachments and internals not otherwise included in the models. The total weight of the vessel is multiplied by
1.0 plus this percent (i, e. 1.03, 1.05). The two most common choices are 3.0 or 5.0.
Use Higher Long. Stresses?
Entering Y (yes) will increase the allowable stresses for vessel loads which include wind
or earthquake by twenty percent. The ASME Code (Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph
UG-23(d)) allows the allowable stress for the combination of earthquake loading, or wind
loading with other loadings to be increased by a factor of 1.2.
Hydro. Allowable Unmodified (Y/N)
By default PVElite uses the hydrotest stress times the stress increase factor for occasional
loads ( times the joint eff. on the tensile side ). However, for stainless steel vessels this
value is often limited to 0.9 times the yield stress. In that instance you must enter in the
6-4
Design Data
hydrotest allowable stress for the hydrotest. Then this field should be set to Y so that
PVElite will use the defined value without any modification.
Consider Vortex Shedding?
For vertical vessels which are susceptible to wind induced oscillations, check this field.
This will cause the program to compute fatigue stresses based on loads generated by wind
flutter. The program will then go on to compute the number of hours of safe operation
remaining under the wind vibration conditions.
User Defined MAWP/MAPnc
Normally PV Elite computes the MAWP and the MAPnc based on pressure ratings for the
elements and ANSI flanges. In some cases it may be necessary to override the programs
generated results with a pre-defined value.
If this value is zero it will be ignored by the program. This is the default behavior.
User Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure
Normally the hydrostatic test pressure is computed by the program. It is then used to determine the stresses on the elements when subjected to this pressure. If this value is greater
than 0, PVElite will use this pressure plus the applicable hydrostatic head which will be
computed based on the hydrotest position. If this value is 0, the program will use the computed value based on the hydrotest type and position.
Corroded Hydrotest?
By default PVElite uses the uncorroded wall thickness when the stresses on the elements
during the hydrotest are computed. In some cases it is necessary to hydrotest the vessel
after it has corroded. If you wish to use a corroded thickness in the calculations, check this
box. Please note that longitudinal stresses due to Hydrostatic test pressure will also be
computed in a similar manner.
Is This a Heat Exchanger
6-5
Installation Options
Installation Options
The installation options shown below allow the specification of where the equipment such
as platforms, insulation, lining, etc. will be installed. This information is used to calculate
the center of gravity of the vessel in both the shop and the field (operating ) positions.
Additionally, when computing such items as the fabricated weight, operating weight,
empty weight, etc., PVElite will consider these detail weights as appropriate for the various weight cases.
PVElite uses the area of the platforms in the computation of forces that are applied to the
vessel during the wind loading analysis. Unfortunately, there is no standard method for
computing the amount of area that a platform provides for wind load calculations. Select
one of the 4 options in the pull down box: This selection will be used to compute the wind
area for all platforms specified in this job.
Stiffener Type
For ASME VIII 1 and VIII 2 the program has the ability to determine the maximum stiffener spacing and add rings to the model. If you have selected this position to model, it can
select an appropriate stiffener from the AISC database. The stiffener types are:
6-6
Equal Angle
Channels
Wide Flanges
General Vessel Data
Installation Options
Structural Tees
Bar
For the bar ring design, the program will design a ring with an aspect ratio of 10 to 1.00.
The height of the ring is 10 times its thickness. The minimum ring width the program will
start out with is 0.5 inches or 12mm.
For Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way
If the stiffener above is an angle type, they are frequently rolled to have the strong axis of
the ring perpendicular to the vessel wall. If they are rolled the hardway check this box.
Bar Thickness to use Designing
When the bar ring option is selected the program must have a thickness to use when computing a suitable ring. For the ring design, the program will generate a ring with a 10 to 1
aspect ratio. In other words, the width of the ring will be 10 times bigger.
This value can be left blank. If it is blank, the program will use a default thickness of 0.375
inches or 9 mm. When computing the ring width to meet the moment of inertia requirements.
Rigging Data
The rigging analysis calculates and locates the bending and shear stresses created during
erection process. Where the vessel is lifted from the horizontal position at two lifting
points up to the vertical position where the vessel is set onto the foundation. The safety of
the maximum combined stresses is also analyzed using the unity check method. This analysis however, does not evaluate the design of any rigging attachment such as, lugs, shackles, cables etc
Rigging analysis is performed when the vessel is in the horizontal position where the combinations of stresses are at its maximum. The torsional effect is not considered in this analysis. The vessel is erected using two lifting points where the tail and lifting lugs are
located. The design weight of the vessel is calculated by multiplying the erected empty
weight, including internals and externals, with an impact factor to simulate the initial lift.
The rigging analysis reports the field and design weight of the vessel, the center of gravity,
the reaction forces at the lifting points, the location for the maximum bending and shear
stresses, and the unity check. As a comparison, the allowable bending (per UG-23) and
shear (0.4 Sy @ ambient) stresses are also reported, and can be plotted with the fore-mentioned parameters.
The stresses are calculated in 1 foot increments along the vessel taking into account the
varying diameter and thickness of the shell. A circular cross sectional shape is assumed
throughout the vessel sections with no corrosion allowance included for the thicknesses.
Node numbering starts at the base of the vessel and ends at the top section of the vessel
where the straight line ended. For elliptical heads, the end node is the end of the straightline portion. Thus the total height of the vessel is the elevation of the last node.
Impact Factor
PVElite can perform a rigging (combined shear plus bending stress) analysis granted that Rev. A
the vessel has a support such as a skirt and the impact factor and lug elevations defined.
6-7
Installation Options
When the vessel is lifted from the ground, it may be yanked suddenly. The impact factor Rev. A
takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high
as 3.0 may be entered in. The impact factor effectively increases the overall weight of the
vessel by the impact factor. If you do not wish to perform the rigging analysis, set the
impact factor to 0.
Lug Distances from Base
You will have to enter two distances (one in each field) to perform the rigging analysis.
These distances are measured from the bottom of the vertical vessel or from the left end of
the horizontal vessel. It does not matter which dimension goes in which box. The lesser
distance will be the minimum of the two values.
Select from Standard Bar Ring List
If this box is checked and the program is set to add reinforcing rings during runtime,
PVElite will check all rings from smallest to largest and determine the minimum ring that
will satisfy the moment of inertia requirements per UG-29(a) or Appendix 1-5 or 1-8 in
the case of cone cylinder junction ring design. A list of sizes is shown in the table below:
6-8
Design Modification
Design Modification
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure
If the user toggles on this button and the required element thickness for internal pressure
exceeds the users finished thickness for the element, the program will increase the users
finished thickness to meet or exceed the thickness required for internal pressure. PVElite
will exceed the required thickness only if the round off switch is activated in the program
configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the next 1/8 inch in English
units or to the next millimeter in metric units). The program will perform this calculation
automatically as the model data is being typed in. Check this box before any part of the
vessel has been modelled. If the given thickness is greater than the required thickness, then
the program will not alter the given value.
Note that during the input phase, the program cannot check the required thickness for
flanges. That check will be performed during the analysis phase.
Select Wall Thickness for External Pressure
If this check box is checked the program will calculate the required thickness of each element (or group of elements) and increase the given thickness appropriately for the external
pressure. Note that if the user selects this button, the program will not calculate stiffening
rings for the external pressure.
After the analysis the program may prompt stating that the input file has been modified. If
any of the elements have been thickened, simply select "yes" to the prompt and your
model will be updated with the current changes.
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure
If the user toggles on this button, the program will calculate the location and size stiffening rings needed for the external pressure. Note that if the user selects this button, the program will not modify thickness for the external pressure.
After the analysis the program may prompt stating that the input file has been modified. If
any rings have been added, simply select "yes" to the prompt and your model will be
updated with the current changes.
Please note that in order to do this the program computes the allowable length between
stiffeners. This result must come out to be some reasonable value. If the maximum stiffened is too small, the program will not be able to add rings. In that case, you must increase
the thickness of the shell and try the design again. Also note that the heads must also be
properly designed for external pressure. Please verify that the thickness for external pressure is adequate.
Select Wall Thickness for Axial Stress
If the user toggles on this button he program will calculate the required thickness of
each element (or group of elements) for longitudinal loadings (wind, earthquake,
weight of vertical vessels) and increase the given thickness appropriately for the
axial stress. PVElite will exceed the required thickness only if the round off switch is
activated in the program configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the
next 1/8 inch in English units or to the next millimeter in metric units).
6-9
Load Case
Load Case
The program performs calculations for various combinations of internal pressure, external
pressure, hydrotest pressure, wind load, and seismic load. You can define up to twelve
combinations of these loadings for the program to evaluate. Load cases are defined by a
string that shows the loads to be added, i.e. IP+OW+WI, which would be the sum of
internal pressure plus operating weight plus wind. Typical definitions for the load cases
are shown below, followed by the definition of the load case abbreviations:
Load Case 1:
NP+EW+WI+FW
Load Case 2:
NP+EW+EQ+FS
Load Case 3:
NP+OW+WI+FW
Load Case 4:
NP+OW+EQ+FS
Load Case 5:
NP+HW+HI
Load Case 6:
NP+HW+HE
Load Case 7:
IP+OW+WI+FW
Load Case 8:
IP+OW+EQ+FS
Load Case 9:
EP+OW+WI+FW
Where:
NP
IP
EP
HP
EW
OW
HW
WI
EQ
HE
HI
WE
WF
CW
FS
FW
6-10
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
No Pressure
Internal Pressure
External Pressure
Hydrotest Pressure
Empty Weight
Operating Weight
Hydrotest Weight
Wind Load
Earthquake Load
Hydrotest Earthquake
Hydrotest Wind
Wind Bending Empty New and Cold
Wind Bending Filled New and Cold
Axial Weight Stress New and Cold
Axial Stress due to Axial Forces (Seismic)
Axial Stress due to Axial Forces (Wind)
Load Case
If you checked the box to perform vortex shedding calculations, the following load case
descriptors may be used:
VO
VE
VF
=
=
=
The live loads (wind and earthquake) are calculated for two conditions - operating and
hydrotest. In both cases, the basic loads calculated are identical but the hydrotest live loads
are usually a fraction of the operating live load. These hydrostatic fractions (percents) are
entered in the live load definitions.
6-11
This option computes the internal pressure on the nozzle on the bottom of the element
where the nozzle is located. This pressure is the MAWP of the vessel plus the static head
to the bottom of that element. Thus, the design pressure can vary for nozzles located on
different elements. This option is OK to use if you know for certain that your nozzle locations will not vary during the design process. If you use this option and a nozzle is lowered
in the vessel and under additional pressure due to liquid head, you need to rerun the analysis in order to determine if your nozzle geometry is satisfactory.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Design Pressure + Static Head
This option computes the exact internal pressure at the nozzle location. Normally, this
option would be used for re-rating vessels. This would allow one to get the exact results
for each nozzle, because the static head on each nozzle is computed on an individual basis.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Overall MAWP + Static Head
This option computes one single design internal pressure for all of the nozzles located on
the vessel. If the nozzle location on a vessel changes due to a client request, there would be
no need to rerun nozzle calculations since the pressure used in the calculations would not
change. This design option is ideal for designing new vessels.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Consider MAP nc in Analysis
Some design specifications require that nozzle reinforcement calculations are performed
for the MAP new and cold condition. PVElite will check to see if the nozzle is reinforced
adequately using the MAPnc generated during the internal pressure calculations. When
the area of replacement calculations are made for this case, cold allowable stresses are
used and the corrosion allowance is set to 0. Designing nozzles for this case helps the vessel to comply with UG99 or appropriate (hydrotest) requirements. Check your design
requirements to see if this case is required by your client.
Modify Tr based on the Maximum Stress Ratio
Some Nozzle designs need to comply with ASME Section VIII Division 1 paragraph UG22 which deals with supplemental loadings. One factor in ASME nozzle design is the
required thickness of the shell (tr). Usually internal pressure (hoop stress) governs. In
some cases, such as when a nozzle is located on a shell course at the bottom of a tall tower,
longitudinal stresses will govern. In this case the shell required thickness must be based on
longitudinal stresses and not the hoop stress. If you check this option, PVElite will look at
all of the defined load cases and select the highest stress ratio. It will then use this number
as a multiplier on the shell thickness. Thus the nozzle design is based on the precise loading at the bottom of that shell course.
6-12
Note
Optionally, for full replacement options, you can type in your own value of tr for
each nozzle. That value will override this directive.
For Div. 1 nozzles of integral construction, the Code in Code Case 2168 allows a different
set of rules to be used from those in UG-37. It if is within the project specifications to use
these rules check this box.
Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings
If this box is checked and pad defined geometries are inadequately reinforced, PVElite
will determine the diameter and thickness of the pad required to reinforce the opening. If
the program has changed the pad data during the analysis, it will prompt you to reload the
file so that you can view the new changes. Note that this functionality is restricted to
ASME VIII analysis at this time.
6-13
Wind Data
Wind Design Code
UBC Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
NBC National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edition.
User Defined Wind Profile. Instead of supplying the wind parameters required by
the above codes, the user may specify the elevation vs. wind pressure directly.
IS-875 This is Indias National Standard Wind design code. The year of this code is
1987.
The remaining wind load data required by PVElite changes based on which Wind Design
Code is selected. These data requirements are reviewed here according to the design code
specification.
6-14
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are
following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Exposure Constant
Entry Definition
1
2
3
4
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Percent Wind for Hydrotest
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor
Enter the value of the importance factor that you wish the program to use. Please note the
program will use this value directly without modification.
In general this value ranges from .95 to 1.11. It is taken from Table 5 of the ASCE standard.
Category
1.00
1.05
II
1.07
1.11
III
1.07
1.11
IV
0.95
1.00
6-15
Category Classification
I
II
Buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area.
III
IV
Buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure.
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Roughness Factor (from ASCE 7-93, Table 12
Force Coefficients for Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar Structures, Cf)
Entry
Definition
Where: D is the depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers and D is the
diameter or least horizontal dimension.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some
designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc.
instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an
increased wind diameter. The value Cf will vary between 0.5 and 1.2 depending on the
type of surface and height to diameter ratio.
6-16
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are
following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the UBC Exposure Factor as defined in Section 2312:
Entry
Definition
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set
the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Percent Wind for Hydrotest
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
UBC Wind Importance Factor
Enter the value of the UBC Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this value
directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:
6-17
Entry
Definition
1.15
1.15
1.0
1.0
Most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0. The four Occupancy Categories (I-IV) are defined in Table 23-K of the code.
6-18
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are
following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Exposure Constant
Definition
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure
factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Percent Wind for Hydrotest
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
Critical Damping Ratio
The dynamic gust evaluation in NBC requires that the user assign a critical damping ratio
for the tower. NBC recommends the use of the value 0.0016 (dimensionless) for tall metal
unlined stacks, but says that these values will go up for shorter towers. We recommend the
following:
Entry
Definition
0.0016
0.0032
0.0064
6-19
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Roughness Factor as found in Figure B-15:
Entry
Definition
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some
designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc.
instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an
increased wind diameter.
6-20
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
Design Wind Speed
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are
following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Exposure Constant
Definition
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure
factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
6-21
Importance Factor
This value varies between .087 and 1.15 and is found in Table 6-2 of ASCE 95.
Roughness Factor
Definition
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some
designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc.
instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an
increased wind diameter.
Height of Hill (H)
Enter the distance ( upwind or downwind ) from the crest to the building site
Height above Ground
This is the distance upwind of the crest where the difference in ground elevation is half the
hill or escarpment height.
Type of Hill
0 - none
1 - 2-D ridge
2 - 2-D escarpment
Damping Factor
Enter the structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping). The damping
factor is used in the calculation of the gust response factor. Additionally, if you wish to run
another case empty or filled (or both), specify the values of the damping factor (beta) for
these cases. By entering these values PVElite will compute the gust response factor for
each case and the subsequent wind loads. The results will be displayed in the Wind Load
Calculation and Wind Shear and Bending reports.
6-22
Technical Note
For vessels that have a constant diameter the value of h/d is straightforward. The ratio is
merely the total height of the vessel divided by the insulated outside diameter. This computation is more difficult for vessels of more than 1 diameter (i.e.: vessels that have
cones). The first step is to compute the total height h. Next the total cross sectional area of
the vessel is computed. To get a properly weighted value for h/d we square the maximum
height and divide by the total area. Finally to get Cf we index into the table as needed and
interpolate for the final value. If you have a shape factor specified and do not wish to use
the computed value, specify your own shape factor in the Tools, Configuration option
from the Main Menu.
6-23
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to
120 miles per hour. Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are
following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Wind Zone Number
India is divided into 6 wind zones. Refer to figure 1 in the IS-875 code to determine which
wind zone the vessel will operate in. The program will gather the basic wind speed based
on the zone. However, this value can be overridden by typing in a basic wind speed in the
Design Wind Speed field.
Risk Factor
This is the value of K1 and it varies between 1.05 and 1.08 depending on which zone has
been entered above.
Terrain Category
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions including open sea coasts and treeless
plains.
Category 2
Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights between 1.5 to 10 meters. This
category is generally used for design purposes.
Category 3
This is terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions which have buildings up to 10
M in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns and industrial areas fully or partially
developed.
Category 4
Terrain consisting of large closely spaced obstructions. This category includes large urban
centers and well developed industrial centers.
6-24
Equipment Class
If you wish to include the gust response factor per IS-875, check this box. However, since
this factor increases the wind load 3 to 6 times, it may lead to a very conservative wind
design.
6-25
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the
hydrotest. This is typically as low as one third the design wind load, since it can be
assumed that the vessel will not be hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
Wind Profile Data
With this selection, PVElite will forego all code calculations and simply use the users
profile of height versus wind pressure. Enter the profile in the area below the standard
wind design code data. Enter the height above grade (in length units) in the left cell, and
the wind pressure at that height in the right cell. If you have more cells available than you
need to describe the profile, simply enter zeros in all the remaining cells. Zero elevation
corresponds to the bottom of the skirt or leg supports for a vertical vessel and to the bottom of the saddle which supports a horizontal vessel.
Note
When entering this data, you need to multiply the wind pressure at each elevation
by the shape factor you wish to use. If you do not do this, your wind loads will be
higher (conservative) than they really are.
The first Elevation field should not be zero. If it is zero the program will not compute the
wind loads on the following elements. The input should follow the convention below.
6-26
Seismic Data
Seismic Data
Seismic Design Code
UBC Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
NBC National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edition.
IS-1893 RSM India's seismic design code based on the response spectrum method.
IS-1893 SCM India's seismic design code based on the seismic coefficient method.
UBC97 Uniform Building Code. The 1997 version of this code is implemented.
Response Spectrum The response spectrum analysis allows the use of modal time
history analysis. The general design guidelines for this analysis are taken from the
ASCE 7-98 or IBC 2000 Codes. Other predefined spectra are built into the program,
such as the 1940 Earthquake El Centro and various spectra from the United States
National Regulatory Commission Guide 1.60. If the spectrum analysis type is userdefined, the table of points that define the response spectra must be entered in the
table, in the appropriate units. For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more
accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent method. Usually the computed
loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using the conventional Building
Code techniques.
Rev. A
Rev. A
6-27
Rev. A
Enter the value of ASCE 7-88 Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this
value directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 22, Occupancy Importance Factor, I (Earthquake Loads) of
the ASCE standard. Building categories are defined in Table1 of the standard.
Entry
Definition
1.00
1.25
1.50
0.00
Enter an integer indicating the Soil Profile Coefficient, S found in Table 24 of the standard. Soil Profiles are identified in Section 9.4.2 of the standard. Note that where soil
properties are not known, soil profiles S2 or S3 shall be used, whichever produces the
larger value of CS. (C is defined in Eq. 8 of the standard.)
Entry
6-28
Definition
Soil Profile S2: Deep cohesion less deposits or stiff clay conditions
(S Factor = 1.2)
Enter the seismic force factor per ANSI A58.1 Table 24. Typical values for this factor are
as follows:
Entry
Definition
1.33
1.00
2.50
Elevated tanks
2.00
Other structures
Note that the value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks supported by structural steel or legs.
Percent Seismic for Hydrotest
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See ASCE 7-88 Figures 14 & 15 to select the
appropriate zone. Values for Seismic Coefficient, Z are found in Table 21 of the standard.
Zone
Definition
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 4 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
6-29
Enter Av, the seismic coefficient representing the effective peak velocity-related acceleration from Section 9.1.4.1 of the code. This value may be obtained from the map on pages
36 and 37 of the standard. In general this value ranges from 0.05 (low incidence of earthquake) to 0.4 (high incidence of earthquake).
Seismic Coefficient Cc
Enter Cc, the system seismic coefficient for mechanical and electrical components from
Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. For tanks, vessels and heat exchangers this value is
normally taken as 2.0.
Performance Criteria Factor P
Enter P, the performance criteria factor from Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. This factor depends on the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group which is defined in Section 9.1.4.2 of
the standard.
Entry
Definition
1.5
1.0
0.5
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Amplification Factor ac
Enter ac, the attachment amplification factor determined in accordance with ASCE 7-93
Table 9.8-3. Values for this entry may be 1.0 or 2.0 depending on the relationship between
the fundamental period of the vessel and the fundamental period of its supporting structure.
6-30
Enter the value of the UBC Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this value
directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:
Entry
Definition
1.25
1.25
1.00
1.00
Select the soil type (S1 to S4) defined in Table 23-J of the code. Note that where soil properties are not known, soil profile S3 shall be used.
Soil
Definition
Soil Profile S3:Not more than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 1.5)
Enter an integer corresponding to the factor RW found in UBC Table 23-Q. RW is used in
determining the seismic force factor for nonbuilding structures. As per UBC: tanks, vessels or pressurized spheres on braced or unbraced legs have RW = 3 and distributed mass
cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt-supported vertical vessels
have RW = 4.
Percent Seismic for Hydrotest
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
6-31
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appropriate zone. The zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
Zone
Definition
Zone 2b:Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest
(Z = 0.20)
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 5 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
6-32
Enter the value of the NBC Importance Factor found in Sentence 4.1.9.1 (10). Please note
the program will use this value directly without modification.
Entry
Definition
1.5
Post-disaster buildings
1.3
Schools
1.0
Select the soil factor (From Table 4.1.9C) for the site:
Soil
Definition
Category 4:Very soft and soft fine-grained soils with depth greater
than 15 m
Enter an integer to indicate the type of lateral load resisting system. This value will be
used to set the Force Modification Factor (R) per Table 4.1.9.B and sentences 4.1.9.1 (8)
and 4.1.9.3 (3):
Entry
Note
Definition
Elevated tank analysis also includes the special provisions of sentence 4.1.9.3 (3).
6-33
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Acceleration Zone
Select the acceleration-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and
acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC.
Here are some examples of each zone:
Entry
Acceleration-Related Zone
Calgary, Alberta
Toronto, Ontario
Varennes, Quebec
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 6 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
6-34
Velocity Zone
Select the zone indicating the velocity-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the
velocity and acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC. Here are some examples of each zone:
Zone
Velocity-Related Zone
Steinbach, Manitoba
Calgary, Alberta
Montreal, Quebec
Dawson, Yukon
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 6 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
6-35
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Importance Factor
The importance factor is taken from table 4 in the IS-1893 standard. This value ranges
from a maximum of 6.0 to 1.0.
1.5Used in the design of important structures such as hospitals, tanks, water towers,
and large assembly structures.
1.0All others
Soil Factor
The soil factor (Beta) is taken from Table 3 of the IS-1893 seismic design code. This value
ranges between 1 and 1.5.
Type II soils should also use a value of 1 except for well foundations or isolated RCC
footings without tiebeams or unreinforced strip foundations which receive a value of
2.0.
Type III soils can receive a value between 1.0 and 1.5.
Zone Number
The zone number ranges between 1 and 5 and depends on where the vessel will operate in
India. You can determine the zone from a colored map of which is Figure 1 in IS 1893.
Period of Vibration
This field is optional. PVElite computes the natural frequency of the vessel and can thus
compute the period of vibration. If this field is not 0 the program will use the entered
value. This value is used in conjunction with Beta in order to determine Sa/g.
Damping Factor
This value which is used with the period of vibration to determine Sa/g. Values of damping in the IS 1893 standard are 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. The program will interpolate for
intermediate values in between 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. Extreme values will be used if a
damping factor is entered which is outside the range above.
6-36
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Importance Factor
ASCE-95 does not address an importance factor. However, this value is multiplied times
the other values to compute the base shear. Thusly, this entry can be used as a scale factor
for the base shear. If you do not wish to use this value simply enter a value of 1.0.
Force Factor ( R )
This value is taken from table 9.2.7.5. For vertical vessels, towers, stacks etc. this value is
2.0.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4A on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically this will be a given value. However, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4B on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically, this will be a given value. However, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
The help facility in PVElite contains the above referenced tables.
6-37
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
UBC Earthquake Importance Factor
Enter the value of the UBC Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this value
directly without modification.
This value is taken from Table 16-K of the UBC 1997 standard. The following is the context of Table 16-K.
Category Value
Enter the value of CA per the project specifications and table 16-Q of UBC 1997 edition.
This value is a function of the seismic zone Z, and the soil profile type. This coefficient
ranges from 0.44 to 0.06. In zone 4 this value is also a function of Na.
UBC Seismic Coefficient CV
Enter the value of CV per the project specifications and table 16-R of UBC 1997 edition.
This value is a function of the seismic zone Z, and the soil profile type. This coefficient
ranges from 0.96 to 0.06. In zone 4 this value is also a function of Nv.
UBC Near Source Factor
This factor is only used in UBC Seismic Zone 4. This value ranges from 1 to 2 and is a
function of the distance relative to the seismic source.
UBC Seismic Zone
See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appropriate zone. The zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
6-38
Zone 2b - Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest (Z=0.20)
Note that Zone 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while Zone 4 indicates
the greatest chance of an earthquake.
UBC Horizontal Force Factor
Enter the seismic force factor R per UBC Table 16-P 1997 edition:
2.9 - Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt
supported vertical vessels.
6-39
6-40
Rev. A
The values for Ss and Sl are taken from the ASCE 7-98 / IBC 2000 publication. These factors are for short and long periods (0.2 and 1.0). These tables are found on pgs. 100 - 117
(ASCE 98), page 351 (IBC) publication.
Response Modification Factor R
Enter the value from table 9.5.2.2 (ASCE) 1617.6 (IBC) as required. R is usually equal to
2.5 for inverted pendulum systems and cantilevered column systems. For elevated tanks
use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and others use a value of 3.0.
Importance Factor
This is the occupancy importance factor as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The
importance factor accounts for loss of life and property. This value typically ranges
between 1.0 and 1.5.
Moment Reduction Factor Tau
This value is used to reduce the moment at each level. A value greater than one will scale
the moments up, while a value that is less than one will lower the moments. We suggest a
value of 1.0. This value should not be less than 0.8.
Seismic Design Category
Select an appropriate category from the pulldown. The choices are A through F. The program uses these values only to check the minimum value of Cs per equation 9.5.3.2.1-4
(ASCE), 1615.1.1 (IBC). This additional check is only performed if the Seismic Design
Category is E or F.
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv
6-41
Rev. A
Ss<+0.25
Ss=0.5
Ss=0.75
Ss=1.0
Ss>1.25b
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.1
1.0
2.5
1.7
1.2
0.9
Sl<+0.1
Sl=0.2
Sl=0.3
Sl=0.4
Sl>0.5b
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
2.4
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.5
3.5
3.2
2.8
2.4
Note
For intermediate values, the higher value of the straight line interpolation shall be
used to determine the value of Ssor Sl.
Site specific geo-technical information and dynamic site response analyses shall be
performed.
b
Site specific studies required per Section 9.4.1.2.4 may result in higher values of
than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.13.
6-42
Rev. A
Response Spectrum
Response Spectrum
Selecting this method performs a dynamic analysis of the vessel, applying loading based
upon the selected seismic Response Spectrum.
Initially, the vessel is modeled as a 2- dimensional structure (note that for asymmetric leg
arrangements, the horizontal direction of interest is taken as that corresponding to the
weakest axis of the arrangement). Next an eigensolution is performed on the vessel, which
determines system mode shapes and modal natural frequencies (all modes with natural frequencies up through 100 HZ are calculated). The seismic response of each mode is then
extracted from the Response Spectrum according to the natural frequency of each mode,
and then adjusted according to the modes "participation factor". The system response is
then determined by combining all of the modal responses.
For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical
static equivalent method. Usually the computed loads are lower in magnitude than those
computed using conventional building Code techniques.
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force which is to be applied during
hydrotest. Although you cannot predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some
designers use a reduced seismic load for hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a water release small.
Response Spectrum Name
6-43
Response Spectrum
User Defined
This option allows the user to enter a custom seismic response spectrum of type Frequency
or Period vs. Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration (see instructions below). The same
spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
El Centro
This response spectrum is based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro, California earthquake,
North-South component, 5-10% damping as described in Introduction to Structural
Dynamics by John Biggs. This spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical
directions.
ASCE
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the
modal analysis procedure of ASCE Standard 7-98. The horizontal spectrum is a built
according to the ASCE-7 Section 9.4.1.2.6, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat
acceleration of 0.2S
IBC
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the
modal analysis procedure of the International Building Code 2000 (which happen to mirror those of ASCE-7). The horizontal spectrum is built according to IBC-2000 Section
1615.1, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2 (as per IBC-2000
Section 1617. 1).
1.60D.5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commissions Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the sites Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D2
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commissions Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 2 % of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the sites Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commissions Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the sites Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D7
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commissions Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 7% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the sites Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
6-44
Response Spectrum
1.60D10
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commissions Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with 10% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the sites Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
Importance Factor
This is used for the ASCE and IBC options. FOr ASCE, this is the I, the occupancy importance factor determined from ASCE-7 Section 9.14. For IBC, this is the Ie, the occupancy
importance factor in accordance with IBC 1616.2.
Shock Scale X|Y dir
This is used for User defined, El Centro, and the 1.60Dxx spectra; and is used to scale the
horizontal and vertical spectra respectively. For example, many seismic specifications
require that the vertical spectrum be identical to, but with 2/3 of the magnitude, of the horizontal spectrum. This corresponds to an X scale of 1.0 and a Y scale of 0.6667.
Traditionally in the analysis of vertical vessels, the component in the vertical direction is
typically ignored. If you wish to do so, enter a value of 0 in the Y direction field.
Zero Period Acceleration
This is used to scale the normalized 1.60 Dxx spectra. The Zero Period Acceleration corresponds to the acceleration of the rigid (high frequency) portion of the spectrum, which
usually corresponds to the maximum ground acceleration expected at the site.
Combination Method
Modal responses must be combined in a way that most accurately captures the statistical
correlation of the responses to each other. The available options are:
SRSS: This method performs a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares combination of
the modal results. This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be
uncorrelated with, or totally unrelated to, each other. If the ASCE or IBC method has
been chosen, modal combinations will automatically be performed using this method.
This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very close frequencies, since those modes will probably experience their maximum DLF at approximately the same time during the load profile.
Group: This method performs a group combination method as described in the United
States National Regulatory Commissions Regulatory Guide 1.92 - responses of
modes with natural frequencies within 10% of each other are combined using the
Absolute Value method, while those sums are combined with each other and with
m0ore far-flung modes, using the SRSS method. This simulates a response where the
6-45
Response Spectrum
results of similar modes are assumed to be correlated, while those of all dissimilar
modes are assumed to be uncorrelated.
Absolute: This method performs an Absolute Value combination of the modal results.
This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be correlated with
each other.
This method gives the most conservative result, since it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load.
This is usually overly-conservative, since modes with different natural frequencies
will probably experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
This factor is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, and is used to construct the horizontal
response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determine from Table 9.4.1.2.4a, while for IBC2000 it is determined from Table 1615.1.2(1). Typical values are 0.8 through 2.5 and
above. For more information on the values of Fa refer to IBC 2000 Earthquake Parameters
in this chapter.
Acc Based Factor Fv:
This factor is required for ASCE - 7 and IBC, and is used to construct the horizontal
response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determine from Table 9.4.1.2.4a, while for IBC2000 it is determined from Table 1615.1.2(2). Typical value are 0.8 through 3.5 and
above. For more information on the values of Fv refer to IBC 2000 Earthquake Parameters
in this chapter.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss:
This factor, the "mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration
at short periods" is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, is used to construct the horizontal
response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determined in accordance with Section 9.4.1, while
for IBC-2000 it is determined from Section 1615.1. Typical values are 0.0 through 2.0g.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl:
This factor, the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration
at a period of 1 second", is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, is used to construct the horizontal response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is determined in accordance with Section 9.4.1,
while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Section 1615.1. Typical values are 0.0 through
1.5g.
Response Modification R:
This factor is required for ASDCE-7 and IBC, and is used to reduce the spectrum
response. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Table 1617.6 Typical values are 1.25 through 8.0.
For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and others use a value of 3.0.
6-46
Response Spectrum
Coefficient Cd:
This factor, the "deflection amplification factor", is used to scale up the calculated seismic
displacements. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is
determined from Table 1617.6. Typical values are 1.25 through 6.5.
Range Type:
User Defined spectra may be enter with a range X axis representing either Frequency or
Period. In either case, the data points should be entered with ascending range values.
Note
A zero entry for either Frequency or Period is invalid. Interpolation will be made
linearly for intermediate range values. Data points defining the spectrum can be
entered by clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Ordinate Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with an ordinate Y axis representing Displacement,
Velocity, or Acceleration entered in units of Diameter, Diameter /second, of Gs respectively. Interpolation will be made linearly for intermediate Ordinate values. Data points
defining the spectrum can be entered by clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Include Missing Mass Components:
Since only a limited number of modes of vibration i.e., only those with natural frequencies
up to 100 HZ or so are used in the analysis, the entire mass of the structure doesnt get
considered in the seismic analysis. Clicking this box causes PVElite to estimate the contribution of the neglected modes of vibration and add that to the dynamically calculated
response.
Note
6-47
Response Spectrum
6-48
&KDSWHU
PVElite Analysis
Once all the data for the vessel model and analysis have been entered and corrected, the
model is ready for analysis. The pull-down menu under Analyze shows two options:
Analyze
Error Check Only will review all the data and produce an output report listing any errors
that are found. These messages can be examined through the Output - Review option. If
Analyze is selected, PVElite will also run through the error checker but then continue on
(if no errors are found) through the complete analysis.
The analysis program is the heart of the PVElite system. All the data entered into the
model is used by the analysis program to evaluate or design the pressure vessel. In any
given analysis there will be between 16 and 20 analysis steps. As the program completes
each calculation, important information from the step is displayed on the screen. The
screen display at the completion of the internal pressure calculations, for example, lists
both the given element thickness and the required thickness for each element in the vessel.
The program waits for a user response before clearing the screen and moving on to the
next analysis step. The user may respond by continuing on to the next step, continue nonstop through the remainder of all analysis steps, or quit the analysis. The results of the
analysis are stored in two separate files on the hard disk. The text results of the job are
held in a file with the extension .TAB (e.g. the jobname VES01 will have an input file
named VES01.PVI and a text results file of VES01.TAB) The output processor replaces
this .TAB file with a .T80 file (VES01.T80). The .T80 file contains a complete report for
each analysis step for inspection and printing through the Review processor. The analysis
also creates a .PVR file (e.g.. VES01.PVR); this file is used by the output Review processor for component analysis. The program transfers to the Review processor at the completion of the analysis.
PVElite not only analyzes vessels, it also designs vessel walls for pressures and loads. In
addition to increasing the vessel wall thickness, the program can instead introduce stiffener rings to accommodate external pressures. The program directives for these design
modifications are set in each job in the Design Data section of Global Data. In increasing
the wall thickness to meet the required values, PVElite can either set the thickness to the
PVElite Analysis
7-1
exact requirement, or, round up to the next nominal value (1/16 inch in English units or 1
mm in metric units). This switch, too, is a setting in the Configuration option under Utility.
If PVElites design process changes any of the original input, the program will automatically erase the current output report and return to the beginning of the analysis and restart
the run. All results will reflect the design changes, from the input echo to the added deadweight. The users original input, however, will not be changed. If a design flag is turned
on and the required thickness is less than the entered thickness, PVElite will increase the
thickness as needed and continue.
7-2
PVElite Analysis
Most of the errors that are easily made will have already been caught by the input program. However, there are some errors which can only be discovered after the analysis
begins. There are also some warnings that may be of help to the user. This first routine
check creates a report in the output. If any of the input errors would prevent the program
from running, execution stops right here. Check the output to determine the exact error
discovered by the program.
Step 1: Input Echo
PVElite provides a very complete listing of your input. This includes the geometry and
materials for each element (head, shell, cone, flange, skirt, etc.) and the information for
any details attached to that element.
Step 2: XY Coordinate Calculations
The program simply calculates the X and Y locations of the first end of every element.
Step 3: Internal Pressure Calculations
The geometry, material, and loading data from your model are used to calculate the
required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each element (except
skirts and flanges). The calculations are done using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules, or the British Standard PD:5500 rules. The internal design pressure at any
point is taken to be the given design pressure for that element, plus the pressure due to liquid head, if any.
If you checked the design flag increase thickness for internal pressure and any element is
too thin for the given pressure, the program will automatically (or under interactive control) increase the thickness of the element. There is a computation control (under Utilities
on the Main Menu) that allows you to increase the element thickness to exactly that
required, or to round the thickness up to the next nominal size.
If the program has increased the thickness, it will recalculate all the required thicknesses
and maximum allowable working pressures for the vessel, and create a new table showing
these results.
After the internal pressure calculation is complete, PVElite prints the formulas and substitutions, as well minimum design metal temperatures for the elements.
Step 4: Hydrotest calculations
The user specifies what kind of hydrotest (and/or the hydrotest pressure) on the global
input screens. The program uses this information to calculate the maximum allowed
hydrotest pressure and required thickness at the given pressure for each element.
Step 5: External Pressure calculations
Two of the three key variables for external pressure calculations are explicitly defined by
the user: diameter and thickness. The third variable, length of section, is calculated by the
PVElite Analysis
7-3
program for the given geometry. Thus if the vessel has two heads and some number of
cylindrical elements with no stiffening rings, the program will calculate the design length
for each cylinder using the full length of the vessel plus 1/3 the depth of the heads. If there
are stiffening rings, the program will calculate an appropriately shorter value.
The program displays the formulas and substitutions for the external pressure calculations
on each element. Then the same results are displayed in tabular form.
If the element is not thick enough for the external pressure (and you checked the design
boxes in the input) the program will allow you to increase the thickness and/or add stiffening rings (which are created automatically and added to your model). If the thickness is
increased the program has to go all the way back to step 3. For rings it simply repeats this
step with the new lengths.
British Standard PD:5500
When performing the PD:5500 external pressure calculations, the program first computes
the length of section for the given geometry. The length of section is either the distance
between stiffeners, or, if there are no stiffeners, it is the full length of the vessel plus 0.4
times the depth of the heads.
Using the length of section computed, the program first tests to see whether the thickness
of the unsupported cylinder (or distance between supports) is satisfactory for the given
pressure. A value of Pmax is determined.
If there are stiffeners, then the program performs the calculations described in section
3.6.2.3. The program first performs the computations described in Method A, and then
performs the more rigorous calculations described in Method B. For each of these methods (and each value of n), a value of Pn and Fn are obtained.
Pn is the elastic instability pressure of the stiffened cylinder or cone. The value of Pn must
not be less than 1.8*Pext in the case of fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and 2.0*Pext in
the case of cold formed stiffeners.
Fn is the maximum stress in the stiffener flange divided by the yield stress of the stiffener.
A value for Fn is computed for both fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and cold formed
stiffeners. These values must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Step 6: Weight of Elements
Element weights are calculated in both the corroded and uncorroded conditions. Note that
for heads the distance given in the input program is taken as the length of the straight
flange on the head. This step also calculates the volume of the element.
Step 7: Weight of Details
Each detail has a separate weight calculation. Of note is the fact that partial volumes of
liquid in both heads and cylinders and in both the horizontal and vertical directions are
correctly calculated.
Step 8: ANSI Flange MAWP
If you entered nozzles, you specified the material and class of the attached flanges.
PVElite has the full ANSI flange tables built in, and tells you the rating of the flanges at
the operating temperature.
7-4
PVElite Analysis
Several weight cases are calculated including: empty, operating, and hydrotest. The various detail weights/loads are included in the following cases:
Detail:
Empty
Operating
Hydrotest
Saddle
Platform
Packing
Liquid
Insulation
Lining
Rings
Nozzles
Trays
Legs
Lugs
Weight
Forces/Moments
This step also calculates the moment due to individual detail which may not be on the centerline of the vessel. These are usually small. Finally, this step calculates the forces at the
support. The vertical force and bending moment (due to detail weights only) are calculated
for the one support cases (skirts, legs, lugs) and the vertical force at each support is calculated when there are two saddle supports.
Note : In addition to computing the above weights PVElite also computes the fabricated
weight, shop test weight, shipping weight, erected weight, empty weight and field test
weight. The computed weights may or may not include removable or field installed items
such as packing and other details. You can specify where these details are to be installed
(either shop or field) in the Global Input. Simply switch to the global input screen and
click the Installation Miscellaneous Options button located on the button bar at the top of
the screen. By default the program assumes that all details will be installed in the shop and
calculate these various weights based on that assumption.
The cumulative weight on the vessel will look drastically different for horizontal vessels
on saddle supports than for vertical vessels on skirts, legs, and lugs:
Horizontal cases: Expect the highest weight forces near the saddles, with almost no weight
force at the ends or in the middle.
Vertical cases: Expect the weight forces to increase from zero at the top to a maximum at
the support. If there are elements below the support, expect the weight force to be negative.
The cumulative moment includes only the moment due to eccentric details, and is usually
quite small (except in the case of a large applied moment).
PVElite Analysis
7-5
PVElite uses two classical solution methods to determine the first order natural frequencies of vessels. For vertical vessels, the program uses the Freese method, which is commonly used in industry. For horizontal vessels a similar method attributed to Rayliegh and
Ritz is used. Each method works by calculating the static deflection of the vessel (for vertical, the vessel as a horizontal cantilever beam). The natural frequency is proportional to
the square root of the deflection. Note that the screen display shows only the deflection you must look at the output to see the frequency.
Step 12: Wind Load Calculation
PVElite uses the rules of ASCE-7, NBC, UBC, and IS-875 to calculate wind loads. Each
of these codes uses a basic wind pressure, a function of the velocity squared, along with
several surface and site factors to determine the final wind pressure.
Step 13: Earthquake Load Calculation
The five codes used by PVElite - ASCE-7, UBC, NBC, IS-1893 RSM and IS-1893 SCM
each use a static equivalent load to model the earthquake load. Simple site data and loading data are used to determine an expected static equivalent horizontal load on the vessel.
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake
These loadings generate horizontal loads, which are usually fine on a horizontal vessel,
but can cause high overturning moments on a vertical vessel. The program calculates the
cumulative shear and bending moment on the vessel, for use in later stress calculations.
Step 15: Wind Deflection
PVElite calculates the deflection at every point in either horizontal or vertical vessels.
Step 16: Longitudinal Stress Constants
As the program prepares to do structural calculations on the vessel, it first calculates the
cross sectional area and section modulus of each element in both the corroded and uncorroded condition.
Step 17: Longitudinal Allowable Stresses
There are four allowable stresses in the longitudinal direction for each element: (1) Longitudinal tension based on the basic allowable stress, often multiplied times 1.2 (as specified
on the global input), (2) Hydrotest longitudinal tension - 1.5 times the allowable stress
new & cold. (3) Longitudinal compression - based on paragraph UG-23 of the Code, and
the materials external pressure chart. (4) Hydrotest allowable compression - the basic
allowable compression new & cold, multiplied by 1.5.
Step 18: Longitudinal stresses due to . . .
Each load (wind, earthquake, weight, pressure) generates a stress. These are calculated
individually and displayed by this routine. Note that bending stresses, though only displayed once, are actually positive on one side of the vessel and negative on the other.
Step 19: Stress due to Combined Loads
In this step the various load cases combinations defined by the user are evaluated.
7-6
PVElite Analysis
There can be as many as twelve cases, combining pressure loads, weight loads, and
moments in various ways. A fairly complete set of load cases is included as a default:
Load Case
Definition
NP+EW+WI+FW
NP+EW+EQ+FS
NP+OW+WI+FW
NP+OW+EQ+FS
NP+HW+HI
NP+HW+HE
IP+OW+WI+FW
IP+OW+EQ+FS
EP+OW+WI+FW
10
EP+OW+EQ+FS
11
HP+HW+HI
12
HP+HW+HE
13
IP+WE+EW
14
IP+WF+CW
15
IP+VO+OW
16
IP+VE+OW
17
IP+VF+CW
The difference between wind loads and hydrotest wind loads is simply a ratio (percentage)
defined by the user. This percentage is specified in the Wind Data definition of Global
Data - usually about 33% (thus setting the hydrotest wind load at 33% of the operating
wind load). Likewise, the hydrotest earthquake load is a percentage of the earthquake
load; this percentage is defined in the Seismic Data definition of Global Data.
Some steps that are not applicable for horizontal vessels, such as natural frequency, will
not be printed. Also, if a vessel has no supports, steps greater than 10 will not be computed.
PVElite Analysis
7-7
Optional Steps
Optional Steps
PVElite includes two analyses that are done under specific circumstances:
1. Cone evaluation - cones are evaluated for internal and external pressure at the large
and small ends, and any stiffening rings near the cones are included and evaluated.
2. Zick stresses - stresses due to saddle supports are evaluated and compared to allowable stresses using the method of L.P. Zick. Note that the stresses are calculated for
each saddle, since in PVElite each saddle can have different loading. Note also that
the stresses are not evaluated at the mid span, since the program automatically does
that for all the various load case combinations.
3. AISC Leg Check: After the program has computed all of the weights, forces and
moments, it can then determine the overall state of stress by using the AISC unity
check method. The program typically looks at the worst loads on the legs due to wind
or seismic in the operating condition and then applies the AISC method of checking
the legs. The unity check must be less than or equal to 1.0. Most typical designs fall in
the 0.7 - 0.8 range, which is a good check both in terms of economy and safety.
4. Lug Support Check : In a similar manner to the leg check the program gathers the
worst loads on the support lugs and then evaluates them according to a set of acceptable standards. In this case, gussets are checked by the AISC method and the lug
plates are checked by common industry standard methods. These methods are outlined
in common pressure design handbooks.
5. Baserings: With known forces and moments at the base and the geometry of the
basering, PVElite will analyze or design the basering and gusset geometry.
6. Flanges: For main body flanges, the program will compute the required thickness of
the flange, all relevant stresses, and MAWP for the given geometry. The results seen
in the output are based on the input thickness. The program additionally computes
the required thickness of the flange. Please note that the program does not include the
forces and moments to determine an equivalent design pressure. There are separate
fields in the input that can be entered in if these effects are to be considered. In order
to do this two runs would have to made. After run 1 was made the forces and moments
on the flange could be entered in as needed.
7. Nozzle Analysis : Complete nozzle evaluation is incorporated into the program based
on the rules in the ASME code. Design cases are made for Internal Pressure, External
Pressure and MAPnc. The internal pressure can be based on the MAWP of the entire
vessel or the exact pressure at the nozzle location. These options are located in the
Global Input section of the input. In addition to perpendicular nozzles, hillside geometries are also considered. Nozzles at any angle can be entered in by using the
ANG=xx.x command in the nozzle description field. The nozzle analysis also computes MDMT, weld size and strength calculations along with provisions for large nozzles as outlined in appendix 1-7 of the ASME Code.
7-8
PVElite Analysis
Component Analysis
Component Analysis
Once the program has completed the above calculations, the results may be reviewed in
the output processor. These results (such as required wall thickness vs. finished wall thickness) may also be used for the evaluation of other components of the vessel. Rather than
automatically analyzing all the possible vessel element details, the output processor provides component analysis for only those details selected by the user. Other details that are
not part of the current vessel may also be analyzed here. This processor is described in the
next chapter.
PVElite Analysis
7-9
Component Analysis
7-10
PVElite Analysis
&KDSWHU
Output / Review
Generating Output
Output may be reviewed or generated for any job that has some input. Results of any previous analysis, of course, are only available if the analysis has been run. To access the output, first bring up the proper job through the File item on the Main Menu bar. Then,
clicking on Output on the Main Menu bar will produce a pull-down menu that controls the
programs output. The pull-down menu provides two options:
Review Report Enters the Review processor where results of the analysis may be
inspected on the screen, printed, or copied to a file.
Review the DXF FileInvokes a compatible DXF processor on the machine if one
exists.
The remainder of this chapter will focus on the many capabilities of the Review processor.
Output / Review
8-1
Once you have selected some reports, click on the Monitor icon to review them on the
screen or press the Printer icon to print them.
Note
8-2
Once a report has been selected for screen viewing, it can be edited just as if it
were in a word processor. Comments can be added for clarity and entire lines and
parts of reports can be deleted or rearranged.
Output / Review
Using Review
Using Review
The following screen shows a selected report:
Output / Review
8-3
Component Analysis
Component Analysis
Analysis of vessel details is initiated from the Input Menu.
8-4
Output / Review
Component Analysis
The units for the component analysis are extracted from the current vessel input. In the
example here, Half Pipes Jacket was selected. The initial screen is shown below.
Output / Review
8-5
Component Analysis
8-6
Output / Review
&KDSWHU
Component Analysis Tutorial
9-1
File Menu
File Menu
9-2
The File Menu controls the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed
in the menu with an ellipsis () cause a file manage window to appear when selected.
The File Menu may be used to
New
New Dialog
Open
Open Dialog
9-3
When the Open option is chosen, the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of
type *.cci will be displayed for selection.
Save
Save As Dialog
Save As - Save a file that has not been previously named or save the current file under
another name.
Print - Send the current vessel graphic image directly to a postscript or laser jet printer.
Print Preview - Display the page that will be sent to the printer (see above).
Exit - Exit PVElite. A message window will appear to give the user a last opportunity
to save any modifications to the current job.
The File Menu will also list the last four vessel input files. Any of these files may be
opened with a mouse click.
9-4
Edit Menu
Edit Menu
Edit Menu
Once a file is selected, the Edit Menu indicates the options available for editing. The Edit
Menu may be used to
Project Data - Enter up to 3 title lines which appear at the top of each page of a printed
report.
Add
New New
Item
Insert
Item
Insert New Item - Insert a new element after the current element.
Insert
New Item
Delete
Current
Item
Delete
Current Item
9-5
Analysis Menu
Analysis Menu
Analysis Menu
The Analysis options enable the program to quit the input process and enter the analysis
process. PVElite will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename,
then process the analysis. The Analyze Menu may be used to
Analyze File
Analyze
Selected Item
9-6
Analyze Current Item- Perform calculations for the current analysis type. The analysis program looks for appropriate data in the current analysis file and performs calculations, saving the results in a text file. The results of the analysis will then be ready
for display or printing.
Analyze Selected Items - Perform calculations for selected analysis types. The calculations will be saved in a binary file and will be ready for display or printing.
Choose Analysis Type - Select the type of component you wish to work on.
Analysis Menu
The analysis types chosen from this menu can also be selected from the Analysis Tool Bar
by simply clicking on the icon.
9-7
Output Menu
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output option allows the user to review the analysis results and print the graphics of
the vessel. The Output Menu may be used to
9-8
Review - Review the analysis results of the current job, if those results are available.
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Configuration
Configuration - This option allows the user to define a variety of system variables for
the program. The first screen of the Configuration menu looks like this:
The Computation Control Tab lets some specific program computation control parameters
be set. Following is a description of the options:
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness? In many cases pressure vessels are designed
and built long before the piping system is attached to them. This means that the nozzle
loadings are unknown. If this field is checked, then your minimum nozzle thickness (trn)
will be the maximum of:
trn = (.134, trn for internal pressure) less than or equal Nps 18
trn = (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) greater than Nps 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some
additional metal to work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels
9-9
Tools Menu
are designed for. Note carefully, that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are
used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input.
If you do so, that will override this calculation.
Use P instead of MAWP for UG-99B? The Code paragraph UG-99(b) discusses the
subject of Hydrostatic test pressure on vessels. The equation that would normally be used
is as follows :
Test Pressure = 1.5 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-98 addenda)
Or
Test Pressure = 1.3 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-99 addenda & later)
The code in note 35 states that if the MAWP may be assumed to be the same as the design
pressure when calculations are not made to determine the MAWP.
This will allow for lower test pressures. This directive should be used with caution.
Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles? The Code paragraph UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area placement calculations when small nozzles are
involved. The Code States:
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less
2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this box is not checked, then no area of reinforcement calculations will be performed.
Print Water Volume in Gallons/Liters? Normally the volumes computed by the program are in diameter units.
If you want to use US gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The program will use cubic units if the default value if it is not checked. For non-English units, the
volume will be printed in liters if this box is checked.
Use Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads in UG-45 b1? The Code in
paragraph UG-45 requires a calculation of the required head thickness at the location of
the nozzle. This may lead one to believe that the thickness may be computed per paragraph
UG-37. However a recent code interpretation states that the thickness should be computed
by the rules of paragraph UG-32 or by the rules in Appendix 1.Thus, this directive should
always be checked.
9-10
Tools Menu
Use Pre-1999 Addenda? As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of the ASME Code is
mandatory. This mandatory revision includes changes to the material properties of many
materials used for Division 1 vessel construction found in Section 2 Part D. Namely, the
allowable stresses were increased in certain ranges. PV Elite contains 2 databases of material properties. The default behavior is to use the current higher allowable stress database.
If you are re-rating an older vessel to the pre-1999 addenda and would like to use the older
material allowables, then you should check this box.
Since the program uses this directive to connect to the database, it should be checked
before any vessel modeling occurs. In case of an existing file, you must access the material
database for each material on each element defined so far, to update material properties
per the selected database. Other design codes will not be affected by this directive.
Use Code Case 2260? Code Case 2260 Approval Date: May 20, 1998. This Code Case
is entitled "Alternate Design Rules for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Formed Heads". It
applies for Section VIII Division 1. If this flag is checked then CodeCalc will use the modified equations in the Code Case to compute the required thickness of Elliptical/Torispherical heads. The typical net result is that by using these modified rules, a thinner head will
designed.
The Miscellaneous Tab of the Configuration Menu enables the user to select directives
that controls printout style, and default unit options. Following is a description of the
options:
9-11
Tools Menu
Report Content. This directive allows the user to change the length of the printed
reports. When the summary option is checked, the formulas and substitutions will not be
printed out. Thus, this option will generate less paper and more compact reports. When the
detailed option is checked, the reports will be the normal length.
External Printout in Rows? There are 2 choices for the style of printing external pressure results; rows and columns. Printing the values row wise tend to reduce the length of
the printouts. This is the default.
If you wish to use the column wise printout, do not check this directive.
Reload last file at startup? Check this box to automatically load the last file you were
working with when this processor is started.
Default units file. Select the system of units you typically prefer to work in.
Set Unit - This option allows the user to change the current jobs units system. Once
this option is selected, a File Open dialog will appear and allow the user to select a
new units file. These units files have the extension .fil. English, Metric, Newton, Bars,
and SI units are available in the system subdirectory. After you select a units file, the
following window will appear:
If the units selection is acceptable, then click the OK button; otherwise, click Cancel.
After OK is clicked, the current units will be overlayed with the selected units.
9-12
Make Unit - This option allows the creation of a custom units file. Simply pull down
the appropriate conversion constant or label and the corresponding unit or label will
change accordingly. If your conversion constant is not one of the choices, enter the
Tools Menu
label and constant for your particular unit. (The program will continue to use English
units internally).
This window presents a table of items, the internal units used for each item, a conversion
factor, and the user units. The conversion factor is used to obtain the user units from the
internal units. The up and down arrow keys can be used to move the selection to the
desired item. If a desired unit conversion is not available as a default program selection, it
can be entered manually by typing it in. Insure that your conversion constants are correct
and that your labels go with the constants. Once all units have been set, press OK to exit
this screen and save the new units file. A safe place to save it would be in the system subdirectory where the supplied units files are stored.
After you have saved the new units file, you will need to overlay the current units in your
job file with the new units. This option is the Set Unit option. After you set your file with
the new units, all of the entered data will be converted into the new set of units immediately.
9-13
Tools Menu
Calculator - This option allows the user to perform simple calculations and paste the
results in the input field in which the cursor resides.
Calculator
You can use the calculator to compute a number and transfer that number into PVElite by
using the Edit, Copy feature. From the desired field, right click and choose the Paste
option. Before pasting, ensure that the fields current contents have been removed.
9-14
Tools Menu
Edit/Add Materials - Allows you to add materials to the COADE Material database.
The screen appears as follows:
To use this processor, fill in all of the values in all cells. If more than one material is to be
entered, use the Next button to enter the new material. After all materials have been
entered, save the file with the Save button. Finally, press the Merge key to join the user
defined material database with the supplied material database.
Drawing Options - Allows the user to set the options for the graphics. Such as drawing
line thickness, font and the background color.
9-15
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics Menu helps to troubleshoot problem installations. The following options
are available:
9-16
CRC Check - This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
Build Version - This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
Error Review
DLL Version Check - This option checks to make sure the PVElite .dll files are current. Please note that if the dlls are not current the program may behave in an unusual
manner or may not run at all.
Register Servers - Sometimes the icons for various modules (Shells, Nozzles, Cones,
etc. ...) are grayed out, the user can enter the path to the PVElite installation directory
and select to register the DLLs. Then close the program and restart.(Does the icon
become active after this happens?
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities that interact with the External Software Lock. The
options are as follows:
Show Data - This option will display the data stored on the ESL.
Phone Update - This option will allow the user to obtain phone update authorization
information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.
Generate Fax Codes - This option will provide the user with access codes for remote
ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
Enter Fax Authorization Codes - Choose this option to enter the remote authorization
codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the
data stored on your ESL.
Check HASP Driver Status - This option provides information about the ESL device
drivers.
Install HASP Device Driver - This option installs the ESL device drivers.
9-17
View Menu
View Menu
View Menu
The View Menu allows the user to move between the Input, Drawing, Quick Analysis, and
Browse views.
9-18
Help Menu
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help Menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support
for PVElite. The options available are as follows:
Desktop (online) Help - Starts an interactive help session with COADE personnel.
Info - Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel for technical support, and provides a link to COADEs Web Site.
9-19
Performing an Analysis
Performing an Analysis
The remainder of this chapter will help you perform an actual analysis using the Shell program.
Start PVElite by clicking on the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs.
From the Input menu click Component Analysis Data.
New
Add New Item
From the Main Menu click on File, New or click the New icon. This will allow you to
specify the current analysis type. From the Analysis Toolbar, select Shells and Heads, then
click the Add New Item icon. The following screen will appear:
Shell analysis can be defined on the Design Tab of this screen. You can use the Tab or
Enter keys to move the cursor up and down the column of data. Notice also that many of
the fields have default values built in.
The first field on the input screen is the Item Number. A value must be entered in this field
or the analysis will not be performed. We suggest that you number the different calculations sequentially. Enter a 1 in this field (type 1 and press [Tab]).
The next field is for a description of the shell to be analyzed. This can be the part number
or a short description of the part. This field is optional. For this tutorial, type in Spherical
Head.
The next block of fields concern the pressure and temperature. Tab to the Design Internal
Pressure field and type 100 (assuming you are in English units). Now tab to the Design
Temperature for Internal Pressure field and type 700. When you press Tab, the program
will pause momentarily to check whether the material specified has allowable stresses
greater than zero at the temperature which you entered. Note that the allowable stress for
9-20
Performing an Analysis
SA516-70 material is 18100 psi at this temperature. This is precisely the value that
PVElite extracted from the material database.
The Design External pressure for this problem is 15. The Design Temperature for External
pressure should be 650.
Now you are ready to enter the material. Lets say this vessel is constructed of SA-516-70.
As you might expect, one way to enter that material is just to type it in the field. When you
do so, the program will check the database, and then update the allowable stresses. This
material happens to be the program default, but type the name anyway just to see what the
program does.
Another way to select a material is from the list of materials in the database. To see this
list, click the Material Database icon. The Material Database screen will appear showing
the materials list, which will look like this:
You can move the scroll bar up and down the screen and see the relevant properties for all
of the materials in the PVElite database or, from the Search String field type the material
name. Note that each major material classification is divided into columns. You can also
view the material parameters by clicking on the material name.
9-21
Performing an Analysis
By clicking the OK button, the material name and the appropriate material parameters are
returned. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the Material Edit window. To see this window, click the "A" button next to the material input.
By clicking the >> button, PVElite will scan the yield stress database for an exact material
match and fill in the appropriate yield stress at operating temperature. For many applications, this value is not needed.
In the Joint Efficiency, Longitudinal Seams field, enter the value of E, the longitudinal
joint efficiencies to be used in the calculator. For full radiography, choose a value of 1.
The next question asks if you would like to include Hydrostatic Head Components to our
vessel design. Click on the box to activate the dialog. The Hydrostatic Head dialog
appears and prompts you for a few items. The first item is the operating liquid density.
Enter a value of 38 lb/cu.ft. The next two fields request the height of the liquid column in
the operating position and the hydrotest position of the vessel. This particular vessel is a
horizontal drum that will be operating in a partially filled position. When the shop
hydrotests the vessel it will be filled and in the horizontal position. Enter values of 54 and
72 in. for these two fields. Click OK to get back to the main data input screen.
You can now click on the Geometry Tab of the input screen. The first field is the Type of
Shell or Head. Six options are shown on the pull-down, but if you need more details on
this field you can press [F1] for help.
We will analyze a hemispherical head, a cylinder and an elliptical head. These are components of the particular horizontal vessel we are analyzing. First enter the Diameter Basis,
OD, for an Outside Diameter measurement (and calculation). Next, tab to the Diameter of
Shell/Head field and enter the diameter, 72 inches.
9-22
Performing an Analysis
Now, enter the Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches, and the Nominal Thickness
of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches.
Enter 0.0625 inches for the Corrosion Allowance. Since the input fields have a calculator
capability, you could also enter the .0625 inch Corrosion Allowance as 1/16.
For the Type of Reinforcing Ring, there is no reinforcing ring required for internal pressure, so you can choose None from the pulldown list.
You have now completed the hemispherical head input. Your screen should look like this:
Note
You may view the drawing of the current item at any time by clicking on the slider
at the right of the window and dragging it to the left.
This horizontal tank has two more sections, the shell section and the elliptical head on the
other end. To add the new section, click the Add New Item icon. This will take you back
to the Design Tab of the input screen and prompt you to enter the second item.
Type in the number 2 in the Item Number field. Enter Cylind. Shell in the Description
Field. Click the Geometry Tab to enter the type of shell. Since this is a cylinder type, from
the pull down, select Cylindrical . A window will appear prompting for the Design Length
of Section and the Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations; enter 180 inches for
both. Click OK to resume.
Next, we will enter in the data for the elliptical head. Click on the Add New Item icon.
Type in the number 3 in the Item Number field and Elliptical head in the Description field.
9-23
Performing an Analysis
Since the data from the previous element is brought forward, you will only have to modify
the shell/head type. Click on the Geometry Tab of the Input screen and from the Type of
Shell pulldown, select Elliptical. You will then be prompted for the head ratio. Enter the
number 2 for a 2:1 elliptical head. Click OK to continue.
Note
Save
Analyze Current
Item
You are now ready to analyze these three components for internal pressure and hydrostatic
head considerations. First, save the file. Now, click on the Analyze Item Icon on the analysis toolbar.
Your screen will now look like this:
Next click the Analyze File Icon and you will be ready to review the results.
Analyze File
9-24
9-25
View Reports
There are now three analyses in the output file. However, if you were to do additional runs
of the Shell program, or analyze nozzles, flanges, tubesheets, or anything else, those analyses would also appear on this list. Thus you can review (and print) all of the calculations
you have done for a given vessel or job at one time. Select the first analysis, then select
View, Report from the menu, or click on the View Reports Icon. Your screen should look
like this:
You can scroll up and down in the text to see all of the input and results. Note especially
the Summary of Internal Pressure Results, where you can clearly see that the required
thickness is less than the actual thickness for this job, while the Maximum allowable
working pressure is greater than the design pressure. Therefore, the shell thickness you
selected is acceptable. After you finish reviewing the results, click the Done button to
return to the Available Reports Menu.
You may also select more than one analysis at a time by holding down the [Ctrl] key while
selecting the items to view. You can also select all reports by selecting Edit, Select All,
from the menu. When viewing the reports, click the Next Report Button to move to the
next component.
9-26
The PVElite output results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print
a hard copy of the reports, first select the report font by clicking on the Select Font Icon
from the Available Reports Menu Toolbar. You may then select a new font for your reports
by clicking on the Select Font Icon. You can also enter a new starting page number by
clicking on the Page Number Icon on the Toolbar. Now, simply click on the Printer Icon.
9-27
1. Perform the analysis on each type chosen. Click the Analyze File icon from the Analysis Toolbar.
2. From the Main Menu, choose Analyze, Summary. The vessel summary will be
appended to the current output files as seen on the Available Reports Screen. You may
view this file or print it just as you would the analysis files.
View
Reports
Using Word
The view below is the Microsoft Word view. If you want to return to the Home Screen,
click the Output Processor menu option..
Home Screen
Rev.A
9-28
FileName : Example
---------------------------------------
Item:
2,
8:47a
Page 1
Dec 1,1999
Description: CYLINDER
PEXT
100.00
psig
700.00
15.00
650.00
psig
F
CS-2
NO
SA-516 70
S
18100.00
psi
SA
20000.00
psi
1.00
Inside
40.0000
in.
0.5000
in.
CA
0.0000
in.
Type of Element:
2, Desc.: CYLINDER
9-29
0.0625
in.
0.5000
in.
MAWP
900.50
psig
100.00
psig
CodeCalc 6.20
FileName : Example
---------------------------------------
Item:
8:47a
Page 2
Dec 1,1999
1293.53
psig
1293.53
psig
-6
-146
VOLMET
WMET
364.6
VOLID
16755.2
WWAT
605.0
1288.3
in.^3
lb.
in.**3
lb.
2, Desc.: CYLINDER
CS-2
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
TCA
0.5000
in.
OD
41.0000
in.
(D/T)
82.0000
0.0030488
10675.6992
260.38
psi
psig
9-30
TCA
0.0634
in.
OD
41.0000
in.
(D/T)
647.0875
0.0003863
4853.4785
15.00
psi
psig
260.38
psig
15.00
psig
0.0634
in.
0.5000
in.
CodeCalc 6.20
FileName : Example
---------------------------------------
Item:
1,
8:47a
Page 3
Dec 1,1999
PEXT
100.00
psig
700.00
15.00
650.00
psig
F
CS-2
NO
SA-516 70
S
18100.00
psi
SA
20000.00
psi
1.00
Inside
40.0000
in.
0.5000
in.
CA
0.0000
in.
Type of Element:
9-31
0.0625
in.
0.5000
in.
MAWP
900.50
psig
100.00
psig
CodeCalc 6.20
FileName : Example
---------------------------------------
Item:
8:47a
Page 4
Dec 1,1999
1293.53
psig
1293.53
psig
-6
-146
VOLMET
1288.3
WMET
364.6
VOLID
16755.2
WWAT
605.0
9-32
in.^3
lb.
in.**3
lb.
CS-2
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
TCA
0.5000
in.
OD
41.0000
in.
(D/T)
82.0000
0.0030488
10675.6992
260.38
psi
psig
TCA
OD
(D/T)
0.0634
in.
41.0000
in.
647.0875
0.0003863
4853.4785
15.00
psi
psig
260.38
psig
15.00
psig
0.0634
in.
0.5000
in.
CodeCalc 6.20
FileName : Example
---------------------------------------
Item:
2,
8:47a
Page 5
Dec 1,1999
Description: ELLIPTICAL
PEXT
100.00
psig
700.00
15.00
650.00
psig
F
CS-2
NO
SA-516 70
9-33
18100.00
psi
SA
20000.00
psi
1.00
Inside
40.0000
in.
0.5000
in.
CA
0.0000
in.
AR
2.0000
STRTFLG
2.0000
Aspect Ratio
Length of Straight Flange
Type of Element:
in.
Elliptical Head
2, Desc.: ELLIPTICAL
0.1106
in.
0.5000
in.
CodeCalc 6.20
FileName : Example
---------------------------------------
9-34
Item:
8:47a
Page 6
Dec 1,1999
MAWP
451.37
psig
100.00
psig
648.38
psig
648.38
psig
-6
-146
VOLMET
1108.8
WMET
313.8
VOLID
8377.6
WWAT
302.5
in.^3
lb.
in.**3
lb.
VOLSCA
2513.3
in.**3
VOLTOT
10890.9
in.**3
2, Desc.: ELLIPTICAL
CS-2
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
TCA
0.5000
in.
OD
41.0000
in.
(D/T)
82.0000
0.0016938
9539.9775
129.27
psi
psig
TCA
OD
(D/T)
0.1140
in.
41.0000
in.
359.4930
0.0003863
4853.4790
15.00
psi
psig
129.27
psig
15.00
psig
9-35
9-36
0.1140
in.
0.5000
in.
&KDSWHU
The Shell Module
Introduction
The Shell module performs internal and external pressure design of vessel and exchanger
components using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001, A-2001.
This module also considers static liquid head in the pressure design, performs stiffening
ring calculations, sizes stiffening rings, and computes weld shear flows on stiffening ring
welds.
ID Basis
OD Basis
Cylinder
Elliptical
Torispherical
UG-32 (g)
Flat Head
Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 (typically 2.0) may be analyzed.
Torispherical heads with knuckle radii between 6% and 100% of the crown radius may be
analyzed. Conical heads and sections with half apex angles up to 30 degrees may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small ends of the cone should be analyzed in the
Conical Sections module. Welded flat heads, circular or non-circular, are analyzed in this
module. Bolted flat heads are analyzed in the Flange module. Bolted dished heads under
internal or external pressure are analyzed in the Floating Heads module.
10-1
Under external pressure, the module analyzes five types of heads or shells, using applicable code formulae as follows:
Shell or Head Type
Code Paragraph
Cylinder
G-28 (c)
2:1 Elliptical
UG-33 (d)
Torispherical
UG-33 (e)
UG-33 (f)
All of these shell or head types are analyzed for diameter to thickness ratios greater than
10. Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 may be analyzed. Torispherical
heads with any crown radius may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small end of
conical heads or sections is analyzed in the Conical Sections module.
The Shell module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition. Figure 10A shows geometry for the Shell module.
In addition, the Shell module also accounts for static liquid head for shell components. For
carbon steel vessels, normalized material can be used for UCS-66 calculations.
10-2
10-3
10-4
Enter the Internal Design Pressure. You must define either the design pressure or the minimum metal thickness, preferably both. Design pressure is used to determine the required
thickness and minimum metal thickness is used to determine the Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure.
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible
to update them for the given temperature.
Design External Pressure
Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value,
i.e. 14.7 psia. If you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations.
Design Temperature for External Pressure
Enter the temperature associated with the external design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for external pressure calculations when you
change the design temperature. The design external pressure at this temperature is a completely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore this temperature
may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts
have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the
lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above
the upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Shell Section Material
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. Examples of material
names are: SA-516-70, SA-285-C. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials,
from the Main Menu. Press [F1] for details.
Include Hydrostatic Head Component
If your shell or head design needs to account for hydrostatic liquid head, check this box.
PVElite will add the hydrostatic pressure head to the internal design pressure for the
required thickness calculation.
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
10-5
allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 at the design
temperature.
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This will be
the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in a spherical
shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically seamless but may require a stress
reduction which may be entered as a joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Section
VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
The joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formulas is a measure of the
inspection quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography
have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7.
Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the
same vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For example, if circumferential seams receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have
a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. The practical outworking of
this is that circumferential seams, which are usually less highly stressed, may be spot
radiographed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This provides the
same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Is the Shell/Head Material Normalized?
If your vessel material has been produced to a fine grain structure, check this box. PVElite
will use the normalized material curve for the UCS 66 calculations.
Type of Shell or Head
Enter the type of shell for this shell section. Choose one of the following shell types:
10-6
Cylindrical Shell
Elliptical Head
Torispherical Head
Conical Shell
Diameter Basis
If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the
dimensions are based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For flat
heads, this value is ignored. Always enter the outside diameter of the flat head.
Diameter of Shell/Head
Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For torispherical heads, enter the crown radius. For
flat heads, enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones, enter the largest diameter of
the cone. The program allows you to use either an inside diameter or an outside diameter.
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate
Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the vessel, or the
minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. Many pipe materials have a minimum specified wall thickness which is 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should
enter the minimum thickness.
Nominal of Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate (optional)
Enter the NOMINAL or AVERAGE thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to construct
the vessel.
This thickness is used to calculate the volume and weight of the metal only if it is between
1 and 1.5 times the minimum thickness. If this value is left blank or 0 the program will use
the minimum thickness to compute the weight and volume of this shell element.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Type of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the index for the type of reinforcing ring on the cylindrical or conical section. Three
options are available:
No Reinforcing Ring
Simple Bar Reinforcing RingYou will be required to enter the width and thickness
of the bar.
General Beam SectionYou will be required to enter the moment of inertia, crosssectional area and the distance from the shell to the centroid of the beam. In all cases
the program includes the shell in the calculation of the moment of inertia for the stiffening ring. This calculation will only be performed for external pressure calculations.
Also, the detailed analysis for the required moment of inertia and cross-sectional area
for cones is contained in the separate Conical Sections module.
Enter in the minimum design metal temperature for the component. This value will only
be printed in the input echo and will not be used in the calculation. Note that if this entry is
zero, the minimum design metal temperature will not be echoed in the input.
10-7
Check this box to skip UG-16(b) calculations. The section UG-16(b) states the minimum
thickness for pressure retaining components as 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm). There are certain
exemptions from this requirement such as in the case of heat exchanger tubes. Refer to the
ASME Section VIII, Div-1, UG-16(b) for more details.
10-8
Enter the density of the operating fluid here. This value will be multiplied by the height of
the liquid column in order to compute the static head pressure.
Height of Liquid Column Operating
Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid. The head pressure is determined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the
fluid to the point of interest.
Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest
Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid
when the vessel is being hydrotested. If this is shop hydrotest, and the vessel is laying on
its side, then the height of the liquid column should be equal to the inside diameter of the
vessel. In the case of a vertical or field hydrotest this liquid height can be greater than the
vessel diameter.
Design Length of Section
Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one third the
depth of the heads or, alternately, the distance between stiffening rings. For a vessel with 2
elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus
the diameter/6. For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the
design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/3. For a vessel with 2 flanged and
dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the
diameter/9. When analyzing a head, enter zero for the length.
Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations
Enter the distance that you want PVElite to use for the liquid volume computation. For a
horizontal vessel this would be the tangent to tangent distance.
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis
to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads
Enter the crown radius for torispherical heads. The crown radius for a torispherical head is
referred to as the dimension L, in the ASME VIII Div. 1 code book.
Length of Straight Flange
Enter the length of the straight section of the elliptical or torispherical head. This is used in
volume and weight calculations.
Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads
Enter the knuckle radius for torispherical heads. This dimension is r, in the ASME VIII
Div. 1 code book.
10-9
Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half
apex angle for cones under internal pressure and without toriconical transitions is 30
degrees. The largest angle for cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections
is 60 degrees. The largest angle for cones under external pressure is 60 degrees. If you
exceed these values the program will run, but with a warning.
Large Diameter for Non-Circular Welded Flat Heads
If you have a non-circular welded flat head, enter the large dimension in this field, and
enter the small dimension as the component diameter above.
Attachment Factor for Flat Head
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from ASME Code, Section
VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are as
follows, but please be careful to consult Paragraph UG-34 before using these values:
Enter the width of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is
the dimension that is perpendicular to the surface of the shell.
Thickness of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this
is the dimension that is parallel to the surface of the shell.
Size of Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell
Enter the dimension of the weld leg which connects the stiffening ring to the shell section.
This value will be used in the weld shear flow calculations if a simple bar stiffener has
been selected as the type of reinforcing ring.
10-10
Entering a structural ring type here will cause PVElite search the structural database for a
suitable member that will meet the inertia requirements for the ring. The valid types of
structural shapes to enter here are
CHANNELChannel Sections
MT SECTIONMiscellaneous Tee
ST SECTIONStructural Tee
MC SECTIONMiscellaneous Channel
Enter the style of the weld that attaches the stiffening ring to the shell section. Per UG-29
of the Code there are 3 styles:
INTERMITTENT
CONTINUOUS
BOTH
This input in conjunction with the shell thickness and corrosion allowance will allow for
the computation of the maximum spacing between weld segments.
Location of Ring (Internal or External)
There are two possibilities for the location of the stiffening ring.
Enter the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing ring,
in the direction parallel to the surface of the shell.
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing
ring.
Distance from Ring Centroid to Shell Surface
Enter the distance from the surface of the shell to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This
distance should be measured normal to the shell surface.
10-11
If you have selected an angle type ring to satisfy the inertia requirements above, this
prompt is meaningful; otherwise it is ignored. When this option is used the program will
compute the distance from the shell surface to the ring centroid based on information in
the ASIC Steel handbook.
10-12
Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc, the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being modeled. The information includes:
Internal MAWP
MDMT
Note
The appropriate formula from ASME Section VIII is referenced, and the formula and substitution are shown. The diameter or crown radius are adjusted to take into account the
corrosion allowance. If your shell design includes hydrostatic head components, the additional pressure due to the height of the liquid column and the operating liquid density will
be included to the basic design pressure. The hydrostatic head will be subtracted in order
to properly determine the MAWP for the vessel part that is being analyzed. Remember,
when pressures are being read from the pressure gauge, the gauge is usually at the high
point of the vessel. The pressure registered by the gauge would be different if were at the
bottom of the liquid filled vessel.
For elliptical heads, the K factor is (2 + Ar * Ar) / 6, per App. 1-4 (c).
For torispherical heads the factor M is (1/4) * (3 + SQRT (L / R)), where L (the
crown radius) and R (the knuckle radius) were entered by the user.
Important
The PVElite program does not replace the given thickness with this
calculated minimum. If you are choosing the thickness for a component, compare the values shown under Summary of Internal Pressure Results (required vs. actual) and adjust the actual thickness up
or down accordingly.
This value is calculated as described above, using the given thickness minus corrosion
allowance and the operating allowable stress. The hydrostatic head component is subtracted from this value. The pressure gauge is assumed to be at the top of the vessel.
10-13
This value is calculated as described above, using the uncorroded thickness and the ambient allowable stress.
Actual Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness
Note that the joint efficiency is included in this value, so this can be considered the stress
at the welded joint rather than in the base metal.
Summary of Internal Pressure Results
Either of two conditions can indicate a problem in your design. First, if the required thickness plus corrosion allowance is greater than the given thickness, then you must increase
the given thickness. Second, if the M.A.W.P. is less than the design pressure then you must
either decrease the design pressure or increase the given thickness to achieve an acceptable design.
The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure times
1.3 times the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient temperature to the allowable stress at
design temperature.
The hydrotest pressure may not be appropriate for the entire vessel for three reasons. First,
some other component may have a lower maximum allowable working pressure, which
may govern the hydrotest pressure. Second, you may choose to base hydrotest pressure on
design pressure rather than maximum allowable working pressure. Third, if the vessel is
tested in the vertical position you may have to adjust the hydrotest pressure for the head of
water in the vessel.
For the UG99-C hydrotest, the liquid head is subtracted from the basic result.
Minimum Metal Temperatures
For carbon steels, these temperatures represent the minimum design metal temperature for
the given thickness and, in the second case, the given pressure. The first temperature is
interpolated directly from chart UCS-66. The second temperature is reduced if the actual
stress is lower than the allowable stress, using figure UCS-66.1. The program also checks
for materials which qualify for the -20 minimum design temperature per UG-20 and
assigns that temperature if it is less than the value found on the charts. See the input notes
above to enter normalized or non-normalized materials.
Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance
The PVElite program computes the volume and weight of the shell component. Additionally, the inside volume for a 2.00 inch straight flange is computed and used in the computation of the total volume for the head and the flange. The dimensions used in the volume
and weight calculations are non-corroded dimensions.
Results for Maximum Allowable External Pressure
For the given diameter, thickness, and length, the maximum allowable external pressure is
computed per UG-28.
10-14
The required thickness is computed using the rules of UG-28 iteratively. Such items as the
length and outside diameter are held constant, and the program calculates the required
thickness based on the user entered external pressure.
Summary of External Pressure Results
Summary listing displaying external pressure results for both the user entered thickness
and the computed required thickness.
10-15
Example Problems
Example Problems
Example problem 1 is an example cylinder design. This particular problem involves most
of the inputs available in the shell module. Note the form of the printout regarding the
external pressure calculations. This form of the output can be selected by first choosing
Tools from the Main Menu, and then selecting Configuration, Miscellaneous. Turn on the
flag to print the external calculations in rows. This form of the output report is preferred if
trying to conserve paper.
There are many more example problems. The PVElite input file CHECKS contain several
shell and head design examples taken directly from the ASME Code Appendices 1 and L.
PVElite Licensee: COADE ESL
FileName : SHELL
------------------------------------------- Page 1
ITEM:
1,
1,
10:49am,
100.00
700.00
PEXT
psig
15.00
300.00
psig
CS-2
YES
38.000
lb./cu.ft.
54.00
in.
72.00
in.
SA-516 70
16600.00
psi
SA
17500.00
psi
1.00
100.0000
in.
CYLLEN
100.0000
in.
72.0000
in.
.5000
in.
.5000
in.
CA
.0625
in.
05/14/98
Corrosion Allowance
SA-516 70
CS-2
.375
in.
WRING
4.0000
in.
TRING
1.0000
in.
INTERMITTENT
NONE
EXTERNAL
1, Description: SHELL SECTION
10-16
Example Problems
= (101.19*72.0000/2)/(16600.00*1.00+0.4*101.19)
= .2189 in.
1.19 psig
.2814
in.
.5000
in.
MAWP
201.53
psig
100.00
psig
160.01
psig
364.02
psig
-6
-50
VOLMET
11231.2
WMET
3178.4
lb.
VOLID
1713.9
Gals.
WWAT
14297.1
in.**3
lb.
Corroded
VOLMETCA
9835.9
in.**3
Corroded
WMETCA
2783.6
lb.
Corroded
VOLIDCA
1720.0
Gals.
WWATCA
14347.5
CS-2
lb.
at
300.00
29000000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.4375
72.0000
100.00
164.57
1.3889
.0004433
6428.54
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6428.5380)/(3*164.5714)=52.0831 psig
10-17
Example Problems
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.2659
72.0000
100.00
270.76
1.3889
.0002101
3046.24
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*3046.2380)/(3*270.7614)=15.0009 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.4375
72.0000
347.19
164.57
4.8221
.0001277
1851.57
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*1851.5680)/(3*164.5714)=15.0011 psig
6.17
Area (sq.in.)
Distance (in.)
in.
Area*Dist
Shell:
2.701
.2188
.591
Ring :
4.000
2.4375
9.750
Total:
6.701
10.341
Inertia
Distance
1.543
in.
A*Dist^2
Shell:
.043
1.3244
4.738
Ring :
5.333
-.8943
3.199
Total:
5.376
7.937
13.314
BREQ
1696.34
AREQ
.0001170
in**4
psi
PEXT*SLEN
1500.00
lb./in.
1080.00
lb.
3.58
VQ/I
290.19
.55*S
9130.00
psi
WLDMIN
.25
in.
3.50
in.
8*TCA
in.^3
lb./in
WLDMIN*.55*S
2282.50
lb./in
1527.81
lb./in
52.08
psig
15.00
psig
.3284
in.
.5000
in.
347.194
in.
100.00
in.
2.657
in**4
13.314
in**4
10-18
&KDSWHU
The Nozzle Module
Introduction
This module calculates required reinforcement under internal pressure and performs failure path calculations for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1 rules, 2001, A-2001.
Paragraph
Cylinder
None
Torispherical Head
None
The module evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
The Nozzle module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the module adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition.
The Nozzle module also performs UCS-66 MDMT calculations for nozzles.
Figure 11A shows geometry for the Nozzle module.
11-1
11-2
11-3
ID Number
Cylindrical Shell
Elliptical Head
Torispherical Head
If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the
dimensions are based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For torispherical heads, select ID if the section is specified by inside crown radius, select ID if the
section is specified by outside crown radius. Normally, for a flanged & dished torispherical head, the inside crown radius is equal to the vessel outside diameter. For flat heads, this
value is ignored. Always enter the diameter of the flat head that is exposed to the pressure.
11-4
If the user wishes to enter an offset and allow PVElite to compute the nozzle angle,
the required thickness must be left blank.
If an angle less than 90 has been entered, or computed via the entered offset values,
and the user would like to take credit for the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, the required
thickness times the F-correction factor should be entered.
If an angle less than 90 has been entered and the user does not which to take credit for
the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, the required thickness should be entered.
11-5
2.010.0
0.25
2.512.0
0.375
3.014.0
0.50
3.516.0
0.75
4.018.0
1.00
5.020.0
1.25
6.024.0
1.5
8.030.0
11-6
SCH 10
SCH 80
SCH STD
SCH 10S
SCH 80S
SCH X-STG
SCH 20
SCH 100
SCH XX-STG
SCH 30
SCH 120
SCH 40
SCH 140
SCH 40S
SCH 160
SCH 60
Required Thickness of Nozzle
The program normally calculates the required thickness of the nozzle but under the following circumstances you must enter the required thickness:
When your job specification requires that no area be included from the nozzle. Enter
the actual thickness minus the corrosion allowance.
Note
Although PVElite will design and recommend a reinforcing pad if one is needed,
the analysis of areas is based only on what you have entered. If PVElite recommends a pad or a larger pad than the one you enter, you must go back into input
and enter a pad of the correct size in order for the final configuration to be
reflected in the final analysis.
11-7
size calculations per UW-16(d)(1). The Code exempts these calculations per paragraph
UW-15 when one of the above weld classifications such as "A" is used. If you wish
PVElite to perform the weld strength calculation regardless of the type of weld geometry,
leave this field blank.
Compressed Air, Water, or Steam Service
Checking this box sets the minimum thickness for use in the UG-45 Calculations. If left
unchecked, a value of 1/16-in. will be used. Otherwise, if checked, a value of 3/32-in. will
be incorporated. See UG-16 for more details.
Manway or Access /Inspection Opening
The ASME code states that it is not required to perform UG-45 minimum nozzle neck
thickness calculations on manways and inspection openings. If this box is checked, the
program will not perform these calculations.
Nozzle Angle Geometry
Non-radial nozzles can be specified by entering the angle between the vessel and the nozzle centerlines, and the offset from vessel centerline. This vessel-nozzle centerline angle
can vary from 0 to a limiting value depending upon the specific gravity. Figure 1 below
illustrates these dimensions.
To specify a radial nozzle on a head or shell just click the "Is Radial .. checkbox. In this
case the input for the offset dimension and vessel -nozzle centerline angle are optional,
only required for the graphic and not for the analysis.
Hillside nozzles and some angular nozzles are subject to calculations to meet area requirements in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases CodeCalc automatically checks the
area requirements in both the planes using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle opening. For integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 will automatically be
applied in the hillside direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 will be
used. The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one half of
the hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and con-
11-8
ical sections. A hill-side nozzle example based on ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix L-7.7 is
illustrated in the CHECKS file under the PVElite examples directory - Nozzle items 10
and 11.
Some examples are shown below.
Y angle or lateral nozzles can be specified in case of conical and cylindrical sections by
clicking on the "Is Lateral..." checkbox. In this case only the vessel-nozzle centerline
angle needs to be specified. The following figure shows an example.
11-9
For users of version prior to 6.40 the input specification for non-radial and non-hillside
nozzles has changed. The current requirement is the angle between the centerline of the
nozzle and the centerline of the vessel.
Pop-Up Input Fields
Enter the Shell Design Length for External Pressure
Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one third the
depth of the heads or, alternatively, the distance between stiffening rings.
For a vessel with 2 elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the
tangent to tangent length plus the shell diameter /6.
For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the
tangent length plus the diameter /3.
For a vessel with 2 flanged and dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design
length is the tangent length plus the diameter /9.
When analyzing a conical head enter the axial length of the cone. If any other head types
are being analyzed, enter a 0 here and you must enter the required thickness of the component in the required field.
Print Intermediate Calcs for External Pressure
If checked, PVElite will print out the parameters used for external pressure design. If this
field is not checked, PVElite will not print out these intermediate computations.
Operating Liquid Density
Enter the density of the operating fluid here. This value will be multiplied by the height of
the liquid column in order to compute the static head pressure.
You can enter a number of specific gravity units and CodeCalc will convert the number
entered to the current set of units. To do this, enter a number followed by the letters "sg".
Height of Liquid Column, Operating
Enter the distance from the nozzle to the surface of the liquid. The head pressure is determined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the fluid to the point of interest.
Enter the Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads
The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Inside Crown Radius (L) of the Torispherical Head
Enter the inside crown radius of torispherical head.
Inside Knuckle Radius of the Torispherical Head
Enter the inside knuckle radius of the torispherical head. This value is typically 0.17 * the
head inside diameter.
11-10
150
300
400
600
900
1500
2500
GR 1.1
GR 1.2
GR 1.4
GR 1.5
GR 1.7
GR 1.9
GR 1.10
GR 1.13
GR 1.14
Med C Steel
High C Steel
Low C Steel
C-1/2Mo
1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo
1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
2-1/4Cr-1Mo
5Cr-1/2Mo
9Cr-1Mo
GR 2.1
GR 2.2
GR 2.3
GR 2.4
GR 2.5
GR 2.6
GR 2.7
Type 304
Type 316
Type 304L,316L
Type 321
Type 347,348
Type 309
Type 310
11-11
11-12
etration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero,
respectively, in this field.
Discussion of Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc, the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being modeled. The information includes:
MDMT
Note
TORI-
ELLI-
CONE-
FLAT-
The joint efficiency used in this calculation is always 1.0. In 1989 we submitted a request
for interpretation to the ASME Code in order to show that the use of 1.0 under all circumstances was justified. The reply was published in the A-90 addenda as Interpretation VIII1-89-171. The question and reply were as follows:
Question: In reinforcement calculations, is the joint efficiency used in calculating the
required thickness of the vessel wall tr and the required thickness of the wall trn 1.0
regardless of the joint efficiency determined for the vessel wall and nozzle wall from the
rules in UW-12, provided the nozzle does not pass through a weld?
Reply: Yes
11-13
Note
The program takes into account the case where the nozzle passes through a weld
by asking the joint efficiency of the weld, if any.
Note
The program uses dl-d, (Diameter limit minus inside hole radius) in the calculate
for area available in shell. This is because the Code wrongly assumes that the dl-d
is always equal to d, which is only true when the natural diameter limit is used.
Since we allow the user to enter a reduced diameter limit, we could not use the
pure Code equation.
11-14
11-15
Example Problems
Example Problems
The \example directory contains the input for most of the other example problems for nozzles shown in Appendix L of the Code. The file these examples are contained in is
CHECKS. Some large nozzle examples are included in LG_NOZZLE.CCI.
ITEM:
1,
( Case 1 )
11:00am,
Description: 24"
05/14/98
Nozzle
100.00
psig
TEMP
350.00
PEXT
100.00
psig
TEMPEX
350.00
( Case 2 )
Shell Material
SA-516 70
S
17500.00
psi
SA
17500.00
psi
55.2500
in.
184.5000
in.
.9900
in.
CAS
.3125
in.
ANGLE
90.00
Degrees
11-16
1,
Example Problems
SA-106 B
SN
15000.00
psi
SNA
15000.00
psi
BASISN
OD
Diameter of Nozzle
DIA
DBN
THK
1.0660
in.
CAN
.3125
in.
ES
1.00
EN
1.00
24.0000
in.
Actual
NTYP
Insert
HO
4.0000
in.
WO
.5000
in.
.6250
in.
SA-516 70
SN
17500.00
psi
SNA
17500.00
psi
DP
31.0000
in.
Thickness of Pad
TP
.6250
in.
WP
.6250
in.
WGPN
.6250
in.
1,
Description: 24"
Nozzle
24.000
in.
1.066
in.
CASE 1
1, Description: 24"
Nozzle
CS-2
at
350.00
28500000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.6775
55.2500
184.50
81.55
3.3394
.0005286
7532.86
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*7532.8560)/(3*81.5498)=123.1616 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
11-17
Example Problems
.6233
55.2500
184.50
88.64
3.3394
.0004665
6647.86
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6647.8600)/(3*88.6356)=100.0029 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.6775
55.2500
227.22
81.55
4.1126
.0004292
6116.58
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6116.5810)/(3*81.5498)=100.0056 psig
123.16
psig
100.00
psig
.9358
in.
.9900
in.
227.220
in.
184.50
in.
CASE 1
1, Description: 24"
CS-2
at
350.00
28500000.00
Nozzle
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
.7535
24.0000
4.00
31.85
.1667
Factor A
.0474581 17600.00
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*17600.0000)/(3*31.8514)=736.7556 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
.1183
24.0000
4.00
202.85
.1667
Factor A
.0029529 15215.24
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*15215.2400)/(3*202.8471)=100.0112 psig
OD
SLEN
.7535
24.0000
.17E+24
D/T
L/D
31.85 .6911E+22
Factor A
.0010843 12079.53
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*12079.5300)/(3*31.8514)=505.6627 psig
736.76
psig
100.00
psig
.4308
in.
1.0660
in.
.1659E+24
in.
4.00
in.
11-18
Example Problems
DL
44.9860
in.
TLNP
1.6938
in.
1.6938
in.
Design
External
Mapnc
Area Required
AR
3.576
7.077
NA
sq.in.
Area in Shell
A1
11.584
1.207
NA
sq.in.
A2
1.956
1.844
NA
sq.in.
A3
.000
.000
NA
sq.in.
Area in Welds
A4
.605
.605
NA
sq.in.
Area in Pad
A5
4.375
4.375
NA
sq.in.
ATOT
18.521
8.031
NA
sq.in.
90.00
Degs.
Diameter
29.5000
Thickness
.6250
in.
31.0000
.5000
in.
27.5000
1.0000
in.
7.077 sq.in.
Areas per UG-37.1 but with DL = Diameter Limit, DLR = Corroded ID:
Area Available in Shell (A1):
A1 = (DL-DLR)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)-2*(THK-CAN)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)*(1-FFR1)
A1 = (44.986-22.493)*(1.00*(.9900-.313)-.623)-2*(1.066-.313)
*(1.00*(.9900-.3125)-.6233)*(1.0-.86)
A1 =
1.207 sq.in.
11-19
Example Problems
A4WP = WO^2*FFR3+(WI-CAN/0.707)^2*FFR2+WP^2*FFR4
A4WP = .5000^2 * .86 + ( .0000 )^2 * .86 + .6250^2 * 1.00
A4WP = .605 sq.in.
4.375 sq.in.
AMAP
304.2
psig
AMAPEXT
100.0
psig
161.94
lb.
123.84
lb.
Shell
Pad
34
31
-76
-79
-104
NA
-20
-20
-104
-20
AREA AVAILABLE, A1 to A5
AR
4.719
No Pad
With Pad
sq.in.
A1
.597
.597
sq.in.
A2
1.844
1.844
sq.in.
A3
.000
.000
sq.in.
A4
.214
.605
sq.in.
A5
.000
4.375
sq.in.
ATOT
2.656
7.422
sq.in.
1,
Description: 24"
11-20
Nozzle
TMIN
.6250
in.
TMINPAD
.6250
in.
Required Thickness
Actual Thickness
Nozzle Weld
.3500 = 0.7 * WO
, in.
Example Problems
Pad Weld
.3125 = 0.5*TMINPAD
.4375 = 0.7 * WP
, in.
WELD STRENGTH AND WELD LOADS PER UG-41.1, SKETCH (a) OR (b)
W
= (AR-A1+2*(THK-CAN)*FFR1*(E1(T-CAS)-TR))*S
= 103965. lb.
W1 = (A2+A5+A4-(WII-CAN/.707)^2*FFR2)*S
W1 = ( 1.8443 + 4.3750 + .6049 - .1953 * .86 ) * 17500
W1 = 116494. lb.
W2 = (A2+A3+A4+(2*(THK-CAN)*(T-CAS)*Fr1))*S
W2 = ( 1.8443 + .0000 + .2143 + .8751 ) * 17500
W2 = 51340. lb.
W3 = (A2+A3+A4+A5+(2*(THK-CAN)*(T-CAS)*Fr1))*S
W3 = ( 1.8443 + .0000 + 4.3750 + .6049 + .8751 ) * 17500
W3 = 134739. lb.
TPGW = (PI/2.0)*DLO*WGPN*0.74*SEG
TPGW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 24.0000 * .6250 * 0.74 * 15000
TPGW = 261538. lb.
11-21
Example Problems
51340. lb.
Path 3-3 = 391742. lb., must exceed W = 103965. lb. or W3 = 134739. lb.
.347 in.
.719 in.
.643 in.
Thickness:
11-22
&KDSWHU
The Flange Module
Introduction
The PVElite Flange module calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of
flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The module
uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the 2001 Code, A-2001.
12-1
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the
flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., counterclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in
integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5. Based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4) calculate hub factors and other geometry
factors for the flange. These are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5,
and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consistently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix.
These formulae are implemented in the PVElite flange program.
6. Calculate stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and flange thickness.
7. Finally, calculate flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending
moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
S = k(geometry)*M/t^2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment,
divided by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given
in Modern Flange Design, Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge.
The Flange module includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting
loads imposed by a mating flange. The module also takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter uncorroded thicknesses and diameters which the program adjusts before
performing the calculations. The module can treat corrosion in a special manner based on
the input of a Yes/No question in the input.
The module can also be used for two levels of flange design. The PARTIAL option forces
the program to calculate the minimum flange thickness for a given geometry. The
DESIGN option forces the program to select all of the relevant flange geometry including
bolt circle, number of bolts, outside diameter, thickness, and hub geometry.
12-2
12-3
Integral Slip On
Integral Ring
Loose Slip On
Loose Ring
Lap Joint
Blind
Reverse
There are essentially only two categories of flanges for purposes of analysis. These are
integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a
unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these
categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions.
Weld Neck Flanges
These have a hub which is butt welded to the vessel.
Slip-on Flanges
These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral
type flanges they required a penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges
These do no have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange. They
are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a penetration weld is
used between the flange and the vessel.
12-4
12-5
Caution
You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Caution
You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Flange Thickness
Enter the flange thickness. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for this flange. The value entered here will be subtracted
from the flange and hub thicknesses to obtain the thicknesses actually used in the computations.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations
The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states that
every dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the flange
thickness is used. However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off of the
thickness for the stress calculations.
Flange ID
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is refereed to as B in the ASME code. The corrosion
allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance will be
added to the uncorroded ID given by the user). For a blind flange this entry should be 0.
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as A in the ASME code.
Shell Material
Select the shell material name. This is used for computing the longitudinal hub allowable
stress for optional type flanges that are analyzed as integral.
12-6
12-7
Gasket Factor
Gasket Material
Seating Stress
(m)
Facing
(y)
Column
0.00
II
Flat Elastomers
Below 75A Shore Durometer
0.50
II
1.00
200
II
2.00
2.75
3.50
1600
3700
6500
II
II
II
1.25
400
II
2.25
2.50
2.75
2200
2900
3700
II
II
II
Vegetable Fiber
1.75
1100
II
2.50
3.00
10000
10000
II
II
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
2900
3700
4500
5500
6500
II
II
II
II
II
12-8
Soft aluminum
Soft copper or brass
Iron or soft steel
Monel or 4-6% Chrome
Stainless Steel
Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled
Soft aluminum
Soft copper or brass
Iron or soft steel
Monel
4-6% Chrome
Stainless Steel
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
3700
4500
5500
6500
7600
II
II
II
II
II
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.50
3.75
3.75
5500
6500
7600
8000
9000
9000
II
II
II
II
II
II
Grooved metal
Soft aluminum
Soft copper or brass
Iron or soft steel
Monel or 4-6% Chrome
Stainless Steel
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.75
4.25
5500
6500
7600
9000
10100
II
II
II
II
II
4.00
4.75
5.50
6.00
6.50
8800
13000
18000
21800
26000
I
I
I
I
I
Ring Joint
Iron or soft steel
Monel or 4-6% Chrome
Stainless Steel
5.50
6.00
6.50
18000
21800
26000
I
I
I
1a
1b
1c
1d
2
3
4
5
6
PVELITE EQUIVALENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DESCRIPTION
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
12-9
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Is There a Partition Gasket?
If your exchanger geometry has a pass partition gasket, check this entry. PVElite will then
prompt for the overall length and width of the gasket.
Specify External Loads
In order for leakage computations to be performed, the external loads acting on the flange
must be specified. By checking this field, a pop-up input form is displayed to allow the
entry of this loading data. Loading data of this nature would typically come from a pipe
stress analysis program, such as CAESAR II.
Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pressure. The program calculates a roughly approximate equivalent pressure for flanges loaded
axially and/or in bending using the following formula:
Peq
Pdes + 4*F/3.14G^2+16*M/3.14*G^3
Peq
Pdes
Where:
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
Mating Flange Loads
If loads from the mating flange are to be considered, check this field. A pop-up spreadsheet will appear for additional data entry. This auxiliary bolt loading will only be used if
it is greater then the standard bolt loads computed using the ASME formulas.
Caution
Note
12-10
The use of mating flange values for bolt design calculations will
result in incorrect MAWP calculations.
You probably dont want to calculate MAWP based on the mating flange values,
but rather based on the values developed by this flange at a given pressure. Also
you definitely dont want to do design when you have a mating flange, since the
program will certainly pick a different bolt circle, etc. than the one chosen for the
other flange. You can however, do a partial (thickness) design.
12-11
12-12
12-13
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being modeled. The information includes:
Required Thickness due to pressure
MAWP (minimum of operating and seating conditions)
Note
12-14
Discussion of Results
Operating
Ambient
1.5 x Sfo
1.0 x Sfo
1.0 x Sfo
1.0 x Sfo
1.0 x Sbo
1.0 x Sfo
1.0 x Sfo
1.5 x Sfa
1.0 x Sfa
1.0 x Sfa
1.0 x Sfa
1.0 x Sba
1.0 x Sfa
1.0 x Sfa
Where:
Sfo
Sfa
Sbo
Sba
12-15
Discussion of Results
Note
At low pressures the stress due to gasket seating is not a function of the design
pressure. At higher pressures the stress is a function of pressure, and the MAWP
can be calculated as described above, except that the extrapolation is from the
point where pressure comes into the calculation of the seating stress.
The program calculates the Gasket Seating MAWP and Operating MAWP based on
the input geometry and pressure. In theory both MAWPs should be independent of the
input pressure. However, because of the extrapolation algorithm, the estimate of the
MAWP may depend on the pressure slightly (when the pressure is very small). Please
note that in Partial or Design mode, the program will calculate MAWP based on the
required flange thickness.
12-16
Discussion of Results
1. For slip-on type flanges, calculate the small end of the hub equal to roughly the
thickness required for the design pressure
2. For weld neck, slip-on, and reverse flanges, calculate the large end of the hub as
the small end of the hub plus 1/16th (for small end thicknesses less than one inch)
or 1/8th (for small end thicknesses greater than one inch). Then calculate a hub
length equal to the small end thickness plus the minimum slope (3:1) for the hub.
The effect of these choices is to design a small hub when compared with standardized flanges. This has the additional effect of keeping the moment arms and diameters (of the bolt circle and flange OD) small, and keeping the flange light.
Finally, the selection of a small hub keeps the amount of machining required for
the flange to a minimum.
3. Select a preliminary number of bolts. This is a multiple of four based on the diameter of the flange. The algorithm chosen tends to select more and smaller bolts
than would be found on standard flanges. This also has the effect of minimizing
the flange outside diameter and the weight of the flange.
4.
Select a bolt size that will give the required bolt area for this number of bolts.
5.
Using this bolt size, calculate a final number of bolts based on:
The area required divided by the area available per bolt -OR-
6. Using this number of bolts, calculate the bolt circle base on:
The OD of the hub plus the minimum ID spacing of the bolt -OR-
The OD of the gasket face plus the actual size of the bolt -OR-
7. Calculate the outside diameter of the flange based on the bolt circle plus the minimum edge spacing for the bolt size chosen.
8. For flanges with full face gaskets, adjust the gasket and face outside diameter for
the values chosen, and recalculate the moment arms for the flange.
9. Finally (and this step also applies to partial design of the flange), select a thickness for the flange and calculate the stresses. If the stress is not equal to the allowable, adjust the thickness based on the difference between the actual and allowable
12-17
Discussion of Results
stresses, and then repeat the stress calculation. This process continues until the
actual stress for one of the stress components is equal to the allowable stress.
12-18
Example Problems
Example Problems
The example problem presented below is taken from Modern Flange Design, Page 12.
This problem is the calculation of stresses for a typical weld neck flange.
The results from the example problem agree very well with the Taylor Forge results. The
detailed calculations on the second and third pages of the printout show the formulas and
substitutions for the loads, distances and stresses calculated by the program.
There are several additional example problems included in the files CHECKS, FEXAMPLE & FEXAMPL2.
COADE Verification Problem Set
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
FileName : CHECKS
-------------------------------- Page 1
ITEM:
1,
1,
03:31pm,
Analysis Only
P
Design Temperature
Corrosion Allowance
400.00
psig
650.00
FCOR
.0000
in.
32.0000
in.
39.1250
in.
Flange Thickness
2.0000
in.
G0
.5000
in.
G1
1.1250
in.
Length of Hub
HL
2.7500
in.
Flange Material
SA-516 70
SFO
17500.00
psi
SFA
17500.00
psi
Bolt Material
SA-193 B7
SBO
25000.00
psi
SBA
25000.00
psi
37.0000
in.
DB
1.0000
in.
Type of Threads
Number of Bolts
36
FOD
34.5000
in.
FID
33.0000
in.
05/18/98
1, Code Sketch 1a
GOD
36.0000
in.
GID
33.0000
in.
Gasket Factor, m,
2.7500
3700.00
psi
12-19
Example Problems
1, Code Column I
1,
32.000
in.
G1COR = G1-FCOR
BCOR = B+2.0*FCOR
1.125
in.
G0COR = G0-FCOR
.500
in.
1.375
in.
Code R Dimension,
R = ((C-BCOR)/2.0)-G1COR
.750
in.
B0 = N / 2.0
N = (GOD-GID) / 2.0
.375
in.
BE = SQRT(B0) / 2.0
.306
in.
33.888
in.
G = GOD-2.0*BE
/ 4.0
HPP
12-20
19.836
sq.in.
1.375
in.
1.063
in.
2.250
in.
Actual
3.225
in.
5.692
in.
1.437
in.
Nmin =
Example Problems
Force
Distance
Bolt Corr
Moment
End Pressure,
MD
321699.
1.9375
1.0000
51941. ft.lb.
Face Pressure,
MT
39072.
2.0281
1.0000
6604. ft.lb.
Gasket Load,
MG
71713.
1.5562
1.0000
9300. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, MA
464192.
1.5562
1.0000
60198. ft.lb.
RMO
67844. ft.lb.
60198. ft.lb.
4.000
Hub Ratio,
HRAT = HL / H0
Thickness Ratio,
GRAT = (G1COR/G0COR)
in.
.688
2.250
.777
.162
1.000
K =
1.223
1.830
U =
10.740
9.773
Z =
5.041
66.480 in.^3
Stress Factors
e =
.194 in.^-1
ALPHA =
1.388
BETA =
1.518
GAMMA =
.759
DELTA =
.120
LAMBDA =
.879
12-21
Example Problems
OPERATING
Actual
Allowed
GASKET SEATING
Actual
Allowed
Longitudinal Hub
22865.
26250.
20288.
26250. psi
Radial Flange
10982.
17500.
9744.
17500. psi
6800.
17500.
6033.
17500. psi
Maximum Average
16923.
17500.
15016.
17500. psi
Bolting
21803.
25000.
6080.
25000. psi
Tangential Flange
413.6
psig
542.0
psig
290.5
lb.
535.0
lb.
.796
1.035
12-22
&KDSWHU
The Conical Sections Module
Introduction
The PVElite Conical Sections Module performs internal and external pressure design of
conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules,
2001, A-2001.
13-1
Cone Number
Enter an ID number for the Cone. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Cone Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Internal Design Pressure
You may analyze both internal and external pressure at the same time, since the two cases
are analyzed and reported separately. Enter zero for internal pressure if you only wish to
analyze the external pressure case.
Internal Design Temperature
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible
to update them for the given temperature.
External Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value,
i.e. 14.7 psia. If you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations.
External Design Temperature
Enter the temperature associated with the external design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for external pressure calculations when you
13-2
change the design temperature. The design external pressure at this temperature is a completely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore this temperature
may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts
have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the
lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above
the upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Cone\Cylinder\Ring\Knuckle Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification.
When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the program will automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the
allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design temperature.
Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification.
When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the program will automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the
allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the ambient temperature.
Cone Joint Efficiency
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This will be
the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in a spherical
shell. Elliptical and torispherical heads are typically seamless but may require a stress
reduction which may be entered as a joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Section
VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
Cone Actual Thickness
Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the vessel, or the
minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel Many pipe materials have a minimum
specified wall thickness which is 87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should enter
the minimum thickness.
Cone Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
13-3
13-4
SECTION = reinforcing beam section at small end (inertia, area, and depth of
beam).
Note
13-5
Note
13-6
13-7
13-8
Note
This section is shown even when the internal design pressure is zero: the required
thicknesses will be zero, but the Maximum Allowable Working Pressures will be
meaningful.
Next the program summarizes these internal pressure results, adding the corrosion allowances as necessary.
13-9
The PVElite program will set the area required in the reinforcing ring to zero if either the
allowed apex angle is higher than the actual apex angle or the area available in the shell is
greater than the area required.
13-10
Example Problems
Example Problems
Example Problem #1
Example problem 1 is taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix L,
L-3, Example 3. The Code example problem requests determination of the required thickness for the knuckle and cone with a small end diameter of 200 inches and a half apex
angle of 30 degrees. The cone is to be designed for 50 psi internal pressure. Agreement
with the required thickness per the Code is exact. Page 2 of the printout is included to
illustrate the detailed calculations for internal pressure.
These examples are contained in the file CHECKS.
Examples per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix L
FileName : CHECKS
----------------------------------- Page 1
ITEM:
2,
2,
01:55pm,
06/05/97
PINT
50.00
TEMPIN
650.00
PEXT
.00
psig
TEMPEX
.00
Cone Material
psig
F
SA-516 70
SAC
17500.00
psi
SOC
17500.00
psi
EC
.8500
TC
.4380
in.
CAC
.0000
in.
BASIS
ID
DS
100.0000
in.
DL
200.0000
in.
ANGLE
30.00
LC
86.6000
in.
157079.00
lb.
19635.00
lb.
degrees
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
SOS
17500.00
psi
ES
1.0000
TS
.1880
in.
CAS
.0000
in.
LS
75.0000
in.
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
SOL
17500.00
psi
EL
1.0000
TL
.3130
in.
13-11
Example Problems
CAL
.0000
in.
LL
250.0000
in.
Bar
SA-36
14500.00
psi
14500.00
psi
Shell
RWLB
.0001
in.
RTLB
.0001
in.
Bar
SA-36
14500.00
psi
14500.00
psi
Shell
RWSB
.0001
in.
RTSB
.0001
in.
2,
13-12
Example Problems
Cone
Large Cyl
.1431
.3889
.2862
in.
.1880
.4380
.3130
in.
65.65
56.30
54.67
psig
50.00
50.00
50.00
psig
.00286
17.571
degrees
30.000
degrees
4.5363
sq.in.
.4990
sq.in.
.0000
sq.in.
4.0374
sq.in.
.00286
4.571
degrees
30.000
degrees
13-13
Example Problems
2.2148
sq.in.
.7799
sq.in.
.0000
sq.in.
1.4350
sq.in.
Stress
Allowable
Location
---------------------------------------------------------------Tensile
Stress
66477.39
70000.00
Compres. Stress
-53154.52
-70000.00
Membrane Stress
35423.96
26250.00
Tensile
Stress
14500.67
Compres. Stress
-7814.98
Tensile
Stress
28704.24
Tensile
26250.00
Cone Tangential
Stress
103483.40
70000.00
Compres. Stress
-87483.91
-70000.00
Membrane Stress
-25324.62
26250.00
Tensile
Stress
56745.75
Compres. Stress
-43213.55
Tensile
-28121.92
Stress
26250.00
Cone Tangential
Example Problem #2
The second example problem illustrates the calculation of a cone under external pressure.
This example is also taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix L,
L-3.3. The cone is similar to the one used in Example 1, but under external pressure.
Agreement with the example problem results for area of reinforcement required, area
available in shell, area available in reinforcing ring and the moment of inertia of the reinforcement is good at both the large and small ends of the cone. The third page of the printout is included to show the detailed calculations for external pressure at the large and
small ends. Note that beginning from A-95, the codes computation has good agreement
with PVElite for this example.
Examples per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix L
FileName : CHECKS
------------------------------------
1,
13-14
ITEM:
1,
Page
02:09pm,
1
06/05/97
PINT
.00
psig
TEMPIN
.00
Example Problems
PEXT
50.00
TEMPEX
650.00
psig
F
Yes
Cone Material
Cone Allowable Stress at Temperature
SAC
15000.00
psi
SOC
17500.00
psi
EC
.8500
TC
1.2500
in.
CAC
.0000
in.
BASIS
OD
DS
50.7500
in.
DL
202.5000
in.
ANGLE
30.00
LC
130.0000
in.
lb.
lb.
-9964.00
degrees
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
SOS
17500.00
psi
ES
1.0000
TS
.3750
in.
CAS
.0000
in.
LS
75.0000
in.
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
SOL
17500.00
psi
EL
.8500
TL
1.2500
in.
CAL
.0000
in.
LL
250.0000
in.
Beam Type
SA-36
14500.00
psi
14500.00
psi
Shell
Moment of Inertia of
RILS
26.90
Area of Reinforcing
RALS
5.28
sq.in.
RDLS
6.05
in.
in**4
Bar
SA-36
14500.00
psi
14500.00
psi
Shell
RWSB
3.5000
in.
RTSB
.5000
in.
13-15
Example Problems
1,
CS-2
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
1.2500
202.5000
130.00
187.06
.4014
.0013249
9059.26
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*9059.259)/(3*187.0615)=64.5724 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
1.0325
202.5000
130.00
226.47
.4014
.0009946
8493.51
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*8493.511)/(3*226.4709)=50.0050 psig
CS-2
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.3750
50.7500
75.00
135.33
1.4778
.0005587
7019.19
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*7019.191)/(3*135.3333)=69.1546 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.3294
50.7500
75.00
154.08
1.4778
.0004600
5778.14
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*5778.136)/(3*154.0769)=50.0022 psig
CS-2
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
1.2500
202.5000
250.00
162.00
1.2346
.0005107
6415.52
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6415.521)/(3*162.0000)=52.8026 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
1.2231
202.5000
250.00
165.57
1.2346
.0004943
6209.19
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*6209.191)/(3*165.5692)=50.0028 psig
CS-2
at
CS-2
13-16
650.00
25125000.00
at
650.00
25125000.00
F
psi
F
psi
Example Problems
Cone
Large Cyl
Reqd. Thickness + CA
.3294
1.0325
1.2231
in.
.3750
1.2500
1.2500
in.
69.15
64.57
52.80
psig
50.00
50.00
50.00
psig
.00336
5.908
degrees
30.000
degrees
23.5682 sq.in.
12.6433
sq.in.
23.5682
sq.in.
5.2800
sq.in.
.0000
sq.in.
255.28
sq.in.
7670.39
lb./in.
4563.38
psi
.000363
Centroid
Ar*Ce
Shl
10.938
.0000
.000
.1159
1.424
.1
Con
12.630
-2.5259
-31.902
2.6417
29.053
88.1
Sec
5.280
6.6750
35.244
-6.5591
26.900
227.2
TOT
28.848
57.377
315.4
Centroid of Section
Dist
3.342
.1159
Ar*Di^2
Moment of Inertia
372.82
372.823
in**4
Required
348.860
in**4
13-17
Example Problems
.7041
sq.in.
2.4844
sq.in.
1.7500
sq.in.
.0000
sq.in.
109.56
sq.in.
7742.36
lb./in.
2689.73
psi
.000214
Centroid
Ar*Ce
Dist
Shl
.900
.0000
.000
.9470
.011
Con
3.463
.6926
2.399
.2544
1.155
.224
Sec
1.750
1.9375
3.391
-.9905
1.786
1.717
TOT
6.113
2.952
2.748
5.789
Centroid of Section
.9470
Ar*Di^2
.807
Moment of Inertia
5.70
5.700
in**4
Required
5.543
in**4
Example Problem #3
The third example shows the calculation for moment of inertia with knuckles. The available I is less than the required because the resulting neutral axis is very close to the shell/
knuckle (cone) juncture.
FileName : CHECKS
----------------------------------
13-18
ITEM:
4,
Page
02:09pm,
1
05/18/98
Example Problems
4,
Description: KNUCKLE
PINT
.00
psig
TEMPIN
.00
PEXT
15.00
TEMPEX
500.00
Cone Material
psig
F
Yes
SA-516 70
SAC
17500.00
psi
SOC
17500.00
psi
EC
1.0000
TC
1.0000
in.
CAC
.0000
in.
BASIS
ID
DS
50.0000
in.
DL
100.0000
in.
ANGLE
20.50
LC
70.0000
degrees
in.
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
SOS
17500.00
psi
ES
1.0000
TS
.5000
in.
CAS
.0000
in.
LS
50.0000
in.
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
SOL
17500.00
psi
EL
1.0000
TL
1.0000
in.
CAL
.0000
in.
LL
100.0000
in.
Knuckle
SA-285 C
13800.00
psi
13800.00
psi
RBLK
10.0000
in.
RTLK
1.0000
in.
Knuckle
SA-285 C
13800.00
psi
13800.00
psi
RBSK
7.0000
in.
RTSK
.5000
in.
13-19
Example Problems
4,
Description: KNUCKLE
CS-2
at
500.00
27000000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
1.0000
100.6068
70.00
107.41
.5265
Factor A
.0022902 11752.49
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*11752.490)/(3*107.4087)=145.8911 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.2734
100.6068
70.00
392.86
.5265
.0003274
4419.89
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*4419.892)/(3*392.8625)=15.0006 psig
CS-2
at
500.00
27000000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
.5000
51.0000
50.00
102.00
.9804
Factor A
.0012885 10514.21
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*10514.210)/(3*102.0000)=137.4406 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.1685
51.0000
50.00
302.59
.9804
.0002522
3404.33
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*3404.330)/(3*302.5871)=15.0010 psig
HA-2
at
500.00
25200000.00
F
psi
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
1.0000
102.0000
100.00
102.00
.9804
.0012885
9164.62
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*9164.623)/(3*102.0000)=119.7990 psig
OD
SLEN
D/T
L/D
Factor A
.3465
102.0000
100.00
294.35
.9804
.0002628
3311.67
EMAWP=(4*B)/(3*DT)=(4*3311.668)/(3*294.3505)=15.0010 psig
Cone
Large Cyl
Reqd. Thickness + CA
.1685
.2734
.3465
in.
.5000
1.0000
1.0000
in.
137.44
145.89
119.80
psig
15.00
15.00
15.00
psig
13-20
Example Problems
87.00
sq.in.
1102.29
lb./in.
956.01
psi
.000076
Centroid
Ar*Ce
Dist
Shl
5.555
.0000
.000
-.2539
.463
.358
Con
2.004
1.0159
2.036
.7621
.273
1.164
Knu
3.757
.2226
.836
-.0313
TOT
11.316
2.873
Centroid of Section
.2539
Ar*Di^2
.475
.004
1.211
1.526
Moment of Inertia
2.737
2.737
in**4
Required
6.130
in**4
49.50
sq.in.
925.55
lb./in.
728.52
psi
.000054
Centroid
Ar*Ce
Dist
Shl
1.389
.0000
.000
.1114
.029
.017
con
.254
.5037
.128
-.3923
.024
.039
knu
1.297
.1537
.199
-.0423
.053
.002
TOT
2.940
.106
.059
Centroid of Section
.328
.1114
Ar*Di^2
Moment of Inertia
.16
.165
in**4
Required
.661
in**4
13-21
Example Problems
13-22
&KDSWHU
The Floating Head Module
Introduction
The PVElite Floating Head Module performs internal and external pressure design of
spherically dished covers (bolted heads) using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1
rules, 2001, A-2001.
14-1
14-2
Type d is the most common type of head used for heat exchanger floating heads.
Tube Side (Internal) Design Pressure
Enter the internal pressure, which is the pressure on the concave side of the head, and is
also the tubeside pressure for heat exchanger floating heads. Normally you may enter both
the shellside and the tubeside pressures and evaluate the entire head in a single analysis.
However, when analyzing a type d head, the interaction between shellside and tubeside
pressure may result in a lower thickness than if each pressure is entered separately. Therefore you may want to run the program twice, with first internal and then external pressures
set to zero.
Shell Side (External) Design Pressure
Enter the external pressure, which is the pressure on the convex side of the head, and is
also the shellside pressure for heat exchanger floating heads. Normally you may enter both
the shellside and the tubeside pressures and evaluate the entire head in a single analysis.
However, when analyzing a type d head, the interaction between shellside and tubeside
pressure may result in a lower thickness than if each pressure is entered separately. Therefore you may want to run the program twice, with first internal and then external pressures
set to zero.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature will be used to interpolate
the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
14-3
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification.
Caution
You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
When you change the design temperature, or the thickness of the
head, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be
sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the
design temperature.
Caution
You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
When you change the design temperature, or the thickness of the
head, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be
sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the
design temperature.
14-4
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. Note that the number of bolts is
almost always a multiple of four.
Full Face Gasket
Check this field if there is a full face gasket on the floating head. A full face gasket extends
from the ID of the flange to the OD, enclosing the bolt holes. These gaskets are usually
soft materials such as rubber or an elastomer, so that the bolt stresses do not go too high
during gasket seating. The program adjusts the flange analysis and the design formulas to
account for the full face gasket.
14-5
PVElite
EQUIVALENT
1a
1b
1c
1d
DESCRIPTION
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
14-6
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Length of Partition Gasket
This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated
with this flange. If the pass partition gaskets are a different width than the main gasket,
scale the length you enter so that the area of the gasket is correct.
Width of Partition Gasket
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. The gasket properties such as the facing
sketch, column, M and Y will be taken from the main gasket. Using these properties and
the know width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket
loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline
HR is the distance from the flange centroid to the intersection of the head centerline and
the flange. HR is positive if it is above the flange centroid, and negative if it is below the
flange centroid. HR is used in the Code calculation, but not in the Soehrens calculation.
Is the Flange Slotted?
Check this box if the flange has slotted bolt holes for quick opening. A slotted flange has
bolt holes which extend radially to the outer edge of the flange. The program automatically adjusts for this condition - you do not have to change the flange outside diameter.
Do You Need to Perform Soehrens Calculation?
Check this box if you wish to perform the Soehrens Calculation. Soehrens calculation is
a more detailed analysis of the interaction between the spherical cap and the flange. Frequently the stresses calculated using this method will be acceptable for heads or flanges
that are slightly less thick than required by the normal code rules. Note that this analysis
can only be done for type d heads. Note also that the Code (Par. 1-6(h)) allows this type of
analysis.
Is There a Backing Ring?
Check this box if there is a backing ring. A backing ring is a second flange used to sandwich the tubesheet of a floating head heat exchanger. The backing ring may be a split ring.
If the ring has one split, then it has been split along a diameter, into two pieces. The bending moment on the ring is multiplied by 2.0 for this case. A ring with two splits has been
sliced in half like a bagel, and then each half has been split along a diameter. The ring is
assembled with the diametral splits offset by 90 degrees. For this case, enter the thickness
of one half of the original ring, since each half is required to support 75 percent of the
original design moment.
14-7
14-8
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
Internal Pressure Results for the Head
The ASME Code provides a simple formula for calculating the required thickness of the
head under internal pressure. This formula is the same for type b, c, and d heads:
t = 5PL/6S
The program solves this formula for required thickness, maximum allowable working
pressure, and actual stress, and displays the results. Note that these results are also displayed in the thickness summary at the end of the printout.
External Pressure Results for the Head
The required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each head type is
based on the external pressure requirements for an equivalent sphere.
Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head
Three separate bending moments are calculated for each head. These are the bolt up
moment, the moment due to external pressure, and the moment due to internal pressure. In
each case the moment is calculated per the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2. However, in the case of the type d head the moment is further modified to take into
account the force imposed on the flange by the pressure on the head. This force is shown
in the printout as MH. The sign of this force will be negative if the head is attached above
the centroid of the flange, and positive if the head is attached below the centroid.
Required Thickness Calculations
The required thickness formulae for each flange type and loading condition are printed by
the program. These formulae are taken from Appendix 1-6, paragraphs (e)(2) and (3),
(f)(2) through (5) and (g)(2).
The required thickness calculations for the backing ring are also shown. The backing ring
is taken as a ring flange and calculated per Appendix 2. The analysis is corrected for the
number of splits in the backing ring, and shows the required thickness for each piece of the
split ring.
The thickness calculations for the main flange and backing ring involve the factor F which
is directly proportional to the design pressure. Thus when the pressure is 0, for the bolt-up
condition, the factor F is theoretically equal to 0. Some however interpret the Code to
mean that F should be computed using the design pressure even for the bolt-up cases.
There is a setup file directive that allows you to toggle this to work one way or the other.
To keep the program results consistent with older versions, this setup file parameter is set
to compute F with 0 pressure for the bolt-up conditions.
After the required thicknesses are calculated, a summary table is printed.
Soehrens Calculations
The ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-6, paragraph (h) states:
These formulas are approximate in that they do not take into account continuity between
the flange ring and the dished head. A more exact method of analysis which takes this into
account may be used if it meets the requirements of U-2.
14-9
Discussion of Results
The analysis referred to in this paragraph is the Soehrens calculation, based on the paper
The Design of Floating Heads for Heat-Exchangers, ASME 57-A-7-47. Intermediate
results and calculated stresses are shown in the printout. Equation numbers are included
from the original paper. Allowable stresses are not shown in the printout, but bending
stresses should be limited to 1.5 times the basic Code allowable stress, while membrane
stresses should be limited to 1.0 times the basic Code allowable.
14-10
Example Problems
Example Problems
The following 2 examples show the same floating head subjected to internal and external
pressure. Separate runs have been made to clarify the individual calculations. These examples are included in the CHECKS file.
Example Problem #1
INPUT ECHO, Floating Head Analysis:
2,
Description: FLOHEAD-INT
PTS
100.00
psig
PSS
0.00
psig
TEMP
360.00
Head Material
SA-516 70
SOH
17500.00
psi
SAH
17500.00
psi
CR
43.8750
in.
Head Thickness
TH
0.6250
in.
CATS
0.0625
in.
0.1250
in.
Flange Material
SA-516 70
SOC
17500.00
psi
SAC
17500.00
psi
FOD
47.6250
in.
FID
43.8750
in.
TC
3.1250
in.
Flange Thickness
Bolt Material
SA-193 B7M
SBO
20000.00
psi
SBA
20000.00
psi
DB
45.7500
in.
DBOLT
0.7500
in.
Number of Bolts
44
No
FOD
44.7500
in.
FID
43.8750
in.
GOD
44.6250
in.
GID
43.8750
in.
Gasket Factor, m,
3.7500
7600.00
1, Code Sketch 1a
2, Code Column II
psi
Gasket Thickness
0.1250
in.
0.0000
in.
14-11
Example Problems
0.0000
in.
Width
0.0000
in.
0.6875
in.
of Partition Gasket
RN = (GODC-GIDC) / 2.0
0.375
in.
B0 = RN / 2.0
0.188
in.
BE = B0
0.188
in.
44.250
in.
13.288
sq.in.
1.125
in.
0.813
in.
1.750
in.
3.264
in.
5.912
in.
153785.9
lb.
HP
19549.1
lb.
HD
152053.1
lb.
HT
1732.8
lb.
HH
264950.1
lb.
WM1
173334.9
lb.
14-12
Example Problems
WM2
198097.1
AM
9.905
lb.
sq.in.
231928.5
lb.
HG
19549.0
lb.
DHG
0.7500
in.
DHT
0.8125
in.
DHD
0.8750
in.
Force
Distance
Bolt Corr
Moment
End Pressure,
Md
152053.
0.8750
1.0000
Face Pressure,
Mt
1733.
0.8125
1.0000
117. ft.lb.
Gasket Load,
Mg
19549.
0.7500
1.0000
1222. ft.lb.
264950.
0.6875
1.0000
-15179. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating,
231929.
0.7500
1.0000
14496. ft.lb.
Ma
11087. ft.lb.
2753. ft.lb.
14496. ft.lb.
Head
0.2092
Flange
2.0001 in.
2.4731 in.
2.4731 in.
0.3967
2.6606 in.
0.6250
3.1250 in.
WHD
286.3
lb.
WHDCA
201.7
lb.
WFL
238.3
lb.
WFLCA
222.4
lb.
14-13
Example Problems
Example Problem #2
INPUT ECHO, Floating Head Analysis:
3,
Description: FLOHEAD-EXT
PTS
0.00
psig
PSS
55.00
psig
TEMP
360.00
Head Material
SA-516 70
SOH
17500.00
psi
SAH
17500.00
psi
CR
43.8750
in.
Head Thickness
TH
0.6250
in.
CATS
0.0625
in.
0.1250
in.
Flange Material
SA-516 70
SOC
17500.00
psi
SAC
17500.00
psi
FOD
47.6250
in.
FID
43.8750
in.
TC
3.1250
in.
Flange Thickness
Bolt Material
SA-193 B7M
SBO
20000.00
psi
SBA
20000.00
psi
DB
45.7500
in.
DBOLT
0.7500
in.
Number of Bolts
44
No
FOD
44.7500
in.
FID
43.8750
in.
GOD
44.6250
in.
GID
43.8750
in.
Gasket Factor, m,
3.7500
7600.00
1, Code Sketch 1a
2, Code Column II
psi
Gasket Thickness
0.1250
in.
0.0000
in.
0.0000
in.
Width
0.0000
in.
0.6875
in.
of Partition Gasket
14-14
Example Problems
CS-2
at
360.00
28400000.00
F
psi
OD
D/T
0.4375
44.3750
101.43
Factor A
0.0012324 12411.07
OD
D/T
Factor A
0.2470
44.3750
179.64
0.0006958
9880.94
RN = (GODC-GIDC) / 2.0
0.375
in.
B0 = RN / 2.0
0.188
in.
BE = B0
0.188
in.
44.250
in.
13.288
sq.in.
1.125
in.
0.813
in.
1.750
in.
3.264
in.
5.912
in.
84582.2
lb.
HP
10752.0
lb.
HD
83629.2
lb.
HT
953.0
lb.
HH
145805.6
lb.
WM1
95334.2
lb.
WM2
198097.1
lb.
AM
9.905
sq.in.
231928.5
lb.
HG
10752.0
lb.
DHG
0.7500
in.
DHT
0.8125
in.
DHD
0.8750
in.
Force
Distance
Bolt Corr
Moment
End Pressure,
Md
83629.
0.1250
1.0000
871. ft.lb.
Face Pressure,
Mt
953.
0.0625
1.0000
5. ft.lb.
14-15
Example Problems
145806.
0.6875
1.0000
-8353. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating,
231929.
0.7500
1.0000
14496. ft.lb.
Ma
7477. ft.lb.
14496. ft.lb.
Head
0.2470
Flange
2.2089 in.
2.4731 in.
2.4731 in.
0.4345
2.6606 in.
0.6250
3.1250 in.
WHD
286.3
lb.
WHDCA
201.7
lb.
WFL
238.3
lb.
WFLCA
222.4
lb.
14-16
&KDSWHU
The Horizontal Vessel Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Horizontal Vessel module of the PVElite program. To use the
Horizontal Vessel module the current analysis type should be Horizontal Vessel. This
module computes stresses in horizontal pressure vessels created by the combination of
internal pressure and the weight of the vessel, its contained liquid and stiffener rings. If
included in the analysis, additional loads due to wind per ASCE-95 or 93 and earthquake
will be included. The module is based on Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports, The Welding Research Supplement, 1951 and subsequent interpretations of that work. This is also termed Zicks Analysis.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Vessel Number
Enter the vessel number for this analysis. This number can be up to 15 digits in length.
Vessel Description
Any combination up to 15 letters and numbers can be used to briefly identify the vessel
that is being analyzed. This description is reflected in the output reports and is used in
error checking.
If you want to use the factor 6.0 instead of 1.5 for the saddle reaction force FWT (due to
wind load) or FST (due to seismic load) (equation for Q2 per D. Moss Pressure Vessel
Design Manual p.109), you need to type the single character : at the very end of this
input field for description. It is generally conservative to use the factor of 6. The program
uses 1.5 as default.
Vessel Design Pressure
Enter the pressure under which the horizontal vessel is operating. A positive entry here
indicates internal pressure while a negative number indicates external pressure. Please
note that no external pressure check for adequate wall thickness will be performed. Use
the shell program and analyze the geometry before using the HORIZONTAL VESSEL
module.
15-1
Discussion of Input
15-2
Discussion of Input
15-3
Discussion of Input
Saddle Width
Enter the width of the surface on the saddle support that will contact the vessel.
Saddle Bearing Angle
Enter the number of degrees that the saddle bears on the shell surface. Valid entries range
from 120 to 180 degrees.
Wear Pad Thickness
If there is a wear pad on the vessel, enter that thickness here. If the distance from the vessel tangent to the saddle location is less than or equal to 0.5 times the shell radius and the
wear pad extension above the horn of the saddle is greater than the shell radius divided by
10.0 then the thickness of the wear pad will be included. If this is not the case then the
shell thickness - ca will be used.
Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle
If the vessel has a wear pad and it extends above the horn of the saddle enter that extension
distance here. For more information on wear pads, see the help text for wear pad thickness.
Wear Pad Width
If the vessel has a wear pad enter the width here. The width of the wear pad is measured
along the long axis of the vessel.
Stiffening Ring Present
If the vessel is equipped with stiffening rings check this field. Stiffening rings are used to
reduce stresses in the vicinity of the saddle supports and are also used to meet external
pressure requirements. When equipped with rings the assumption is that there are either 1
or 2 rings located directly over the saddle. The rings are assumed to span (360 - saddle
bearing angle) degrees around the vessel. This is mainly used for the calculation of the
ring weight.
15-4
15-5
requirements, so check those carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area
calculated by the program to get a shear load and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number in here, PVElite will use this number regardless of the
information in the following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the
degree of hazard to life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the
hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Values up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information
on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to
Table 6-2).
Basic Wind Speed
Enter the basic wind speed which the vessel will be subject to. Positive values will be
accepted. A minimum value of 70 miles per hour is recommended.
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A)- Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in
excess of 70 ft.
Exposure (B)- Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous
closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings.
Exposure (C)- Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less
than 30 feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands.
Exposure (D)- Flat, unobstructed costal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over
large bodies of water.
Note
15-6
None
2-D Ridge
2-D Escarpment
15-7
15-8
15-9
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
PVElite will determine the volume of the vessel as well as the empty and full weights.
These weights are computed with the vessel in the corroded condition. Knowing the
weights may be useful for cost estimating and for design of supporting attachments, such
as lifting lugs.
The longitudinal stresses displayed in the output include the stress effects due to internal
pressure. Since these are normal stresses they add together. The tension allowable is the
basic operating allowable times the joint efficiency. The compressive allowable is the factor B taken from UG-23 using the materials chart for the given material.
The tangential shear in the shell varies depending on whether the shell is stiffened or the
head acts as a stiffener, or neither of these cases. Tangential stress in the head only exists if
the head is close enough to the saddle to be used as a stiffener. The allowable stress in
shear is 80% of the allowable tensile stress for the head or shell.
The stress at the horn of the saddle depends on the location of the saddle and the equivalent thickness of the saddle and wear pad. It is zero if the shell is stiffened by rings. This
stress is always compressive and the allowable stress is -1.5 times the allowable tensile
stress.
Use of the head as a stiffener creates additional tension stress in the head. The allowable
additional stress in the vessel head is limited to 0.25 times the allowable tension stress in
the head. If pressure is added, the resulting stress must be less than 1.25 times the allowable tensile stress.
If the tip of the stiffening ring is in compression its allowable will be -0.5 times the yield
stress. If a tensile condition exists the basic material allowable will be used.
15-10
The saddle angle must be greater than 120 degrees. Saddle angles of 120 degrees with
an appropriate wear plate can result in a 15 to 40 percent stress reduction at horn of the
saddle. Larger saddle angles cause a greater stress reduction for the same wear plate
ratios.
The value of ( (r/b) * sqrt(r/t) ) must be between 10 and 60, when this term is not
within this range, no thickness will be selected. (r = mean radius of the vessel, b =
width of the wear plate, t = thickness of the vessel)
Conclusions
The peak stress in the vessel at the saddle horn can be reduce from 15 to 40 percent
when a wear plate is used if the wear plate has the same thickness as the vessel and
extends at least 5 degrees above the saddle horn.
The peak stress in the vessel remains at the saddle horn when using a thin wear plate.
The stress reduction does not vary greatly with a variation in saddle support angle.
15-11
A welded wear plate reduces stresses better than a non-welded wear plate.
15-12
Figure 15B - Wear Plate and Saddle Detail for a Typical Horizontal Tank
15-13
Example Problem
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS
------------------------------- Page 1
ITEM:
1,
1,
02:36pm,
Description: C TEST
300.00
psig
Design Temperature
650.00
Shell Material
.0000
in.
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
17500.00
psi
Head Material
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
17500.00
psi
Baseplate Length
.2830
108.1180
62.4000
Baseplate Width
lb./cu.in
in.
lb./cu.ft
11225.000
lb.
60.0000
in.
.5000
in.
12.0000
in.
Baseplate Thickness
Rib Thickness
.5000
in.
Web Thickness
.5000
in.
Web Location
Center
8.0000
in.
100.00
SA-516 70
17500.00
psi
17500.00
psi
No
Force Coefficient
.600
Extra Area
.0000 sq.in.
Importance Factor
Wind Velocity
Exposure Category
Height above Grade
Distance from Center of Vessel to Support
15-14
05/18/98
1.000
100.000
mile/hr
C
9.9167
ft.
64.0000
in.
OD
110.0000
in.
66.0000
ft.
.9410
in.
Example Problem
1.0000
Head Type
Elliptical
Head Thickness
.9290
in.
1.0000
30.0000
in.
Saddle Width
10.0000
in.
120.0000
degrees
.3750
in.
10.0000
in.
12.0000
in.
1,
Description: C TEST
used in Calculation
17500.00
psi
38000.00
psi
used in Calculation
17500.00
psi
used in Calculation
17500.00
psi
Volume of Vessel
32909.77
Gals.
90584.07
lb.
365106.40
lb.
Required
Actual
.936
.941
in.
Head
.929
.929
in.
300.00
301.47
psig
Head
300.00
300.15
psig
Actual
Allowable
of Saddles
8776.65
17500.00
psi
8337.89
17500.00
psi
of Midspan
5041.68
17500.00
psi
12072.86
17500.00
psi
3743.68
14000.00
psi
-8102.35
-26250.00
psi
-6352.63
-26250.00
psi
-9098.41
-19000.00
psi
15-15
Example Problem
WELDED
UNWELDED
deg. )
.9410
.9410
in.
1.6468
1.6468
in.
1.8820
2.3525
in.
15-16
Example Problem
= 219.38 psi
Tangential Shear in Shell near Saddle
= Q * K.4 * (( L-H-2A )/( L+H ))/( R*(TS-CA))
= 188991 * 1.1707 * (( 66.00 - 2.25 - 2 * 2.50 )/
( 66.00 + 2.25 ))/( 54.0590 * ( .9410 - .0000 ))
= 3743.68 psi
Y
Shell
AY
Ay^2
21.7619
Wearplate
1.1285
4.5000
5.0782
5.7308
.0527
Web
4.4080
3.0920
13.6295
60.0790
9.8537
7.7500
6.0000
46.5000
360.3750
.1250
13.7570
35.3539
75.4468
431.0023
11.6372
BasePlate
Totals
Value
Value
Value
C1 = Ay/A
10.2390
Io
.4705
2.1340
I = Ay^2 + Io - C1*Ay =
281.6328
As = A - Ashell
13.5920
4.8174
in.
in**4
sq.in.
K1 = (1+Cos()-.5*Sin()^2 )/(-+Sin()*Cos()) =
Fh = ( K1 * Q ) =
38463.8400
.2035
lb.
5659.7770
psi
22800.0000
psi
Bending Mom., M
= ( 2.0 * Fh*d
1.6058
111241.1000
ft.lb.
15-17
Example Problem
Bending Str., Sb = ( M * C1 / I
10115.0100
psi
25080.0000
psi
1.0632
in.
** LOW **
= ( BPLEN - 1 ) / ( NRIBS - 1)
AP = e * BPWID / 2
AP = 14.7500 * 12.0000 / 2 = 88.5000 sq.in.
= AP * BP
SC = P/AR
SC = 23230.1900 / 8.9375 = 2599.1820 psi
AY
Ay^2
Io
Rib
5.0000
5.2500
26.2500
.0000
41.6615
Web
5.0000
3.6875
18.4375
.0000
.1536
Values
5.0000
8.9375
44.6875
.0000
41.8151
5.5000
Web
Values
AY
Ay^2
Io
5.2500
28.8750
.0000
55.4531
5.5000
7.3750
40.5625
.0000
.1536
5.5000
12.6250
69.4375
.0000
55.6068
15-18
Example Problem
15-19
Example Problem
15-20
&KDSWHU
The TEMA Tubesheet Module
Introduction
The PVElite TEMA Tubesheet Module performs tubesheet thickness analysis for all
tubesheet types, including fixed tubesheet exchangers, based on the Standards of the
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 8th Edition, 2001.
The module does the required calculations for the thickness of a tubesheet (stationary or
U-tube) which has been extended as a flange. It also calculates the required thickness of
the extension. The user must enter the geometry of the flange extension, including the gasket and bolting for the flange.
The TEMA Tubesheet module takes into account the following additional loadings for
fixed tubesheet exchangers:
16-1
Pressure and thermal loads - on shell, tubesheet, tubes and tube-to-tubesheet joints.
The TEMA Tubesheet module calculates required thicknesses in the corroded condition.
Occasionally the tubesheet thickness will be governed by the uncorroded condition, so a
case with shellside and tubeside corrosion allowances set to zero should be analyzed for
most exchangers.
Figures 16A, 16B and 16C show geometry for the TEMA Tubesheet Module
16-2
16-3
16-4
Enter the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external
pressure, enter a negative pressure. The program will correctly combine this pressure with
the positive pressure on the other side. Note that if you specify a differential pressure in
the differential pressure input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside will usually be
ignored. The exception to this is fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the differential pressure field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate calculations
for differential pressure should be performed.
Shell Metal Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the shell side components. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the
metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual
metal temperature.
Shell\Channel\Tube\Tube Sheet Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
Enter the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the
program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets, and especially in calculating longitudinal shell stresses for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
16-5
Enter the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculated
the corroded thickness of the shell and the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Shell Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the program
to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets, and especially in calculating longitudinal shell stresses for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Channel Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum
design condition, enter a negative pressure. The program will correctly combine this pressure with the positive pressure on the other side. Note that if you specify a differential
pressure in the differential pressure input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside
will usually be ignored. The exception to this is fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the differential pressure field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate
calculations for differential pressure should be performed.
Channel Metal Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the tube side components. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the
metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual
metal temperature.
Channel Wall Thickness
Enter the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by
the program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types.
Channel Corrosion Allowance
Enter the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate
the corroded thickness of the channel and the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Channel Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets.
Tubesheet Type
16-6
T
W
D
F
Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75,
.875, 1.0, or 1.25. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term eta
in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.
Tube Corrosion Allowance
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and
pattern are used to calculate the term eta in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules
are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for
square or rotated square layouts.
Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square)
Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term eta in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular
and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.
Are Tubes Attached by a Groove or Fillet Weld?
Check this field if the tubes are joined to the tubesheet by a fillet or groove weld. Do not
check this field if the tubes are not welded to the tubesheet.
Perimeter of Tube Layout (if Needed)
Enter the length of a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. This can be calculated by counting the number of tubes on the outside of the layout and multiplying by the
tube pitch. When a tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the
perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. You will see an error message
when these values are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter.
Area of Tube Layout
Enter the area enclosed by a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. When a
tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area
of the tubesheet for the shear calculation. You will see an error message when these values
are required but not given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and
underestimate the perimeter.
Differential Design Pressure (Used if > 0.0)
Enter the differential design pressure if you wish the program to use the differential design
rules. The differential pressure is used as the design pressure on both the tubeside and the
16-7
shellside, except for fixed tubesheet exchangers. In this case any number greater than zero
serves as a flag to tell the program to turn on the special differential design pressure rules
for fixed tubesheets. You must enter the shell side and tube side design pressures for fixed
tubesheet exchangers.
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet
If the tubesheet has a groove, enter its depth here. This value is used as a candidate when
finalizing the required thickness of the tubesheet. The maximum of this value or the channel corrosion allowance plus the shellside corrosion allowance will be added to the computed required tubesheet thickness. If your tubesheet is not grooved, enter a 0 in this field.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tubesheet, or a reasonable guess at the thickness if the actual
thickness is unknown. This thickness should include any allowances for corrosion on the
shell side or the tube side. The tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet exchangers is also
used in the equivalent thermal pressure calculation. When you have finished your design
you should come back and put the actual thickness into this field and make sure the
required thickness doesnt change.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the shell side. This value is combined with the
tubesheet corrosion allowance shell side to calculate the corroded thickness of the
tubesheet.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Channel Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the channel side. his value is combined with
the tubesheet corrosion allowance channel side to calculate the corroded thickness of the
tubesheet.
Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for
determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Tubesheet Extended as Flange?
Check this field if the tubesheet is extended and used as a bolted flange. Do not check this
field unless the tubesheet actually sees bending moments the bolting. If the tubesheet is
bolted between a pair of flanges, the tubesheet itself will not experience a bending
moment. It is only when the tubesheet replaces one of the flanges that a moment develops.
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both)
Enter the kind of gasketing associated with this tubesheet. If the tubesheet has a circular
gasket, even if the gasket is not extended as a flange, you must enter the details of the gasketing, so that the program can correctly evaluate the mean diameter of the gasket load
reaction (G).
16-8
Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell under a realistic operating condition. It is
important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you
enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have
to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently
the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal
resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the
tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will
be quite close to the shell temperature. Dont forget to evaluate the condition of shellside
or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may
govern the exchanger design.
Actual Tube Metal Temperature
Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubes under a realistic operating condition. It is
important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you
enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have
to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently
the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal
resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the
tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will
be quite close to the shell temperature. Dont forget to evaluate the condition of shellside
or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may
govern the exchanger design.
Actual TEMA Tubesheets Metal Temperature
Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet under a realistic operating condition.
This value does not affect the thermal expansion design, but it is used to determine the
elastic modulus of the tubesheet.
Number of Tubes
Enter the number of tubes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube
area and stiffness.
Length of Tubes
Enter the overall length of the tubes, the length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the
inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of
the tubes.
16-9
Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area
and stiffness. The following table gives thicknesses for some common tube gauges:
BWG
Gauge
Thickness
(inches)
BWG
Gauge
Thickness
(inches)
.180
17
.058
.165
18
.049
10
.134
19
.042
11
.120
20
.035
12
.109
22
.028
13
.095
24
.022
14
.083
26
.018
15
.072
27
.016
16
.065
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (Chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking
and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Fillet or Groove Weld Leg Length
If the tubes on your exchanger are welded to the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld or
groove weld leg length. Some designs incorporate either only a groove or fillet weld,
sometimes both are used. These values are used to determine the weld strengths. PVElite
will determine will determine the minimum required weld sizes afm and agm. Refer to
paragraph UW-20 in the ASME Code for more details.
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor
The ASME Code tube joint reliability factor is found in the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Table A-2, and is used to calculate the allowable tube-to-tubesheet joint loads.
A typical value for tubes rolled into two grooves is 0.70.
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint,
enter a one (1.0). If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant
for the joint. The expansion joint spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite
THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a similar analysis technique.
16-10
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint,
enter a one (1.0). If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant
for the joint. The expansion joint spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite
THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a similar analysis technique. The
spring rate reported from the THICKJNT program is reported in units of pounds per inch.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, different inputs for the uncorroded and corroded spring rates
will be reported, these will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and
corroded condition.
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the outer annular plate. This value is used by the program to
calculate the force on the cylinder, and thus the equivalent pressure of thermal expansion.
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL for Max (k*SL)
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of K and SL are required.
Where,
SL: Unsupported Span of the tube
k:
Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. Here are the different values of k:
Condition
0.6
0.8
1.0
For the worst case scenario enter the values of K and SL, that give a maximum combination of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tube span between two support baffles.
16-11
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of K and SL are required.
Where,
SL: Unsupported Span of the tube
k:
Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. Here are the different values of k:
For the worst case scenario enter the values of K and SL, that give a maximum combination of k*SL. See above for possible values of k.
Is this a Kettle Type Heat Exchanger ?
Check here if the shell is shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in
Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Length of Kettle Port Cylinder (LP)
Enter the length of the Kettle port cyclinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is
shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure
N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Thickness of Kettle Port Cylinder (TP)
Enter the thickness of the Kettle port cyclinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is
shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure
N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Mean Diameter of Kettle Port Cylinder (DP)
Enter the mean diameter of the Kettle port cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell
is shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Length of Kettle Cylinder
Enter the length of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like
a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the
TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Thickness of Kettle Cylinder
Enter the thickness of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped
like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in
the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Mean Diameter of Kettle Cylinder
Enter the mean diameter of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is
shaped like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure
N-2 in the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Axial Length of Kettle Cone (LC)
Enter the axial length of the Kettle cone. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped
like a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in
the TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
16-12
Enter the thickness of the Kettle cone. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like
a kettle. The kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and Figure N-2 in the
TEMA Standard Eighth Edition.
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ?
Check this box if you want to run multiple load cases for the tubesheet design, per the
TEMA standard.
Load
Case #
Uncorroded
Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca
Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca
Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
Ps + Pt - Th + Ca
Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca
Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca
Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca
Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
Ps + Pt + Th + Ca
Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca
Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fts, Fvs - User-defined shell side and tube side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt
Th
Ca
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel
side vacuum pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example, for full atmospheric
vacuum conditions enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified then 0 psi is used.
Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate summarized results for all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and
intermediate calculations for any load cases, select that load case.
Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as A in the ASME code.
16-13
Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will used in the calculation of the required thickness. The final results should, therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five percent.
Nominal Bolt Diameter
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range
from 0.5 to 4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the
nominal size in this field, and also enter the root area of one bolt in the Thread Series
cell.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table 2 - UNC Bolt Table 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt
Bolt Root Area (Used if > 0)
If you exchanger design has non-standard bolts, enter a 3 in the field above this one and
enter the root area of a single bolt in this field.
Number of Bolts
Enter the fillet weld height between the tubesheet flange and the shell or channel outside
surface. pvelite will use this number to calculate g1 ( the hub thickness at the large end).
Operating Bolt Load ?
Specify the alternate operating bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value
will be used if it is greater than the operating bolt load computed by the program.
Seating Bolt Load ?
Specify the alternate seating bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value
will be used if it is greater than the seating bolt load computed by the program.
Flange Design Bolt Load ?
Specify the alternate flange design bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This
value will be used if it is greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the program.
Flange Face Outer Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the flange
face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact
point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. The program uses
16-14
the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point
of the gasket.
Flange Face Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the Flange
Face ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Flange Face Facing Sketch
Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations:
Facing
Sketch
PVEliteEquivalent
1a
1b
1c
1d
Description
Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The program uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point,
but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the
bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange face
ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
Gasket Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the Flange Face
ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket. For gasket properties, refer to the table in Chapter 12, The Flange Module.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
16-15
This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated
with this flange. If the pass partition gaskets are a different width than the main gasket,
scale the length you enter so that the area of the gasket is correct.
Width of Partition Gasket
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. The gasket properties such as the facing
sketch, column, M and Y will be taken from the main gasket. Using these properties and
the known width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Intermediate Calculations for Tubesheets Extended as Flanges
Two major additions to the tubesheet calculation occur when a tubesheet is extended as a
flange. First, a moment is added to the pressure moment which governs the thickness of
most tubesheets. Second, a moment exists on the portion of the tubesheet which serves as
the flange, and the effects of this moment must be evaluation. The TEMA standard
requires that these conditions be evaluated using the rules in the ASME code, appendix 2.
Those rules, in turn, require the complete evaluation of bending moments on the flange. It
is those bending moment calculations which are reflected in this section of the output.
These calculations represent the basic bolt loading for the flanged portion of the tubesheet,
and will be the same for the mating flange. The actual bending moments may change
when compared to the mating flange. The flanged extension of the tubesheet is calculated
as a ring type flange. Since no stresses are shown, you need to check the adequacy of the
bolting by comparing the required to actual area. The bolt spacing correction factor is
automatically included in the bending moment, such that the moment is the force times the
distance times the bolt correction.
Geometric Constants, Pressure and Thickness Calculations
The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term eta in the tubesheet
thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The
rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. When a tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the
shear calculation. You will see an error message when these values are required but not
given. The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the
perimeter.
The G dimension is calculated based on the exchanger type and either the diameter of the
pressure component or the mean diameter of the gasket. Similarly, the F dimension is calculated based on the exchanger type and the type of connection to the shell and channel.
These calculations are based on Table RCB-7.132 and Table RCB-7.133.
Differential Expansion Pressure
The program contains tables of Youngs modulus and coefficient of thermal expansion. It
selects these values from the tables based on the materials classification you enter on the
material editing screen of the input spreadsheet. You should make sure that the program
has selected the right identification number for the material. You should also check the
values to make sure that they agree with your expectations. A good place to find this data,
and the source of these tables in the program, is the TEMA Standard, tables D-10 and D-
16-16
11. The following list shows the program identification numbers for the materials in this
standard:
Chart
Number
Cross Reference
to Elastic Chart
B31.3:
Carbon Steel
B31.3:
5Cr-9Cr
B31.3:
12,17,27Cr
B31.3:
18Cr-8Ni
B31.3:
25Cr20Ni
B31.3:
67Ni30Cu
B31.3:
3.5Ni
10
B31.3:
Aluminum
B31.3:
Cast Iron
10
13
B31.3:
Bronze
11
12
B31.3:
Brass
12
B31.3:
70Cu-30Ni
13
B31.3:
Ni-Fe-Cr
14
B31.3:
Ni-Cr-Fe
15
B31.3:
Ductile Iron
16
14
TEMA:
17
14
TEMA:
18
16
TEMA:
C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
19
14
TEMA:
Mn-Mo
20
20
TEMA:
21
17
TEMA:
2-1/4Cr-1Mo
22
18
TEMA:
5Cr-1/2Mo
23
18
TEMA:
24
19
TEMA:
25
19
TEMA:
26
15
TEMA:
27
15
TEMA:
TP304
28
15
TEMA:
TP321
29
15
TEMA:
TP347
30
15
TEMA:
25Cr-12Ni, 23Cr-12Ni,
Chart Name
16-17
31
23
TEMA:
Aluminum 3003
32
23
TEMA:
Aluminum 6061
33
32
TEMA:
34
21
TEMA:
35
24
TEMA:
36
25
TEMA:
37
35
TEMA:
38
34
TEMA:
Ni-Mo (Alloy B)
39
27
TEMA:
40
28
TEMA:
41
33
TEMA:
70-30 Cu-Ni
42
22
TEMA:
43
29
TEMA:
Copper
44
30
TEMA:
Brass
45
29
TEMA:
Aluminum Bronze
46
29
TEMA:
Copper-Silicon
47
31
TEMA:
Admiralty
48
37
TEMA:
Zirconium
49
15
TEMA:
Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb
50
38
TEMA:
16-18
Example Problems
Example Problems
Example problem 1 is a comparison problem for a fixed tubesheet exchanger that has a
thick walled metal bellows expansion joint. The results compare very well to the other
exchanger program. There are several additional example problems contained in the files
TEXAMPLE.
FileName : CHECKS
--------------------------------- Page
ITEM:
1,
1,
02:56pm, 12/14/2000
Description: COMPARISON
PS
50.00
TEMPS
649.00
Shell Material
psig
F
SA-240 304H
SOS
15900.00
psi
SAS
18800.00
psi
Shell Thickness
TS
0.2500
CAS
0.0000
DS
112.0000
PC
50.00
TEMPC
649.00
Channel Material
in.
in.
in.
psig
F
SA-240 304H
SOC
15900.00
psi
SAC
18800.00
psi
Channel Thickness
TC
in.
CAC
0.0000
in.
DC
112.0000
in.
TUBESHEET TYPE:
0.2500
DT
PT
0.7500
1.3500
Triangular
af
0.0000
ag
0.0000
TEMPTS
649.00
in.
in.
F
SA-240 304H
SOTS
15900.00
psi
SATS
18800.00
psi
TTS
2.5625
in.
in.
Thickness of Tubesheet
in.
in.
CATS
0.000
CATC
0.000
GROOVE
in.
0.0000
in.
ACTUAL1
156.00
ACTUAL2
226.00
ACTUAL3
233.00
Number of Tubes
TNUMT
3100
Length of Tubes
TLENT
Tube Material
Tube Allowable Stress at Temperature
152.2500
in.
SS304-WLD-HI
SOT
13500.00
psi
16-19
Example Problems
SAT
16000.00
psi
SYT
18008.00
psi
TT
0.0490
Tbca
0.0000
FASME
in.
in.
0.7000
SJF
49250.00
lbs./in.
Sjnc
49250.00
lbs./in.
DJ
117.7500
in.
1.0000
in.
SL
in.
Yes
PEXTS
50.0000
0.0000
PEXTC
psi
0.0000
psi
No
DF
116.2500
in.
DB
114.7500
in.
TF
5.1250
in.
DBOLT
.6250
in.
( Thread Series )
Number of Bolts
Bolt Material
176
SA-193 B7
SBO
25000.00
psi
SBA
25000.00
psi
WLDH
0.0000
in.
FOD
113.6250
in.
FID
112.6250
in.
1, Code Sketch 1a
GOD
113.6250
in.
GID
112.6250
in.
Gasket Factor, m,
3.7500
Y
10000.00
psi
2, Code Column II
SIDE
CHANNEL
RN = (GOD-GID)/2
B0 = RN / 2.0
.250
BE = B0
.250
.500
113.125
in.
in.
in.
in.
16-20
Example Problems
/ 4.0
HPP
35.552
sq.in.
bolts
.938
in.
.750
in.
bolts
1.500
in.
Actual
bolts
2.048
in.
bolts
8.485
in.
16-21
Example Problems
Force
Distance
Bolt Corr
Moment
End Pressure,
Md
492602.
1.2500
1.0000
Face Pressure,
Mt
9946.
1.0938
1.0000
907. ft.lb.
Gasket Load,
Mg
33318.
.8125
1.0000
2256. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, Ma
888641.
.8125
1.0000
60169. ft.lb.
1,
51313. ft.lb.
Description: COMPARISON
FS
1.0000
GS
112.0000
Tubeside
Fixity Factor, F,
in.
1.0000
112.0000
ETA
in.
.7201
- TEMA
: TP304
- TEMA
psi
: TP304
.02782E +08
.27444E +08
psi
: TP304
.0030
.2672
-.63E-03
.8610
16-22
Example Problems
: 5.66 psig
: 2.48 psig
.8949
: 55.07 psig
: 52.19 psig
5025.1846
psig
16-23
Example Problems
.77
psig
-2.48
psig
HA-1
at
= 0.125/(Ro/t)
649.00
.0005556
5038.
psi
51.98
psig
-.48
psig
HA-1
at
ET
226.00
27118000.00 psi
16-24
Example Problems
Tube-to-Tubesheet Load :
TEMA
Tube-To-Tubesheet Load :
RCB-7.25
Actual
51.98 psig
Case#
Thickness Reqd
----- P r e s s u r e s
Case
Pass/
Tbsht
Pt
Type
Fail
Extnsn
Ps
PDif
---------------------------------------------------------------------1c
2.531
0.879
49.72
0.00
0.00
Fvs+Pt-Th+Ca
Ok
2c
0.831
0.879
0.00
-2.48
0.00
Ps+Fvt-Th+Ca
Ok
3c
2.590
0.879
49.72
-2.48
0.00
4c
0.750
0.879
0.00
0.00
-0.48
Fvs+Fvt+Th+Ca
Ok
5c
2.530
0.879
49.71
0.00
-0.48
Fvs+Pt+Th+Ca
Ok
6c
0.830
0.879
0.00
-2.48
-0.48
Ps+Fvt+Th+Ca
Ok
7c
2.589
0.879
49.71
-2.48
-0.48
8c
0.750
0.879
0.00
0.00
0.00
Ps+Pt-Th+Ca Fail
Ps+Pt+Th+Ca Fail
Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca
Ok
---------------------------------------------------------------------Max:
2.590
0.879
in.
2.5625 in.
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt
Th
Ca
Allwd
Cmp
Allwd
Allwd
Cmp
Allwd
Tube Loads
Ld
Allwd
Pass
Fail
---------------------------------------------------------------------------1c
32
15900
-5038
10689
13500
-5458
1153
1020
2c
15900
-279
-5038
1867
13500
-5458
201
1020
Fail
Ok
3c
32
15900
-279
-5038
12556
13500
-5458
1355
1020
Fail
4c
27
15900
-5038
13500
-115
-5287
1020
Ok
5c
43
15900
-5038
10691
13500
-115
-5287
1154
1020
Fail
6c
27
15900
-278
-5038
1867
13500
-115
-5287
201
1020
Ok
7c
43
15900
-278
-5038
12558
13500
-115
-5287
1355
1020
Fail
8c
15900
-5038
13500
-5458
1020
Ok
---------------------------------------------------------------------------MAX RATIO
0.003
0.055
0.930
0.022
1.329
16-25
Example Problems
16-26
&KDSWHU
The WRC 107/FEA Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the WRC 107/FEA Module in PVElite. To begin, make sure that
the current analysis type is WRC 107/FEA. This can be determined when viewing the
main menu. From version 4.0 of PVElite, an interface for performing finite element analysis (FEA) of nozzle-shell junctions, is available. You can choose to perform either WRC
107 or FEA.
WRC 107 is a method for determining stresses on the shell of a vessel when a nozzle or
some rectangular attachment is being loaded. A typical case is to analyze the vessel
stresses on a nozzle due to external piping loads. These loads are obtained from a piping
flexibility analysis. This type of stress analysis is based on Local Stresses in Spherical
and Cylindrical Shells due to External Loadings, Welding Research Council Bulletin
107, August 1965, and revision 1979, based on the prior work of P.P. Bijlaard.
As of Version 3.3, PVElite features a stress summation capability. The program computes
overall stress intensities on a vessel/nozzle intersection in accordance with ASME Section
VIII Division 2. Local vessel stress calculations for sustained, expansion, and occasional
loads along with pressure stresses are transformed into code-defined stress components.
The output, in the form of Pm, Pl, and Q and their appropriate combinations, can be compared with Section VIII Div. 2 allowable values.
There are times when the applicability of the WRC bulletin 107 is in question or a particular design is out of the scope of the bulletin. Examples include large nozzles, hillside nozzles, and lateral nozzles. In these cases and others, FEA is the best way to get accurate
results. The FEA interface in PVElite uses an encapsulated finite element program (NozzlePro) available from Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com). To run the FEA, the
user should purchase the NozzlePro program and install it in the Nozpro subfolder under
the PVElite folder. PVElite will automatically run it and present the results in the PVElite
screen.
17-1
Discussion of Input
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Enter the Attachment Number for this Analysis
The attachment number should start out at 1 and continue by ones for each successive
attachment to be analyzed. These whole integer numbers will be reflected in the input
echo generated by the program. This number can be between up to 5 digits in length.
Enter the Attachment Description for this Analysis
Use this option to bring in data from the "Shells and Heads" module. Just select the shell
you want to model this nozzle with, and all the appropriate data will be brought in from
that shell.
Import Nozzle Data
To perform a Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on the nozzle-vessel junction, the user has to
purchase the NozPro program from Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com) and install
it under the CodeCalc folder (or PVElite folder if the user has PVElite). Some additional
input will be required for the FEA run.
Select the Attachment Type
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select 'Round'. WRC107 also analyzes
other load bearing attachments such as square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular
attachment is a vessel support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in the
WRC107 bulletin.
At this point FEA can only be performed on round attachments.
Hollow or Solid Attachment ?
This input is only required for performing a WRC 107 analysis. One may note that roundhollow attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder to cylinder
case. In addition, rectangular attachments on spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this
method. Also, round-hollow attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels.
17-2
Discussion of Input
The Welding Research Council Bulletin #107 recognizes two types of vessels in which the
stress intensities can be calculated. These are cylindrical and spherical vessels.
Cylindrical
Spherical
If user selects to perform a finite element analysis then following vessel types are permitted:
Cylindrical
Spherical
Elliptical
Torispherical
Conical
Flat Head
If the vessel on which you are analyzing has dimensions specified based on the inside
diameter, choose ID. If the diameter basis is outside, choose OD. These are the only
acceptable inputs for this cell.
Diameter of Vessel
Enter the diameter of the vessel in the units displayed. The diameter basis for the vessel is
a user defined value and appears above With the vessel wall thickness, diameter basis and
corrosion allowance known, PVElite will automatically determine the mean radius.
Enter the Vessel Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the vessel wall in this field. If, the vessel in question is pipe and a
12.5% mill tolerance is wished to be used then enter the actual thickness of the vessel wall
times 0.875. PVElite does not make any modification to this value unless a corrosion
allowance is specified.
Enter the Corrosion Allowance of the Vessel
If a corrosion allowance is to be used then enter it in this field. The vessel wall thickness
will be decreased by this amount and the mean radius will be adjusted accordingly.
Material Name
Click the "Material Database" button to look up a material name from the material database. Click the "Material Edit Properties" button to change the properties of the selected
material. Users can also choose between the ASME Section VII Div 1 or Div 2 material
database.
If you enter the name on this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a
matching name.
EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C
17-3
Discussion of Input
SA-516 55
SA-516 60
SA-516 65
SA-516 70
SA-193 B7
SA-182-F1
SA-182 F1
SA-182 F11
SA-182 F12
SA-182 F22
SA-105
SA-36
SA-106 B
Stainless Steels
SA-240 304
SA-240 304L
SA-240 316
SA-240 316L
SA-193 B8
Aluminum
SB-209
SB-234
Titanium
17-4
SB-265 1
Nickel
SB-409
SB-424
Discussion of Input
Select the fatigue curve based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME
Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 5. Possible entries are.
S. No
Material
Check this field if you would like to input the forces and moments in the traditional
WRC107 convention. Leave this field unchecked if you would like to input loads in Global Coordinates and perform the stress summation. The program will NOT perform the
Div. 2 stress summation and S.I. check if this field is checked. This option is only available when running a WRC 107 calculation.
Input Loads in Global Coordinates and Allowable Stresses
Check this field if you would like to input loads in Global Coordinates and input cold/hot
Div. II allowable stresses. The program will perform Stress Summation and check against
S.I. allowables if Sustained (unrelenting) loadings are known. If you are performing FEA,
the program will ask for additional information.
Input Sustained (SUS) Loads
Check this field if you would like to input Sustained loads in Global Coordinates. The
Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be checked based on the
different load cases.
Input Expansion (EXP) Loadings/Input Operating (OPE) Loadings
The way this input is used depends on if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis or FEA
(finite element analysis).
For a WRC 107 run, check this field if you would like to input EXPansion loads in Global
Coordinates. In that case, total Stress summation will be performed and the overall stress
intensities will be checked for each load case.
For a FEA run, check this field if you would like to input OPErating loads in Global
Coordinates.
Note
17-5
Discussion of Input
Check this field if you would like to input Occasional loads in Global Coordinates. For
WRC 107, the Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be
checked based on loading cases.
Note
17-6
If the junction that is being analyzed is a nozzle, enter the diameter basis here. Select the
nozzles diameter basis from the pull-down menu.
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Enter the nozzle wall thickness. The WRC 107 program will use this thickness when the
hollow attachment is used. If the standard 12.5% mill tolerance is to be deducted, simply
multiply the standard wall thickness by 0.875 directly on the spreadsheet.
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the nozzle diameter. Both the nozzle diameter and thickness must be specified. The
nozzle diameter should be entered in accordance with the nozzle diameter basis. The units
are displayed above.
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance
This input is only needed for FEA. Press on the "Material Database" button to look up a
material name from the material database. Press the "Material Edit Properties" button to
change the properties of the selected material.
If you type in the name on this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a
matching name.
EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C
Some typical material names (standard ASME material name):
SA-516 55
SA-516 60
SA-516 65
SA-516 70
SA-193 B7
SA-182-F1
SA-182 F1
SA-182 F11
SA-182 F12
SA-182 F22
SA-105
SA-36
17-7
Stainless Steels
SA-240 304
SA-240 304L
SA-240 316
SA-240 316L
SA-193 B8
Aluminum
SB-209
SB-234
Titanium
SA-106 B
SB-265 1
Nickel
SB-409
SB-424
Reinforcement
Select the type of reinforcement (if present) from the list. Selecting a reinforcement type
causes a popup window to appear for prompts concerning reinforcing pad or hub
dimensions.
In a finite element analysis attachments can have a reinforcement pad or hub type selfreinforcement. Results are available for the some critical locations such as the nozzle-shell
junction and the edge of the pad.
While in WRC 107 analysis (due to the limitations of the bulletin) only reinforcement pad
can be considered. When the reinforcing pad dimensions are included the program performs two analyses for this situation. The first analysis uses the nozzle OD and the vessel
wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness. The second run takes the pad into
account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad diameter and assuming a
solid attachment.
Parameter C11 (Full Length of Attachment)
Attachments other than nozzles can be analyzed using the WRC107 method. The dimension C11 is the FULL length of the attachment in the circumferential direction. Most often
these types of attachments are lifting lugs or vessel support lugs.
Parameter C22 (Full Length of Attachment)
The parameter C22 is the FULL length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction.
17-8
Pad Diameter
Enter the diameter of the reinforcing pad along the surface of the vessel. This information
will be used to calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad using a solid attachment model. Reinforcement pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. If external corrosion is to be considered, enter
the corroded pad thickness. In WRC 107, when a pad is used the combined vessel+pad
thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the nozzle. The corroded vessel
thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the pad. Reinforcement pad is
explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Enter Pad Parameter C11 (full length)
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the circumferential direction. The definition of C1 in wrc107 is the half length of the attachment in the circumferential direction. The change was done for user convenience.
Enter Pad Parameter C22 (full length)
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the longitudinal
direction. The definition of C1 in wrc107 is the half length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction. The change was done for user convenience.
Hub Thickness/Hub height/Bevel Height
17-9
If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall, it is abutting the vessel wall. If the
hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is
inserted.
Nozzle Outside Projection
Enter the projection of the nozzle from the vessel wall to the nozzle flange.
Nozzle Inside Projection
Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel, measured along the centerline of the nozzle.
Thickness of Nozzle Insert (if different)
Enter the thickness of the internally projected part of the nozzle, if it is different from the
nozzle thickness.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet between Nozzle and Shell / Pad
Select the fatigue curve based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME
Section VIII, Division 2, Appendix 5. Possible entries are.
S. No
Material
This is an optional entry. Enter the length of the shell attached to the head. Set this value
based on the proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and of the concern for any
discontinuity stress in this area.
Attached Shell Thickness
This is an optional entry. Enter the thickness of the shell attached to the head. Set this
value based on the proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and of the concern for
any discontinuity stress in this area.
If left blank this entry defaults to the thickness of the head.
17-10
The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Length of Straight Flange
Enter the length of straight flange portion for Conical or Torispherical heads.
Inside Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads
The crown radius for a torispherical head is referred to as the dimension L, per ASME
Section VIII Div. 1.
This dimension is usually referred to as "DR" in many head catalogues. Even though the
head catalogues list these heads as being "OD" heads, the crown radius is given on the
inside diameter basis. Note the illustrated picture in the catalogue and where the arrows
for "DR" and "IKR" point to ( the inside of the head).
For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the Code
Inside Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads
Enter the Knuckle radius of the small end. Direction of a conical head or shell is from the
large end to the small end. So, the large end of the cone is the bottom end and the small
end of the cone is the top end.
Knuckle Radius at Large End
Enter the Knuckle radius of the large end. Direction of a conical head or shell is from the
large end to the small end. So, the large end of the cone is the bottom end and the small
end of the cone is the top end.
Design Pressure (for input with WRC107 convention)
Enter the design pressure of the vessel in this field using the units above. The pressure
stress equation is of the following form:
Longitudinal Stress =
Hoop Stress
=
17-11
For the spherical case the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lame type
equation to compute the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the
edge of the attachment.
Radial Load
Enter the value for the load which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel.
Positive loads try to push the nozzle while negative loads try to pull the nozzle. The
program does not account for the effect of pressure thrust. However, if you input in global
coordinates (stress summation), the program will consider pressure thrust as default unless
you specify NOT to.
Circumferential Shear Load
Enter the circumferential shear load VC from B to A in the units above. If the vessel is
spherical then enter the shear load V2 from D to C. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Longitudinal Shear Load
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL from D to C in the units above. If the vessel is spherical then enter the shear load V1 from B to A. The sign convention should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Circumferential Moment
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Longitudinal Moment
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Torsional Moment
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Compute Maximum Radial Force
Compute Maximum Circumferential Moment
Compute Maximum Longitudinal Moment
Often times a vessel designer would like to determine the maximum force or moment on
an attachment while keeping the other 5 constant. By checking to one of these fields
PVElite will iterate and determine the maximum force or moment to produce a desired
stress intensity. If your geometry includes a reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform the
same type analysis at the edge of the reinforcing pad. The above loads produce the highest
17-12
local bending loads and will usually govern the design. This is why the shear loads and
torsional moment are not options.
Compare Maximum Stress Intensity to
This entry should be a stress value approximately 3 times the hot allowable stress for the
vessel material as taken from Section II Part D of the ASME Code. PVElite will use this
number to compare computed stress intensities if one of the Compute Maximum fields
was checked. Note that in the results PVElite performs the analysis using the input values.
After that has been completed, PVElite will then iterate for the maximum force or
moment as it has been instructed to.
Vessel/Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosines
Enter the vessel/nozzle centerline direction cosine. The direction of nozzle is positive
when pointing inwards into the vessel.
For finite element analysis these direction cosines are used to determine the angle between
the nozzle and the vessel. Also note that the direction for a conical vessel is from the big
end to small end.
For WRC 107 analysis, the centerlines of the vessel and nozzle are required to be perpendicular to each other. The direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle centerline must
NOT be collinear. If they are, as in the case of a nozzle in head, the vessel direction vector
shall be changed so that it is perpendicular to the nozzle centerline. A typical input for a
nozzle on the side of a vertical vessel would be:
The program uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments
from the CAESAR II static run (from each load case) into the somewhat confusing
WRC107 sign/load convention.
Note
The sign of the vessel centerline direction vector can be +ve or -ve follows
the location of data point (A->D) convention defined by WRC 107, e.g. for
a vertical vessel, if point A is at the bottom of the nozzle, then the Y direction cosine of the vessel will be -1.0. Remember points A and B are always
lie along the direction of the vessel. The nozzle direction vector is defined
as a vector pointing from the nozzle connection to the centerline of the vessel.Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc)
Enter the cold stress intensity allowable (Smc) of the vessel as defined per ASME Section
VIII, Division 2. They can be located in Table 2A of Section II, Part D of ASME Code.
These values are used only for WRC 107 analysis.
17-13
Enter the hot stress intensity allowable (Smh) of the vessel as defined per ASME Section
VIII, Division 2. They can be located in Table 2A of Section II, Part D of ASME Code.
These values are used only for WRC 107 analysis.
Override Angle Between Nozzle and Vessel ?
The program computes the angle between the vessel and the nozzle by taking the dot product between their direction cosines. Click here to override that computed value of angle.
This value is used only for FEA.
Nozzle Orientation Reference Vector
The nozzle orientation reference vector defines the reference axis from where the orientation of the nozzle can be measured by the nozzle orientation angle. For example, if nozzle
orientation reference axis is along x-axis and nozzle orientation angle is zero then the nozzle is located along the x-axis as seen in figure below.
This is the angle that describes the nozzle position around the circumference of the vessel
from the orientation reference vector. The reference orientation vector should be entered
above on this dialog.
For example, if nozzle orientation reference axis is along x-axis and nozzle orientation
angle is zero then the nozzle is located along the x-axis as seen in the previous figure.
17-14
Enter the offset distance from Shell/Head Centerline to the Nozzle Centerline.
Nozzle Distance from Top End of the Vessel
Enter the distance from the positive end of the vessel to the point where the nozzle or
branch centerline intersects the vessel centerline.
Global Forces/Moments (SUS, EXP, OCC)
Enter the value of nozzle forces or Moments from the restraint summary of the CAESAR
II output and/or other calculations. Three loading sets may be included in these calculations. For WRC 107, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen,
where
SUS
EXP
OCC
For FEA, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen, where
SUS
OPE
OCC
Enter the system design pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The pressure
thrust force P*A will be added to the value of the nozzle radial load UNLESS the user
deactivates and disables the following field. This value is used only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Include Pressure Thrust Force
Check this box if you wish to include the pressure thrust force as part of the radial load.
This value is used only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Internal Pressure (Pvar)
Enter the DIFFERENCE between the peak pressure of the system and the system design
pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The additional thrust load due to this
pressure difference will also be accounted for in the nozzle radial loading UNLESS a
response of N to Include Pressure Thrust was entered above.
This entry will be superimposed onto the system design pressure to evaluate the primary
membrane stress due to occasional loads. This value is used only if the user is performing
WRC 107 analysis.
17-15
There are 3 options available here. The first option is for the original August 1965 version
of this industry standard. The second option is for March 1979 and option 3 is for March
1979 use B1 and B2. In 1979 the Welding Research Council noted that if certain curves
were flipped, the computed stress results matched theoretical results more closely. In that
same year an adjustment was made to allow this stress computation method to compute a
maximum stress that did not lie on the stress points A, B, C or D. This is referred to as
computation of the off-angle maximums. Thus, we can infer the third option is probably
the most accurate.
Use Interactive Control
In many instances, the geometric parameter Beta which is computed for cylindrical shell
geometrys, exceeds the parameter Gamma for certain WRC107 curves. When this occurs
PVElite will pause and display a message Beta too Big or Beta too Small. If the
response to Use Interactive Control is No then PVElite will use the last point on the
curve that is available. If the response to Interactive Control is Yes PVElite will pause
and ask you to enter what you believe the value of the stress parameter should be. This
will involve having the WRC107 bulletin with all of the curves available.
Include WRC107 SIF (Kn,Kb)
Check this field to include the WRC107 Stress Concentrations (Kn & Kb). The program
will estimate and use the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the
WRC-107 Bulletin.
For normal analysis, do not check this field. And DO NOT include the next field Pressure
Stress Indices Per Div. 2.
Be very careful when using Y for this input and the next input. You may check ASME
VIII Div.2 AD-160 to see if you need to consider fatigue effect. Please note that the program currently DOES NOT perform the fatigue analysis per Div.2 Appendix 4 & 5 rules.
The program simply multiply the stresses by the factors and/or indices. The user can compare the fatigue effect. Therefore the stress summation results with these factors are
intended for your references ONLY. Please review the Users Guide for detail.
Fillet Radius Between Vessel & Nozzle (r)
Enter the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell. The program will use this
value to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the WRC107 Bulletin.
Entering 0 here will set Kn and KB = 1.0.
If you have a re-pad, the same Kn and Kb will be used for the vessel and pad intersection.
17-16
Check this field to include the stress indices described in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2, primarily to account for the fatigue analysis of the vessel nozzle under internal pressure. The
stress indices can be found in the Table AD-560.7 of the Code.
Compute WRC -386 Pressure Stress per WRC
Check this box to compute pressure, stresses in the shell and nozzle per WRC-386. WRC386 provides a method for calculating the stresses in cylinder to cylinder intersections
(such as cylinder to nozzle junction), due to the internal pressure and radial thrust loadings.
Note
Using WRC -368 along with WRC 107/297 is not accurate when calculating the
combined stress from pressure and external loads. So, WRC-368 is only active
when no external loads are specified and the attachment type is round.
For more information on WRC-368 pressure thrust please read "Modeling of Internal
Pressure and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368. You can access this information
in the July 2001 edition of the COADE Mechanical Engineering News (pgs. 9-13) or via
our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jul01.pdf.
Enter the file name that will form the prefix for FEA analysis files. Filename can up to 7
character log without quotes and spaces. For example, noz and b012.
Specify FEA Mesh Density
Select the type of mesh: Fine or Crude. When the user selects a fine mesh they will be
prompted to specify the mesh density multiplier. A higher mesh density value produces a
finer finite element mesh. Which produces more accurate results but takes more time to
solve. Typical values are between 1-2.
Crude mesh option along with the "Preview the Finite Element Mesh" option can be used
to check the initial mesh.
Specify S.C.F. for Vessel
This is an optional input. This is the Notch Effect Multiplication factor for computing the
peak stresses. They are defined in the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Appendix 4. A typical value is 1.35.
They will only affect the fatigue failure stress case.
Specify S.C.F. for Nozzle
This is an optional input. This is the Notch Effect Multiplication factor for computing the
peak stresses. They are defined in the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Appendix 4. A typical value is 1.35.
They will only affect the fatigue failure stress case.
17-17
Optional. Used only to select the allowable fatigue stress from S-N curves. It defaults to
7000 cycles if not specified or if 0.
Number of Occasional Cycles
Optional. If zero then the occasional load is treated like a static load. If nonzero then it
will be assumed that occasional load input is the "range" of occasional loads, and a fatigue
analysis of occasional loads will be performed.
FEA Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the vessel and the nozzle. When performing a finite element
analysis, internal pressure is positive and external pressure is -ve.
While, WRC 107 can only analyze internal pressure.
FEA Design Temperature
Enter the operating temperature for the vessel. This value is used to compute the hot
allowable stress for the vessel and the nozzle.
Do Not Cut Hole in Header for Branch?
Check this box if there is no opening in the vessel due to the nozzle. For example, in case
of a support trunnion there will not be an opening whereas an injector pipe will have one.
Consider Thermal Strains?
Check this box if Nozzle and Vessel are at different temperatures or there is a through the
wall temperature gradient. Most analysis of single nozzles in pressure vessels "do not"
require the analysis of thermal strains.
Vessel Inside Temperature, Vessel Outside Temperature, Nozzle Inside Temperature and Nozzle Outside Temperature
Enter the inside and outside surface temperatures for the nozzle and the vessel, used for
computing the thermal expansion.
Run Analysis in Silent Mode?
Check this box to preview the finite element mesh for this problem. Then on running the
analysis the finite element mesh will be shown.
17-18
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
WRC107 Stress Calculations
The program computes stress intensities in accordance with WRC107 and includes the
effects of longitudinal and hoop stresses due to internal pressure. If the geometry includes
a circular reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform two analyses on the geometry. The first
analysis will compute the stresses at the edge of the nozzle. The second stress analysis will
be at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
PVElite uses the Lam equation to determine the exact hoop stress at the upper and lower
surface of the cylinder around the edge of the attachment. The hoop stress equations, as
well as the longitudinal stress equation are as follows:
2
S Long
Pri
2
r0 ri
S Hoop (Upper) = 2 S
S Hoop (Lower)
Long
P ri r0
2
r0 ri
S Long
3
3
P r0 2ri
3 3
2 r0 ri
S Hoop
S Long
For each run performed a table of dimensionless stress factors for each loading will be displayed for review. Any table figure followed by an exclamation point (!) means that the
curve figure for that loading has been exceeded.
Why are the stresses at Edge of the Pad the same as at the Edge of the Nozzle?
Since the stress is a direct product of the stress factor, the stresses computed at the edge of
the pad may be same as those at the edge of the nozzle if the curve parameter for that type
of stress has been exceeded.
What are the Allowable Stresses ?
The stress intensities computed should typically be between 1.5 and 3.0 times the hot
allowable stress for the vessel material at operating temperature. If the results are less than
1.5 Sa then the configuration and loading are acceptable. If the load is self-relieving, that
is if it would relax or disappear after only a small rotation or translation of the attachment,
the allowable stress intensity would increase to 3.0 Sa.
Since many geometry do not fall within the acceptable range of what WRC107 will
accept, it may be necessary to use a more sophisticated tool to solve the problems where
17-19
Discussion of Results
the diameter of the vessel is very large in comparison with the nozzle or where the thickness of the vessel or nozzle is small. An example of a more sophisticated tool would be a
FEA (finite element analysis) program.
M TAXIS
V (or V )
1
A
V (or V )
2
V L
VC
Upper
B
C
Lower
M LAXIS
M CAXIS
M 1AXIS
(or M ) C
P AXIS
P AXIS
M 2AXIS
(or M ) L
M AXIS
1
A
B
M L AXIS
M2 AXIS
M CAXIS
SPHERICAL SHELLS
CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
17-20
Discussion of Results
17-21
17-22
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane
plus bending), respectively; and K, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot
material allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (Smh + Smc) /
2.
Due to the stress classification defined by Section VIII, Division 2 in the vicinity of nozzles, as given in the Table 4-120.1, the bending stress terms caused by any external load
moments or internal pressure in the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, should be
classified as Q, or the secondary stresses, regardless of whether they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This causes Pb to disappear, and leads to a much more detailed
classification:
17-23
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contain three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these
stresses, the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pmand Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute
the resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated
using a k value of 1.2.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section
VIII, Division 2 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is
not applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section
VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same analogy, the peak stress limit may also be
written as:
Pl + P b + Q + F < S a
The above equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is
met based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis
for cyclic operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed
in 4-135 has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials,
design, fabrication, testing and inspection of this division.
17-24
17-25
The equations used in PVElite to qualify the various stress components can be summarized as follows:
17-26
1.5(k)Smh
18,000
psi
1
Primary Membrane Load Case 2
Plot Reference:
1) Pl < 1.5(k)Smh (SUS,Membrane) Case 2
111%
2. Next report is the Highest Primary Stress Report that outlines the stresses at critical
location like the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad.
3. Highest Secondary and fatigue Stress Reports are provided.
4. Next, the program lists Nozzle Stress Intensification factors for use in a beam type
pipe stress analysis program such as CAESAR II.
5. The NozzlePro program computes the maximum individual allowable loads and
simultaneously acting allowable loads. Both Primary and Secondary loads are
reported. A typical report is listed here,
Allowable Loads
SECONDARY
Load Type (Range):
Axial Force
Inplane
Moment
Outplane Moment
Torsional Moment
Pressure
(lb.
(in.
(in.
(in.
(psi
Maximum
Conservative
Realistic
Individual
Simultaneous
Simultaneous
Occurring
Occurring
Occurring
)
398030.
120631.
180946.
lb.)
5306513.
1137199.
2412363.
lb.)
3358105.
719650.
1526608.
lb.)
2343568.
710264.
1065396.
)
344.
111.
111.
(lb.
(in.
(in.
(in.
(psi
Maximum
Conservative
Realistic
Individual
Simultaneous
Simultaneous
Occurring
Occurring
Occurring
)
618455.
178300.
267450.
lb.)
5998639.
1222872.
2594104.
lb.)
5458219.
1182725.
2508939.
lb.)
2938301.
847110.
1270665.
)
422.
111.
111.
PRIMARY
Load Type:
Axial Force
Inplane
Moment
Outplane Moment
Torsional Moment
Pressure
The conservative simultaneous loads will produce stresses that are approximately 60-to70% of the allowable. The Realistic Allowable Simultaneous loads are the maximum
loads that can be applied simultaneously, they produce stresses that are closer to 100% of
the allowable. The Maximum Individual Occurring Primary Pressure can be taken as a
finite element calculation of the MAWP for the nozzle.
17-27
6. Nozzle-Shell junction flexibilities are also available. These flexibilities can be used to
accurately model the flexibility of the junction and can be included in the pipe stress
program that is used to model the piping system attaching to the nozzle.
Thus, users will have a choice of performing either an WRC 107 or a finite element analysis from within the same module, without redundant input. As with any finite element
program users should visually check the finite element mesh for errors and make sure the
FEA results make sense for stress analysis perspective.
Technical queries regarding FEA results should be addressed to Paulin Research Group
(www.paulin.com).
17-28
Examples
Examples
The example problem listed below is a comparison problem in our QA series. It can be
found in the file CHECKS.
COADE Engineering Software
WRC 107 Examples including WRC107 Summations
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
FileName : WRC107
----------------------------------- Page 1
ITEM:
1,
1,
03:10pm,
05/18/98
VBASIS
OD
CYLSPH
Cylindrical
CAS
.0000
in.
Vessel Diameter
DV
120.000
in.
Vessel Thickness
TV
.625
in.
Attachment Type
TYPE
Round
HOLSOL
Solid
NBASIS
OD
CAN
.0000
in.
Nozzle Diameter
DN
12.750
in.
Nozzle Thickness
TN
.375
in.
DP
275.00
-31128.00
lb.
Circumferential Shear
VC
32.00
lb.
Longitudinal Shear
VL
1389.00
lb.
Circumferential Moment
MC
127.00
ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment
ML
4235.00
ft.lb.
Torsional Moment
MT
65.00
ft.lb.
Radial Load
INTACT No
VERSION March 1979 ( B1 & B2 )
No
No
psig
Gamma =
95.50
Beta
Figure
Value
-----------------------------------------------------N(PHI) / ( P/Rm )
.093
4C
M(PHI) / ( P )
.093
2C1
.093
3A
M(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm
14.994
.059
3.449
* Beta) )
.093
1A
.085
.093
3B
10.793
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm
.093
1B
.035
.093
3C
12.082
N(x)
/ ( P/Rm )
* Beta) )
17-29
Examples
M(x)
/ ( P )
.093
1C1
N(x)
/ ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) )
.093
4A
M(x)
/ ( MC/(Rm
* Beta) )
.093
2A
.045
N(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) )
.093
4B
3.511
M(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm
.093
2B
.051
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm )
.093
3C
12.082
M(PHI) / ( P )
.093
1C
.094
.093
1B1
.035
* Beta) )
.097
5.631
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm
* BETA) )
N(x)
/ ( P/Rm )
.093
4C
14.994
M(x)
/ ( P )
.093
2C
.060
M(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm
.093
2B1
.052
* BETA) )
Kb = 1.00
Stress Values at
(psi
--------------------------------------------------------------------Stress
Load|
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
--------------------------------------------------------------------Circ. Memb. DP |
25988
26263
25988
26263
25988
26263
25988
26263
Circ. Memb. P
12511
12511
12511
12511
10081
10081
10081
10081
Circ. Bend. P
28242 -28242
28242 -28242
44865 -44865
44865 -44865
Circ. Memb. MC |
-25
-25
25
25
Circ. Bend. MC |
-358
358
358
-358
Circ. Memb. ML |
-2635
-2635
2635
2635
Circ. Bend. ML |
-4938
4938
4938
-4938
59168
12835
74314
8229
80551
-8188
81317
-8854
|
Tot. Circ. Str.|
--------------------------------------------------------------------Long. Memb. DP |
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
Long. Memb. P
10081
10081
10081
10081
12511
12511
12511
12511
Long. Bend. P
46473 -46473
46473 -46473
28748 -28748
28748 -28748
Long. Memb. MC |
-41
-41
41
41
Long. Bend. MC |
-190
190
190
-190
Long. Memb. ML |
-857
-857
857
857
Long. Bend. ML |
-7325
7325
7325
-7325
77730 -29866
54022
-3094
54484
-3392
|
Tot. Long. Str.|
61366 -16930
--------------------------------------------------------------------Shear VC |
-2
-2
Shear VL |
-110
-110
110
110
Shear MT |
Tot. Shear|
4
6
4
6
4
2
4
2
-106
4
-106
114
114
--------------------------------------------------------------------Str. Int. |
61366
29765
77730
38095
80551
8190
81317
8856
17-30
Examples
The following example problem goes through a comprehensive local stress analysis of a
vessel/nozzle using WRC107 and ASME Section VIII, Division 2 criteria.
After confirming that the geometry guidelines per WRC 107 are met, the actual preparation of the WRC 107 calculation input can now begin. One of the most important steps in
the WRC 107 procedure is to identify the correlation between the stress output global
coordinates and the WRC 107 local axes. The PVElite program performs this conversion
automatically. The user will, however, have to identify the vectors defining the vessel as
well as the nozzle centerline. The following figure is provided to illustrate the definition of
the direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle.
17-31
Examples
Notice that in order to define a vessel direction vector, the user first needs to designate the
output data points (A->D) as defined by the WRC 107 Bulletin. Note that the line between
data points B and A defines the vessel centerline (except for nozzles on heads, where the
vessel centerline will have to be defined along a direction which is perpendicular to that of
the nozzle). Since, in the vessel/nozzle configuration shown, point A is assigned to the
bottom of the nozzle, the vessel direction vector can be written as (0.0, -1.0, 0.0), while the
nozzle direction vector is (1.0, 0.0, 0.0). The nozzle direction vector is always defined as
the vector pointing from the vessel nozzle connection to the centerline of vessel.
For different load cases (SUS, EXP, OCC), the restraint loads (forces and moments) can be
obtained from typical piping stress analysis program like CAESAR II. These loads reflect
the action of the piping on the vessel. The following is the example loads:
17-32
Examples
X (lb)
Y (lb)
MX
(ft.lb)
Z (lb)
MY
(ft.lb)
MZ
(ft.lb)
Sustained
-26
-1389
32
-65
127
4235
Expansion
8573
23715
-5866
31659
-5414
-52583
Moment
T(-X)
Moment
MC(+Y)
Moment
ML(+Z)
Force
P(+X)
Force
VL(-Y)
Force
VC(+Z)
Sustained
-26
1389
32
65
127
4235
Expansion
8573
-23715
-5866
-31659
-5414
-52583
The total sustained axial load on the nozzle may not be reflected in the restraint report. A
pressure thrust load will contribute an additional axial load to the nozzle. The pressure
thrust force always tends to push the nozzle away from the vessel. For example, with a
pressure of 275 psi over the inside area of the 12 inch pipe, the total P load becomes:
P
= -26 - P*A
= -26 - 275p (122) / 4
= -31,128
The P load may be adjusted automatically for the input by PVElites WRC 107 module, if
the user so requests.
FileName : WRC107
--------------------------------------- Page 1
2,
ITEM:
2,
03:10pm,
05/18/98
VBASIS
OD
CYLSPH
Cylindrical
CAS
.0000
in.
Vessel Diameter
DV
120.000
in.
Vessel Thickness
TV
.625
in.
Attachment Type
TYPE
Round
HOLSOL
Solid
NBASIS
OD
CAN
.0000
in.
Nozzle Diameter
DN
12.750
in.
Nozzle Thickness
TN
.375
in.
VX
.000
VY
-1.000
17-33
Examples
VZ
.000
NX
1.000
NY
.000
NZ
.000
Smc
20000.00
psi
Hot
Smh
20000.00
psi
S.I. Allowable
Fx
-26.00
lb.
Fy
-1389.00
lb.
Fz
32.00
lb.
Mx
-65.00
ft.lb.
My
127.00
ft.lb.
Mz
4235.00
ft.lb.
275.00
psig
Yes
Fx
8573.00
lb.
Fy
23715.00
lb.
Fz
-5866.00
lb.
Mx
31659.00
ft.lb.
My
-5414.00
ft.lb.
Mz
-52583.00
ft.lb.
INTACT
WRC107 Version
VERSION
No
March 1979 ( B1 & B2 )
No
No
-31127.77
lb.
Circumferential Shear
VC
32.00
lb.
Longitudinal Shear
VL
1389.00
lb.
Circumferential Moment
MC
127.00
ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment
ML
4235.00
ft.lb.
Torsional Moment
MT
65.00
ft.lb.
Gamma =
95.50
Beta
Figure
Value
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17-34
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm )
.093
4C
M(PHI) / ( P )
.093
2C1
.093
3A
M(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm
14.994
.059
3.449
* Beta) )
.093
1A
.085
.093
3B
10.793
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm
.093
1B
.035
12.082
* Beta) )
N(x)
/ ( P/Rm )
.093
3C
M(x)
/ ( P )
.093
1C1
N(x)
/ ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) )
.093
4A
5.631
M(x)
/ ( MC/(Rm
.093
2A
.045
* Beta) )
.097
Examples
N(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) )
.093
4B
3.511
M(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm
.093
2B
.051
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm )
.093
3C
12.082
M(PHI) / ( P )
.093
1C
.094
.093
1B1
.035
* Beta) )
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm
* BETA) )
N(x)
/ ( P/Rm )
.093
4C
14.994
M(x)
/ ( P )
.093
2C
.060
M(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm
.093
2B1
.052
* BETA) )
Kb = 1.00
Stress Values at
(psi
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Stress
Load|
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
------------------------------------------------------------------Circ. Memb. P
12510
Circ. Bend. P
28242 -28242
12510
12510
12510
10081
28242 -28242
10081
10081
44865 -44865
10081
44865 -44865
Circ. Memb. MC
-25
-25
25
25
Circ. Bend. MC
-358
358
358
-358
Circ. Memb. ML
-2635
-2635
2635
2635
Circ. Bend. ML
-4938
4938
4938
-4938
33179 -13429
48325 -18035
54563 -34451
55329 -35117
-----------------------------------------------------------------Long. Memb. P
10081
Long. Bend. P
46473 -46473
10081
10081
10081
12510
46473 -46473
12510
12510
28748 -28748
12510
28748 -28748
Long. Memb. MC
-41
-41
41
41
Long. Bend. MC
-190
190
190
-190
Long. Memb. ML
-857
-857
857
857
Long. Bend. ML
-7325
7325
7325
-7325
48372 -29924
64736 -42860
41027 -16089
41489 -16387
------------------------------------------------------------------Shear VC |
-2
-2
Shear VL |
-110
-110
110
110
Shear MT |
-106
-106
114
114
|
Tot. Shear|
-------------------------------------------------------------------Str. Int. |
48372
29924
64736
42860
54563
34451
55329
35117
---------------------------------------------------------------------
8573.00
lb.
Circumferential Shear
VC
-5866.00
lb.
Longitudinal Shear
VL
-23715.00
lb.
Circumferential Moment
MC
-5414.00
ft.lb.
Longitudinal Moment
ML
-52583.00
ft.lb.
17-35
Examples
Torsional Moment
MT
Gamma =
-31659.00
ft.lb.
95.50
Beta
Figure
Value
------------------------------------------------------N(PHI) / ( P/Rm )
.093
4C
M(PHI) / ( P )
.093
2C1
14.994
.093
3A
M(PHI) / ( MC/(Rm
.059
3.449
* Beta) )
.093
1A
.085
.093
3B
10.793
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm
.093
1B
.035
12.082
* Beta) )
N(x)
/ ( P/Rm )
.093
3C
M(x)
/ ( P )
.093
1C1
N(x)
/ ( MC/(Rm**2 * Beta) )
.093
4A
M(x)
/ ( MC/(Rm
* Beta) )
.093
2A
.045
N(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm**2 * Beta) )
.093
4B
3.511
M(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm
.093
2B
.051
N(PHI) / ( P/Rm )
.093
3C
12.082
M(PHI) / ( P )
.093
1C
.094
.093
1B1
.035
* Beta) )
.097
5.631
M(PHI) / ( ML/(Rm
* BETA) )
N(x)
/ ( P/Rm )
.093
4C
14.994
M(x)
/ ( P )
.093
2C
.060
M(x)
/ ( ML/(Rm
.093
2B1
.052
* BETA) )
Kb = 1.00
Stress Values at
(psi
-------------------------------------------------------------------Stress
Load|
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
-------------------------------------------------------------------Circ. Memb. P
-3445
-3445
-3445
Circ. Bend. P
-7778
7778
-7778
Circ. Memb. MC
Circ. Bend. MC
Circ. Memb. ML
32727
Circ. Bend. ML
-3445
-2776
-2776
7778 -12356
1076
82819 -24255-105265
32921
-2776
-2776
12356 -12356
12356
1076
-1076
-1076
15281
1225
-4625 -31489
23785
-------------------------------------------------------------------Long. Memb. P
Long. Bend. P
| -12799
Long. Memb. MC |
17-36
-2776
-2776
-2776
-2776
-3445
-3445
-3445
12799 -12799
12799
-7917
7917
-7917
-3445
7917
1758
1758
-1758
-1758
8120
-8120
-8120
8120
Long. Bend. MC |
Long. Memb. ML |
10647
Long. Bend. ML |
90951
Examples
|
Tot. Long. Str.|
86023 -70281-117173
90327
-1484
-1890 -21240
10834
-------------------------------------------------------------------Shear VC |
-468
-468
468
468
Shear VL |
1894
1894
-1894
-1894
Shear MT |
-2380
-2380
-2380
-2380
-2380
-2380
-2380
-2380
-2848
-2848
-1912
-1912
-486
-486
-4274
-4274
|
Tot. Shear|
-------------------------------------------------------------------Str. Int. |
87688
70456 117472
90390
2878
4708
33037
25068
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Stress Values at
(psi)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Location
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
-------------------------------------------------------------------Circ. Pm (SUS)
25988
26263
25988
26263
25988
26263
25988
26263
Circ. Pl (SUS)
9875
9875
15145
15145
10056
10056
10106
10106
Circ. Q
(SUS)
23304 -23304
33180 -33180
Circ. Q
(EXP)
82819 -24255-105265
32921
44507 -44507
1225
45223 -45223
-4625 -31489
23785
-------------------------------------------------------------------Long. Pm (SUS)
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
12994
Long. Pl (SUS)
9224
9224
10938
10938
12469
12469
12551
12551
Long. Q
(SUS)
39148 -39148
53798 -53798
Long. Q
(EXP)
86023 -70281-117173
90327
28558 -28558
-1484
28938 -28938
-1890 -21240
10834
-------------------------------------------------------------------Shear Pm (SUS)
Shear Pl (SUS)
-2
-2
-110
-110
110
110
Shear Q
(SUS)
Shear Q
(EXP)
-2848
-2848
-1912
-1912
-486
-486
-4274
-4274
-------------------------------------------------------------------Pm (SUS)
25988
26263
25988
26263
25988
26263
25988
26263
-------------------------------------------------------------------Pm+Pl (SUS)
35863
36138
41133
41408
36045
36320
36095
36370
87317
39852
60648
81787
12857
50812
16783
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------Type of
Stress Int.
Max. S.I.
S.I. Allowable
(psi
Result
--------------------------------------------------------------------Pm (SUS)
26263
20000
Failed
Pm+Pl (SUS)
41408
30000
Failed
Pm+Pl+Q (TOTAL)|
148608
60000
Failed
--------------------------------------------------------------------
17-37
Examples
17-38
&KDSWHU
The Leg & Lug Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Leg & Lug module of the PVElite program. To use the Leg &
Lug module the current analysis type should be Leg & Lug. The current analysis type
appears on the main menu of PVElite. The basic capabilities of the Leg & Lug module are
to analyze structural members (legs), support lugs and lifting lugs. The basic required
information for each of these analysis types is shown below.
Vessel dimensions
18-1
Discussion of Input
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
The design temperature for the attachment is used to compute the material properties for
attachment being analyzed. In most cases the actual attachment temperature will be different from the vessel design temperature. The controlling stress for support lug and vessel
leg calculations is the yield stress. The material yield stress can be looked up in the tables
in ASME Section II Part D.
The weight of the vessel should be the weight of the vessel while it is operating. This
should include operating fluid, trays, insulation etc. Support lug calculations should use
the same loading conditions. However since vessels are typically lifted dry the empty
weight of the vessel should be used when performing lifting lug calculations. There is a
separate field for lifting weight of the vessel.
Item Number
Enter the a positive integer value (i.e. 1) in this cell. This number will not be used in the
analysis but will be displayed on the screen while PVElite is executing.
Vessel Description
Enter a meaningful descriptor for this analysis. This will be displayed on the screen and in
the output reports. An example might be Cryogen - 1. A combination of letters and numbers up to 15 may be used.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure that the vessel will be operating at. This value will not be used
by the program, however, the pressure will be an input item for WRC 107. This is also a
good number to have for information purposes.
Design Temperature of Attachment
The temperature entered in this cell should correspond to the temperature of the attachment in question. It would be reasonable to assume that vessel legs are much cooler than
the actual metal temperature of the pressure vessel. The controlling stress for leg and support lug design is the yield stress of the material at the leg/lug temperature. If the attachment is not at ambient, enter the yield stress at that temperature. This value available in
ASME Section II Part D. Alternately, the cold yield stress may be multiplied by the ratio
of the hot allowable stress to the cold allowable stress. This should be acceptable in most
cases.
Outside Diameter of Vessel
Enter the outside diameter of the vessel to which the supports are attached. Any factors
such as external corrosion should be accounted for at this time. PVElite will assume the
vessel is one diameter from the top to the bottom of the vessel.
Shell Thickness
Enter the shell thickness. This input is used only in the case of a support lug with a full
reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to compute the Area and Moment of Inertia of the shell-ring junction.
18-2
Discussion of Input
Enter the shell corrosion allowance. This input, along with the shell thickness is used only
in the case of a support lug with a full reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to
compute the area and Moment of Inertia of the shell-ring junction.
Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel
Enter the vessel length from tangent to tangent. This value in combination with the next
input parameter, will be used to compute the height of the top of the tower above grade.
Knowing the elevation at the top, the wind pressure can be computed for the support lug
and leg calculations.
Shell Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Database. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected
material. If you cannot find the material you need in the Material Database, you can add
its specification and properties by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials.
Type of Analysis
Analysis Type
Description
Support Lug
If the vessel rests on support lugs select this option. The program prompts you to enter all information necessary to determine the stress in these types of supporting attachments.
Vessel Leg
If the vessel rests on vessel legs select this option. The program
prompts you to enter all information necessary to perform an
AISC Unity Check on the vessel legs. This option also allows
you to design the leg, baseplate and anchor bolts.
Lifting Lug
Trunnion
If the vessel is lifted by a trunnion select this option. The program prompts you to enter information pertaining to the trunnion
design.
Note: You can also perform a local stress analysis on the trunnion per WRC 107 methods.
Analyze Baseplate
Check this box for designing the baseplate and Anchor Bolts per Moss and Bednar.
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel
Enter the additional horizontal force exerted on the vessel due to external loads. An example of such would be the reaction imposed by the thermal expansion of a piping system.
For more information see Figure 18A - External Force Illustration.
18-3
Discussion of Input
A Vessel on Legs
A Vessel on Lugs
Enter the location of the external force above the base point. For more information see
Figure 18A - External Force Illustration.
Operating Weight of Vessel (total vertical load)
Enter the total weight of the vessel in this cell. This weight should include all operating
fluids, equipment loads, and other equipment attached to the vessel.
Height of Bottom Tangent Above Grade
Enter the distance from the ground to the bottom tangent of the vessel. If you are performing a leg analysis this distance should be equal to the length of the legs. This value will be
used along with the tangent to tangent length to determine the centroid where the wind
loads and seismic shear loads are applied. These horizontal shear forces cause bending
around the legs and support lugs. For more information see Figure 18A-External Force
Illustration.
Perform Lifting Lug Analysis
If a vessel is to be lifted by lug type attachments check this field. Prompts will appear asking for information pertaining to the lifting lugs.
Occasional Load Factor (AISC A5.2)
With many types of construction codes and occasional load factor can be used to increase
the allowable stress for an event that is considered occasional in nature. Such occasional
loads are Wind, Seismic, and the lifting of a vessel. The occasional load factor will be
multiplied by the other terms in the allowable stress equation to get the overall allowable.
If you do not wish to take credit for such an increase in the allowable, enter a 1 in this
field. The defaults is 1.33.
Apply Wind Loads to Vessel
If you wish to enter wind loads on your vessel check this field. You will then be prompted
for the necessary parameters to compute the wind pressure on the vessel.
18-4
Discussion of Input
If you wish to have a seismic analysis check this field. If you do so, the seismic zone or
seismic factor Cs will be needed.
18-5
Enter the force coefficient for the vessel here. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5
and 1.2. This can be seen as Table 12 in ANSI A58.1. For ASCE 7-95, refer to p32-33.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, platforms, insulation etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the
input diameter known.
Wind Pressure on Vessel
If your vessel specification calls for a constant wind pressure design, and you know what
that pressure is, enter it here. Most Wind Design codes have minimum wind pressure
requirements, so check those carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area
calculated by the program to get a shear load and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number here, PVElite will use this number regardless of the information in the following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the
degree of hazard to life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the
hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Values up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information
on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to
Table 6-2).
Basic Wind Speed
Enter the basic wind speed which the vessel will be subject to. Positive values will be
accepted. A minimum value of 70 miles per hour is recommended.
Wind Exposure
18-6
Exposure (A)
- Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of 70 ft.
Exposure (B)
- Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having
the size of single family dwellings.
Exposure (C)
Exposure (D)
If you choose to use ASCE 7-95 code, check this field. Then enter the following cells.
Type of Hill
Select the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
None
2-D Ridge
2-D Escarpment
Enter height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2
for detail.
Distance to Site (x)
Enter distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site. See ASCE 7-95.
Distance to Crest (Lh)
Enter distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for detail.
Natural Frequency for the Structure (Fn) Optional (Hz)
Enter the natural frequency for the structure. The program will use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6
category III if Fn < 1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0.
Damping Ratio (beta) optional
Enter the damping ratio for the structure if you like to use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6 category III
(if Fn < 1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0).
Seismic Zone
Enter the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in
ASCE #7. A value of 0 will slightly increase the reaction force. A zone entry of 4 will produce the highest loads.
User-Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS
When you enter a valid seismic zone and leave this field blank or 0, PVElite will look the
seismic zone factor up from an applicable table. This number is then used in conjunction
with the operating weight of the vessel to compute the forces which act on the supports. If
for any reason the table value of Cs is unacceptable, entry of a non-zero value will cause
this to be used in lieu of the table value. This might occur if the building code in your
project specifications is different from the one used by PVElite.
18-7
Enter the number of legs attached to the vessel. This number must be greater than or equal
to 3 and less than 16. PVElite will determine the effective number of legs for bending and
shear of the vessel.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the bottom leg support point to the attachment point on the vessel.
This length term is used in determining the legs resistance to bending. Long legs are more
likely to buckle than shorter legs. The distance of the tangent line of the vessel above
grade should always be equal to the length of the legs. If they are not the same PVElite
will use the maximum of the two when determining the wind pressure and the location of
the centroid.
Effective Leg End Condition Factor K (used in Kl/r)
Enter in the value of K used as the effective end condition. This value usually ranges from
0.2 to 2.10. For design of pressure vessel legs a value of 1.0 is commonly used. If your
design specs call out for a different value enter it here.
Material Specification for Legs
Enter the material that the legs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA516 70. To properly initialize the material, type its name on this line even if the default is
shown. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
18-8
The leg allowable stress is not used to check structural steel. The yield stress at the design
temperature is used.
Leg Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
The leg allowable stress is not used to check structural steel. The yield stress at the operating temperature is used.
AISC Member Designation
Enter the shape type of the leg on which the vessel is sitting. A complete list of shapes can
be found in the AISC structural steel handbook. All material shape information is current
with the latest AISC code standard. An example of a shape type may be W8X40 or
W36X300. A 2 by 1/4 inch angle section would have the designation L2X2X0.2500. This
reference must be exact.
If your design incorporates pipe legs, check the pipe-leg selection box and fill in the ID
and the OD of the pipe leg.
Orientation to the Vessel
Each I - beam and channel has a strong and weak orientation. This means that these sections are more easily bent around one as opposed to the other. If the member is attached
such that the tangent to the vessel is parallel to the beams strong axis select the strong
option, otherwise select the weak option. If the member is an angle and it is attached to
with one leg welded to the vessel or one flat welded to the vessel, select strong. If both
legs are welded to the vessel select diagonal.
Are the Legs Cross-Braced
If the legs are cross braced check this field. Cross bracing effectively stiffens the legs.
Thus they will experience a minimum of bending stress.
Are the Legs Pipe Legs
Enter the inside diameter of the pipe leg (as determined by which cell you are entering
data for) that is attached to the vessel. You must account for any corrosion allowance to
the Inner or Outer Diameter when entering this value. Please verify that the inside diameter
18-9
Leg Results
Leg Results
When a leg analysis is performed PVElite reads all of the data out of the structural database (AISC89.BIN). The resulting leg loads are compared to the allowable leg compression loads as outlined in AISC paragraph 1.5.1.3. Either the Kl/r > Cc or Kl/r < Cc formula
will be shown as appropriate. The combination of stresses due to bending and compression will be compared to the allowable per AISC 1.6.1. This is generally termed the AISC
unity check. If the result is greater than 1.0 the member has failed.
18-10
Select girder ring if the support lugs are reinforced with rings. If there are no stiffening
rings for the support lugs, select none.
Number of Support Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs on which the vessel is supported. This number must be
greater than 3 and less than 16. The program cannot calculate the lug stresses for 2 support
lugs because PVElite does not anticipate the bending reactions at the side lugs, which are
necessary for such a support system to work.
Location of Support Lugs Above Grade
Enter the height above grade to which the support lugs are attached to the vessel. This is
used to determine the reaction load on each support lug.
Distance from Vessel OD to Support Contact Point
Enter the distance from the outside wall of the vessel to where the support lug attaches/
rests on/to the supporting member. This distance should be as short as possible to minimize bending on the support lug and the vessel wall.
Material Specification for Support Lugs
Enter the material that the lugs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA516 70. To properly initialize the material, type its name on this line even if the default is
shown. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Radial Width of Bottom Support Lug Plate
The radial width of the support lug is how far from the vessel wall the plate extends. For
more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Lug Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
The lug allowable stress is not used as a failure comparison. The yield stress at the operating temperature is used.
18-11
The lug allowable stress is not used as a failure comparison. The yield stress at the operating temperature is used.
Circumferential Length of Bottom Support Lug Plate
Enter the distance measured along the vessel wall that the support lug plate extends.
Thickness of the Bottom Support Lug Plate
Enter the thickness of the plate on which the gussets rest. The bottom support plate is analyzed as a beam on simple supports where the support spacing is the distance between gussets. The allowable stress is 66% of the yield stress per the AISC steel construction
manual.
Distance Between Gussets
Enter the gusset spacing in this cell. PVElite assumes that support lugs have two gussets,
equally spaced about a bolt hole (support point).
Mean Width of Gusset Plate
Enter the average width of the gusset plate. The width is radially from the OD of the vessel. If the top and bottom of the gussets are different widths, add them up and divide the
result by 2. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Height of Gusset Plate
Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel that the gusset plate extends. This length
will be used in the AISC formulation to determine the stress in the gussets. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Thickness of Gusset Plate
Enter the thickness of the gusset plate. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry
for the Leg & Lug Module.
Radial Width of Top Bar Plate or Top Ring
The radial width of the top bar/ring is how far from the vessel wall the top plate/ring
extends. For more information see Figure 18B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug Module.
Note
Enter the thickness of the top bar plate/ring in the units above. If there is no top bar plate
or top ring, enter 0 here.
18-12
Enter the material that the lugs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA516 70. To properly initialize the material, type its name on this line even if the default is
shown. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Lug Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
The lug allowable stress is multiplied by 0.6 for comparison to the shear stress above the
hole in the lifting lug. It is also multiplied by the arc efficiency to get the allowable weld
shear for combined loads.
Lug Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
The lifting lug allowable stress at ambient temperature should appear in this cell. The
allowable stress at the lug operating temperature is used for the allowable stress comparison.
Lug Orientation to Vessel
Select "Perpendicular" if the lug extends radially away from the vessel wall. These lugs
are referred to as ear-type lugs. They are typically used on the tops of horizontal vessels. If
the lug extends in the same direction as the vessel axis, select "Flat." This is a flat orientation.
If you are working with a perpendicular lug and there will be no bending stresses in the
lug, you will need to set the offset dimensions (moment arms) to 0. The program will run,
but may give some warnings. This type of lifting lug would be one on the top of a horizontal vessel and the vessel would be lifted by a spreader bar equally distributing the weight
load directly over each lug. Thus there would be no bending.
18-13
The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described in the lug
orientation to vessel wall. For perpendicular lugs this is the total height of the lug.
Thickness of Lifting Lug
Enter the thickness of the plate that the lifting lug was constructed from.
Diameter of Hole in Lifting Lug
Most lifting lugs have a circular hole cut or drilled into them. Enter the diameter of this
hole.
Radius of Semi-Circular ARC of Lifting Lug
Enter the RADIUS of the semi-circular part of the lifting lug where the hole is located.
Typically this will be circular on flat lugs and semi-circular on perpendicular lugs.
Height of Lug from Center of Hole to Bottom
Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel from the center of the hole to the bottom of
the lug.
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole
Enter the distance from the center of the hole to base of the lifting lug. For perpendicular
lugs this will be to the vessel OD. If the orientation is flat, this will be one half the lug
thickness.
Minimum Thickness of Fillet Weld Around Lug
This minimum is usually the distance from the root to the surface of the fillet weld (root
dimension), and is not the fillet weld leg size.
Length of Weld Around Sides of Lug
Enter the length of the long welds on the side of the lifting lug. PVElite will multiply this
value by two when determining the weld area.
Length of Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug
Enter the length of the short weld. This is usually the bottom weld.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the lifting lug analysis. For more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For
more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
18-14
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more
information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
OFFSET OF LIFTING LUG
FLAT LIFTING
LUG
ARC
RADIUS
OFFSET
HOLE
DIAMETER
PERPENDICULAR
LUG
SIDE FILLET
WELD
BOTTOM
FILLET WELD
SUPPORT
LUG
LEGS
CROSS BRACING
LEG ORIENTATION:
WEAK
GUSSET
WIDTH
GUSSET
THICKNESS
STRONG
WIDTH
LENGTH
THICKNESS
18-15
Output
Output
PVElite produces three basic types of results in the Leg & Lug module. Results for Legs,
using the methods described by AISC, results for Lifting Lugs, using basic engineering
principles, and results for Support Lugs, using AISC methods and formulae from pressure
vessel text books and other engineering reference texts.
The input for this module include some basic vessel parameters such as the vessel tangenttangent length, the diameter and the height of the bottom tangent above grade. If you are
performing a Leg or Support Lug calculation, the program follows these basic steps in
order to determine the loads.
For evaluation of wind loads:
1. Determine the elevation of the top and bottom seam of the vessel.
2. Determine the wind pressure at both elevations, and take the average.
3. Determine the effective diameter of the vessel and its area.
4. Compute the centroid of the vessel.
5. Resolve the wind pressure and the area at the centroid.
For evaluation of seismic loads:
1. Determine the seismic zone factor from UBC table 23-I or use the one the user gave.
2. Multiply this value times the operating weight of the vessel.
3. Apply this load at the centroid of the vessel.
If both types of loadings are considered, PVElite will compute both and then choose the
maximum of the two.
18-16
Examples
Examples
The first example presented below involves the horizontal lifting of a vessel that weighs
about 73,000 pounds. The design specification stated that if one lug failed, the other lug
must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the vessel. In addition, the spreader bar
used to pick up the tower was a few inches short and caused a normal load to be generated
on the flat lifting lugs. The normal force is simply a function of the angle the chains make
with the lug and the load per lug.
Ideally this geometry should be analyzed a second time with the lifting weight of the vessel in the erection weight input field. Also the tangent force should be set equal to 0. This
would simulate picking the vessel up in its normal operating position or when it is being
installed in the field.
As you can see the arrangement worked well with the exception of the bending stress in
the lug. This is essentially cantilever bending. The remedy for this situation is to place a
gusset support between the top head and the flat lug. This would decrease the moment arm
and thus lower the bending stress.
The next example problem is for a lug supported vessel. This particular arrangement had
three support lugs. This vessel is supported in a structure containing piping and other
equipment. Bending stress are computed in the bottom support lug plate by two methods.
One is a uniform load (as if the lug were sitting on a beam) and the other is a point load.
Obviously, the point load on the plate will produce much higher bending stresses. When
you are looking at these bending stress results for the bottom plate only one will be applicable. The stress in the gusset plate and its allowable are also computed. The allowable
should be greater than the actual stress for the lug to work properly. The results for the
gusset plates are computed using rules of the AISC.
The final example here is a leg supported vessel. The main point of interest is the AISC
Unity Check. The unity check combines forces and moments on the leg and essentially
predicts buckling. This result must be less than or equal to 1.0. If your unity check is
small, then you should be able to decrease the size of the structural member until you have
a unity check that is satisfactory for your design work.
Input Echo, LEG&LUG Number 1,
.00
psig
TEMP
70.00
OD
55.0000
in.
.00
lb.
.00
lb.
FF
.00
lb.
FH
.00
ft.
to the Vessel
17045.00
lb.
72525.00
lb.
SA-516 70
YIELD
38000.00
psi
Flat
WLUG
20.0000
in.
TLUG
1.7500
in.
18-17
Examples
DLIF
2.7500
in.
RLIF
10.0000
in.
HLIF
37.0000
in.
OLIF
.8750
in.
.6187
in.
LWELD
18.0000
in.
BWELD
20.0000
in.
OCCFAC
1.33
Description:LIFTING LUG
1291.16
12.32
3192.54
10.62
in**4
in.
in**4
in.
18-18
Examples
Fr = 6742.53 lb./in.
Shear Stress in Lug above Hole vs. Allowable Base Metal Shear :
Shs = SQRT( W^2 + N^2 + T^2 ) / Sha
Shs = SQRT( 0^2 + 17045^2 + 72525^2 ) / 30.188
Shs = 2467.94 psi
18-19
Examples
2,
300.00
psig
TEMP
300.00
OD
96.0000
in.
TANTAN
30.0000
ft.
40.0000
ft.
83000.00
lb.
.00
lb.
Cf
1.000
1.110
100.000
Expcat
Force Coefficient
Additional Area
.00
Importance Factor
Wind Velocity
Exposure Catagory
Use ASCE 7-95 Wind Code
sq.in.
mile/hr
No
FF
.00
lb.
FH
.00
ft.
No
NLUG
LLUG
50.0000
ft.
8.0000
in.
4.0000
in.
WFB
SA-516 70
38000.00
psi
WPL
12.0000
in.
LPL
15.0000
in.
TPL
2.0000
in.
DGP
14.0000
in.
WGP
11.0000
in.
HGP
15.0000
in.
TGP
.7500
in.
OCCFAC
1.33
COMPUTED PARAMETERS:
Effective Wind Area of Vessel
AREA
47001.60
35.57
psf
55.00
ft.
WH
sq.in.
Description:LUG DESIGN
58046.
ft.lb.
27667.
lb.
3870.
lb.
18-20
Examples
Spl = ( Flug/2*Dgp/2)/((Wpl/6)*Tpl^2)
Spl = ( 35958/2* 14.000/2)/(( 12.00/6)* 2.0000^2)
Spl = 15732.03 psi
Bending Stress in bottom Support Plate (Unif. Load) Per Bednar p.156:
Spl2 = Beta1 * Flug/(Lpl*Wfb)) * Wfb^2 / Tpl^2 per Roark & Young 5th ed
Spl2 = 2.105 * ( 35958.9 / 60.000) * 4.000^2 / 2.000^2
Spl2 = 5046.24 psi
= Shear / Nlugs
3870.
lb.
Circumferential Shear
= Shear / Nlugs
3870.
lb.
Longitudinal Shear
= Load
35959.
lb.
Longitudinal Moment
= Moment/ Nlugs
23973.
ft.lb.
1935.
ft.lb.
/ Lug
18-21
Examples
3,
300.00
70.00
OD
60.0000
in.
TANTAN
20.0000
ft.
20.0000
ft.
psig
TEMP
240000.00
lb.
.00
lb.
Cf
1.000
1.050
120.000
Expcat
Force Coefficient
Additional Area
.00
Importance Factor
Wind Velocity
Exposure Catagory
Use ASCE 7-95 Wind Code
sq.in.
mile/hr
No
FF
.00
lb.
FH
.00
ft.
Number of Legs
NLEG
Length of Legs
LLEG
20.0000
1.00
ft.
SA-516 70
38000.00
psi
W8X40
ORIENT
Strong
XB
YES
OCCFAC
1.33
COMPUTED PARAMETERS:
Effective Wind Area of Vessel
AREA
20736.00
27.43
psf
30.00
ft.
WH
sq.in.
Description:LEG DESIGN
11.700
sq.in
3.530
in.
35.500
in.**3
39505.0
ft.lb.
30000.0
lb.
987.6
lb.
11173.7
lb.
Section Modulus
( strong axis )
N.A.
18-22
Examples
(KL/r < Cc ) :
Sa = ( 1-(kl/r)^2/(2*Cc^2))*Fy /
( 5/3+3*(Kl/r)/(8*Cc)-(Kl/r^3)/(8*Cc^3)
Sa = ( 1-( 117.65 )^2/(2 * 122.74^2 )) * 38000 /
( 5/3+3*( 117.65 )/(8* 122.74 )-( 117.65^3)/(8* 122.74^3)
Sa = 10721.60 psi
Sb = ( 0.6 * Fy * Occfac )
Sb = ( 0.6 * 38000 * 1.33 )
Sb = 30324.00 psi
= Shear / Nlegs
494.
lb.
Circumferential Shear
= Shear / Nlegs
494.
lb.
Longitudinal Shear
= Load
30000.
lb.
Longitudinal Moment
= Moment/ Nlegs
10313.
ft.lb.
339.
ft.lb.
/ Leg
18-23
Baseplate Input
Baseplate Input
The Baseplate Thickness calculation is included in the vessel leg analysis for I-beam, pipe,
and angle leg only, and can be activated by clicking the Annoyance Baseplate checkbox.
The design is based on the method for I-beam leg described in the Pressure Design Manual
by D. Moss and is applied to the other leg shapes. CodeCalc will assume the following for
all Baseplate Thickness calculations:
Bolts are installed along the length sides only (B dimension). For more information
see Figure 18C - Baseplate Dimension
The leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate. For more information see Figure
18C - Baseplate Dimension
It is advisable to check the baseplate dimensions using the graphic feature of CodeCalc.
Baseplate Length B
Enter the length "B" of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C - Baseplate
Dimension.
Baseplate Width D
Enter the width "D" of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C - Baseplate
Dimension.
Baseplate Thickness BTHK
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a
material is not a contained in the database its specification and properties can be entered
manually by selecting Tools, Edits/Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Bolt Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a
material is not a contained in the database its specification and properties can be entered
manually by selecting Tools, Edits/Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z"
Enter the "z" dimension of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C- Baseplate
Dimension.
Nominal Bolt Diameter
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters included in the program range from
0.5 to 4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field and also enter the root area of one bolt in the "Root Area" cell.
Bolt Corrosion Allowance
If there is any corrosion allowance for the bolts then enter it here. The nominal bolt size is
corrected for this allowance.
18-24
Baseplate Input
Thread Series
If your geometry uses bolts that are not the standard TEMA or UNC types you must enter
the root area of a single bolt in this field.
Total Number of Bolts per Baseplate
Enter the total number of bolts per baseplate. At least two bolts are needed for uplift stituations. The program assumes that the bolts are located along the length "B" of the baseplate as shown in Figure 18C - Baseplate Dimension.
Number of Bolts in Tension per Baseplate
Enter the total number of bolts in tension per baseplate. If there is an uplift the number of
bolts in tension per Baseplate should be at least 1. If there is no uplift the number of bolts
in tension per Baseplate is not required.
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete
Enter the Nominal Compressive Stress of the Concrete to which the basering/baseplate is
bolted. This value is fc in Jawad and Farr of FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
7.50
2000
6.75
2500
6.0
3000
5.00
3750
18-25
Baseplate Input
18-26
Baseplate Results
Baseplate Results
The Baseplate analysis produces the following result:
The thickness requirement is calculated using the 1.5 allowable plate bending stress
and compared to the input thickness.
The anchor bolt size is analyzed at the bending level (D. Moss) and the overall vessel
moment equilibrium (H. Bednar). In the absence of tension in the bolts you should
choose a practical bolt size.
18-27
Trunnion Input
Trunnion Input
A hollow or solid circular trunnion with or without pad reinforcement can be analyzed
using the Trunnion Design module. The main considerations regarding the trunnion design
are stresses at the vessel/trunnion junction and on the trunnion itself. Bending stress, shear
stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check are calculated and compared with the appropriate allowables. Local stresses at the junction can be analyzed using the WRC 107 Analysis
Selection checkbox. The lifting orientation, vertical and horizontal positions, and the
orthogonal input forces are needed for WRC 107 Analysis.
CodeCalc assumes that magnitude of the applied loads is acting on one trunnion. Typically vessels are lifted with two trunnions thus the load is divided between them. An
option is to analyze the trunnion with the maximum load acting on that trunnion during the
lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor specified by the user.
Before the analysis it is advisable to check the trunnion dimensions and the forces magnitude and direction using the graphic feature in CodeCalc.
The program does not subtract corrosion allowance (if any) and then enter the dimensions.
Trunnion Type (Hollow or Solid)
This input is required for performing shear and bending stress calculations and for WRC
107 Analysis.
Trunnion Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Thickness
Enter the thickness of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion
Geometry.
Projection Length
Enter the projection length of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Bail/Sling Width
Enter the bail or sling width used during erection. This input is required for locating the
the lifting load only. No analysis is performed on the bail or sling. For more information
see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Material
Enter the material the trunnion is made of. Depending on the size and the availability, the
trunnion can be made of pipe or sheet plate. To properly initialize the material, type its
name in this field even if the default displays. If am material is not contained in the database, its specifications and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Reinforcement
18-28
Trunnion Input
Ring Outside Diameter is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in
the calculations. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Ring Thickness
Ring Thickness is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in the calculations. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the trunnion analysis. This value will be used to perform WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For
more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more
information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Importance Factor
When the vessel is lifted from the ground it may be yanked abruptly. The Importance Factor takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0 although values as
high as 3.0 may be used. The program multiplies the Lifting Load by the Importance Factor.
Perform WRC 107 Analysis on Trunnion
Click this box to perform WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion/vessel junction.
18-29
Trunnion Input
18-30
Trunnion Result
Trunnion Result
The ring outer diameter and thickness are not used in the calculations; they are used to display a picture only.
There are four passing criteria used to calculate the trunnion design bending stress, shear
stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check. The following allowables are used:
WRC 107 Analysis- local stresses at 8 points are evaluated and compared with the
allowable (1.5 * S allow). For more information see the WRC 107 module.
18-31
Trunnion Result
18-32
&KDSWHU
The Pipe & Pad Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Pipe & Pad module in the PVElite program. To use this program make sure the current analysis type is Pipe & Pad. This can be determined by looking on the PVElite main menu. The Pipe & Pad module computes required wall thickness
and area of replacement for ANSI B31.3 intersections. These area of replacement rules are
based on the 1987 edition of ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
Code. Extruded outlet headers are also analyzed.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Intersection Number
Enter an intersection number for this analysis. These should be positive integer values and
incriminated by ones.
Intersection Description
Enter a 15 letter/number identifier for this intersection. This description will not be used in
the analysis, however, it will be used in the error checker and in the output reports. This
identifier should have some link to the actual intersection. An example might be Int
12x4.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the ANSI B31.3 intersection. This should be the pressure that
the system will operate at continuously. Most of the internal computations for areas, wall
thickness etc. involve the design pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the intersection. This temperature will be used to determine the allowable stress of the branch. The user may note that if a new temperature is
input the allowable stress information of the branch is updated automatically.
Branch\Header\Pad Material Specification
Enter the material specification in this cell. A list of materials can be found in the PVElite
Users Guide or it can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data-
19-1
Discussion of Input
base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu. An example of a valid material name is A106 B.
Valid piping materials available are
A-106 B
A-285 C
A-312 304
A-312 304L
A-312 316
A-312 316L
A-516 55
A-516 60
A-516 65
A-516 70
A-53 A
A-53 B
A-335 P1
A-335 P2
A-335 P5
A-335 P11
A-335 P22
A-537 CL1
Any material can be used as long as the hot and cold allowables are properly specified.
Allowable Stress, Operating
The allowable stress of the material specified at the design temperature above should
appear in this cell. This stress will appear automatically if a valid material is selected. If
the temperature is changed the material properties will be updated automatically.
Allowable Stress, Ambient
The allowable stress of the material at ambient temperature above should appear in this
cell. This stress will appear automatically if a valid material is selected.
Branch Dimension Basis
If actual was entered in the field immediately above, then enter the actual outside diameter
of the branch in this cell. If nominal was entered above, enter the nominal outside diameter
of the branch pipe. An example is 10. for a 10 inch pipe.
Actual Thickness of Branch/Header
If the user has specified a 1 in the branch/header dimension basis field, then the actual wall
thickness of the branch will be entered in this cell. PVElite will reduce the wall thickness
according to B31.3 if appropriate values are entered for mill tolerance or corrosion allowance.
Nominal Thickness of Branch/Header
Enter the schedule for the branch/header wall. Enter a value in this field only if you
selected Nominal for the branch diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a thickness
in the field above. Type in the schedule for the branch, i.e. SCH 40. Available schedules
are
SCH 10SCH 80 SCH STD
SCH 10SSCH 80SSCH-STG
SCH 20SCH 100SCH XX-STG
SCH 30SCH 120SCH 40
SCH 140SCH 40SSCH 160
SCH 60
19-2
Discussion of Input
The mill undertolerance accounts for manufacturing deficiencies when pipe is produced.
If for example a value of 12.5 is entered, then the wall thickness of the pipe will be multiplied by (100 - 12.5)/100 or .875. This is essentially a reduction in wall thickness. Valid
entries are between 0 and 99%.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the estimated allowance for corrosion in this field. The difference of (wall thickness
- (corrosion allowance + mill tolerance)) must be greater than 0.
Basic Quality Factor for Longitudinal Joints
The basic quality factor is used in the wall thickness calculations for pipes under internal
pressure only. These factors are listed in the ANSI B31.3 piping code Table A-1B. For
seamless and fully radiographed pipe this value is 1.0. For electric resistance welded and
spot welded materials it is usually 0.85.
Angle Between Branch and Header
Enter the angle between the centerline direction vector of the branch and the header. This
is typically 90 degrees. The piping codes do not allow hillside type attachments. This
angle is referred to as Beta and is shown in Figure 19A. This is the smaller angle between
axes.
Does the Branch Penetrate a Header Weld
If the branch pipe passes through a weld seam on the header pipe check this field. Refer to
ANSI B31.3 paragraph 304.3.3 under t = for more information.
Rate the Attached B16.5 Flange
If a flange is attached to the branch pipe and you wish to rate it check this field.
Header Dimension Basis
Enter the header dimension basis in this field. If the actual outside diameter is known
select actual. If the nominal schedule of the header is known select nominal.
Reinforcing Pad Present
If the intersection being analyzed has a reinforcing pad, check this field. If selected
PVElite will determine the area(s) available in the pad within the appropriate limits of
reinforcement. In addition, PVElite will also report the required pad diameter based on the
given pad thickness and the required pad thickness based on the given diameter.
Thickness of Extruded Outlet, TX
The dimension TX of an extruded outlet header is the corroded finished thickness which is
measured at a height equal to the radius of curvature above the outside surface of the
header.
Height of Extruded Outlet, HX
The dimension Hx of an extruded outlet header is the height of the extruded outlet. This
distance must be greater than or equal to the radius of curvature Rx, of the outlet.
19-3
Discussion of Input
Dx is the inside diameter of the extruded outlet which is measured at the level of the outside of the header. PVElite will automatically adjust the wall thickness of the outlet if the
mill tolerance and/or the corrosion allowance is specified.
Radius of Curvature, RX, of Extruded Outlet
Rx is the radius of curvature of the external contoured part of the extruded outlet, which is
measured in the plane containing the axes of both the header and the branch.
19-4
If you answered Y to rate the attached B16.5 flange then enter the class of the flange
attached to the nozzle neck. Available classes of flanges are: CL 150, CL 300, CL 400, CL
600, CL 900, CL 1500, CL 2500.
Grade of the Attached B16.5 Flange
If the flange attached to the nozzle neck is to be rated then the grade of the flange must be
entered here. The allowable grades of B16.5 flanges are
GR 1.1
GR 1.2
GR 1.4
GR 1.5
GR 1.7
GR 1.9
GR 1.10
GR 1.13
GR 1.14
Med C Steel
High C Steel
Low C Steel
C-1/2Mo
1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo
1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
2-1/4Cr-1Mo
5Cr-1/2Mo
9Cr-1Mo
GR 2.1
GR 2.2
GR 2.3
GR 2.4
GR 2.5
GR 2.6
GR 2.7
Type 304
Type 316
Type 304L,316L
Type 321
Type 347,348
Type 309
Type 310
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of reinforcing element in this cell. All allowances for corrosion should
be taken into consideration by the user.
Pad Diameter Along Header Surface
Enter the length of the reinforcing element along the longitudinal axis of the header.
19-5
Output
Output
PVElite will generate output for maximum allowable working new and cold as well as the
corroded condition. The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure at the design condition times 1.5 the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient
temperature to the allowable stress at the design temperature.
The replaced area can only be within a certain zone. No credit will be given for reinforcement that lies outside of the zone. Please note that these zones are different for extruded
outlets.
If a reinforcing element is used PVElite will compute the required diameter for the given
thickness and the required thickness for the given diameter. If a pad is used in conjunction
with an extruded outlet header consult the piping code for details on this design. If the calculated diameter falls outside the limit of reinforcement a message such as EXCEEDS
D2 or EXCEEDS L4 will be displayed.
19-6
Output
The MAWP for the given geometry is an estimate because of a slight non-linearity in the
required thickness calculation. To verify the MAWP plug the value back into the analysis
as the design pressure and check to see if the area required is equal to the area available.
19-7
Output
19-8
Output
19-9
Example Problem
Example Problem
Input Echo, Pipe&Pad Number
1,
Description: PIPE&PAD 1
Design Temperature
Header Material
psig
500.00
A-PI5L A
Sh
16000.00
psi
Shcold
16000.00
psi
Branch Material
A-PI5L A
300.00
Sb
16000.00
psi
Sbcold
16000.00
psi
Header
Branch
Nominal
Nominal
8.0000
4.0000
1.00
1.00
Mill Tolerance
12.5
12.5
Corrosion Allowance
.1000
.1000
SCH 40
SCH 40
%
in.
Degrees
No
90.0000
in.
Tr
of Reinforcing Pad
.3220
in.
6.0000
in.
A-PI5L A
Sp
16000.00
psi
Header
Branch
16000.00
16000.00
psi
16000.00
16000.00
psi
8.625
4.500
in.
.322
.237
in.
.400
.400
.080
.042
in.
.206
.162
in.
685.88
778.41
psig
1073.38
1531.11
psig
Hydrotest Pressure
1028.82
1167.62
psig
19-10
L4
.4544
in.
d1
4.2853
in.
Example Problem
d2
4.2853
in.
16000.
psi
A1
.3439
sq.in.
A2
.4349
sq.in.
A3
.0595
sq.in.
A4
.0551
sq.in.
A4
.4830
sq.in.
A4
.0519
sq.in.
1.0844
sq.in.
606.01
psig
tmh = ( th + c ) / Hmtr
tmh = ( .0803 + .1000 ) / .8750
tmh = .206 in. Reqd. thickness + CA + mill tolerance
tb = ( P * Db )/2 ( Sb * QF + P * Y )
tb = ( 300 * 4.5000 )/2 ( 16000 * 1.00 + 300 * .40 )
tb = .042 in. Required thickness of branch
tmb = ( tb + c ) / Bmtr
tmb = ( .0419 + .1000 ) / .8750
tmb = .162 in. Reqd. thickness + CA + mill tolerance
Hpo = (Th*Hmtr-c)*2*Sh*He/(Dh-2*(Th*Hmtr-c)*Yh)
Hpo = ( .3220 * .875 - .100 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000 /
( 8.625 - 2 * ( .322 * .875 - .100 ) * .40 )
Hpo = 685.881 psig M.A.W.P., operation, header
Hpnc = (Th*Hmtr)*2*Shcold*He/(Dh-2*(Th*Hmtr)*HY)
Hpnc = ( .3220 * .875 ) * 2 * 16000 /
( 8.625 - 2 * ( .322 * .875 ) * .40 )
Hpnc = 1073.385 psig M.A.W.P., New & Cold, header
Bpo = (Tb*Bmtr-c)*2*Sb*Be/(Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr-c)*By)
Bpo = ( .2370 * .875 - .100 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000 /
( 4.500 - 2 * ( .237 * .875 - .100 ) * .40 )
Bpo = 778.415 psig M.A.W.P., operation, branch
19-11
Example Problem
Bpnc = (Tb*Bmtr)*2*Sbcold*Be/(Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr)*BY)
Bpnc = ( .2370 * .875 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000/
( 4.500 - 2 * ( .237 * .875 ) * .40 )
Bpnc = 1531.114 psig M.A.W.P., New & Cold, branch
d1 = ( Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr-c))/SIN( )
d1 = ( 4.50 - 2 * ( .2370 * .88 - .1000 ))/SIN( 90.0 )
d1 = 4.285 in. Effective Length removed from pipe
A1 = ( th * d1 * ( 2 - Sin( ) )
A1 = ( .080 * 4.285 * ( 2 - Sin( 90.0 ) )
A1 = .344 sq.in. Area required to be replaced
A3 = ( 2*L4*(Tb*Bmtr-tb-c)/Sin()
A3 = ( 2 * .454 * ( .237 * .8750 - .042 - .100 )/Sin( 90.0 )
A3 = .060 sq.in. Area available in branch
A5 = 2*Min(Dpad/2,d2)-(Db/2)/Sin())*Min(Tpad,L4)*Padf)
A5 = 2*Min( 6.00/2, 4.285 ) - ( 4.500/2) / Sin( 90.0 )) * .322 * 1.00
A5 = .483 sq.in. Area available in reinforcing pad
A6 = If(A5>0&&Dpad+2*Bw<d2*2,(.5*Min(Tpad,L4)/0.707)^2,0)
A6 = ( 0.5 * .3220 / 0.707 ) ^ 2 )
A6 = .052 sq.in. Area available in pad weld
19-12
&KDSWHU
The Base Ring Module
Introduction
The PVElite base ring module performs thickness calculations and design for annular
plate base rings, top rings, bolting, and gussets. These calculations are performed using
industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
Calculation Techniques
Thickness of a Base Ring Under Compression
The equation for the thickness of the base ring is the equation for a simple cantilever
beam. The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load
caused by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and
bending moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for
the cantilever thickness is found in most of the common vessel design textbooks, including Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, page 434, formula 12.12:
t
SQRT( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
Where
fc =
allowable bending stress of base ring (typically 1.5 times Code allowable).
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the concrete. The approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete
assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area
of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr equation 12.1, equal to
fc =
Where
W =
M =
A =
c =
I =
-W / A - M * c / I
Weight of vessel (worst case).
Bending moment on vessel (worst case).
Cross sectional area of base ring on foundation
Distance from the center of the base ring to the edge
Moment of inertia of the base ring on the foundation
20-1
Calculation Techniques
However, when a steel skirt and base ring are supported on a concrete foundation, the
behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net
bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced
by the force downward on the concrete. But because these two materials have different
elastic moduli, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the
strain in the base ring at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the combined bolt/
concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors,
including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed
this phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical
Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This formulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabulated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method:
In this case a neutral axis parallel to the y axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is
identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and
the angle alpha.
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a
thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base
plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution
which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area
of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to
replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle
diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting
around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the
neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Youngs moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally
varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (nonadhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base
plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results:
p
s
alpha
=
=
=
(2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
(2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
acos [(s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
Where
width of base ring (similar to l in Jawad & Farrs equations above)
bolt circle diameter
four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh & Soler
equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely
p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below
converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so
and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed].
Then alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless
parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values
of p and s (say po and so). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
20-2
t3
c
r1-r4
=
=
=
s1 =
p1 =
.5 * (so + so)
.5 * (po + po)
Calculation Techniques
This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within specified tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value),
Where
ei = (si - si) / si
Ei = (pi - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the
starting values of so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
base ring is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate
method.
Thickness of Base Ring Under Tension
On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are gussets, there is disagreement on
how to do the analysis. For example, Megyesy uses a Table F to calculate an equivalent
bending moment, Dennis R. Moss uses the same approach but gives the table (page 126129), and Jawad & Farr use a yield-line theory (page 435-436). Since Jawad & Farr is
both accepted and explicit, the program uses their equation 12.13:
t =
Where
x =
y =
z =
F =
a =
b =
l =
d =
If there is a top ring or plate, its thickness is calculated using a simple beam formula. Taking the plate to be a beam supported between two gussets with a point load in the middle
equal to the maximum bolt load, we derive the following equation:
t = SQRT(6 * M / s)
Where
M = 2 * Ft * Cg / 8.0, bending moment from Megyesy, beam formulas, case 11, fixed
beam.
Ft = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
s = Allowable stress, 1.5 * plate allowable
Z = Section Modulus, from Megyesy, Properties of Sections
Z = Wt * t2 / 6.0
Wt = (Do/2.- Ds/2.- db) = Width of Section
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension
If there are gussets, they must be analyzed for both tension and compression. The stress
formula in tension is just the force over the area, where the force is taken to be the allow-
20-3
Calculation Techniques
able bolt stress times the bolt area, and the area of the gusset is the thickness of the gusset
times one half the width of the gusset (because gussets normally taper).
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression
In compression (as a column) we must iteratively calculate the required thickness. Taking
the actual thickness as the starting point, we perform the calculation in AISC 1.5.1.3. The
radius of gyration for the gusset is taken as 0.289 t per Megyesy, Fifth edition, page 404.
The actual compression is calculated as described above, then compared to the allowed
compression per AISC. The thickness is then modified and another calculation performed
until the actual and allowed compressions are within one half of one percent of one
another.
Base Ring Design
When the user requests a base ring design, the program performs the following additional
calculations to determine the design geometry.
Selection of Number of Bolts
This selection is made on the basis of Megyesys table in Pressure Vessel Handbook
(Table C, page 67 in the fifth edition). Above the diameter shown, the selection is made to
keep the anchor bolt spacing at about 24 inches.
Calculation of Load per Bolt
-W / N + 2 * M / (N * R)
Weight of vessel
Number of bolts
Radius of bolt circle
Bending moment
This is just the load per bolt divided by the allowable stress.
Selection of the Bolt Size
The program has a table of bolt areas, and selects smallest bolt with area greater than the
area calculated above.
Selection of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry
The table of bolt areas also contains the required clearances in order to successfully
tighten the selected bolt (wrench clearances and edge clearances). The program selects a
preliminary base ring geometry based on these clearances. Values selected at this point are
the bolt circle, base ring outside diameter, and base ring inside diameter.
Analysis of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry
Using the methods described above for the analysis section, the program determines the
approximate compressive stress in the concrete for the preliminary geometry.
20-4
Calculation Techniques
If the compressive stress calculated above is acceptable, then the preliminary geometry
becomes the final geometry. If not, then the bolt circle and base ring diameters are scaled
up to the point where the compressive stress will be acceptable. These become the final
base ring geometry values.
Analysis of Base Ring Thicknesses
The analysis then continues through the thickness calculation described above, determining required thicknesses for the base ring, top ring, and gussets.
Basic Skirt Thickness
The required thickness of the skirt under tension and compression loads is determined
using the same formula used for the compressive stress in the concrete, except using the
thickness of the skirt rather than the width of the base ring:
s = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
W = Weight of vessel (worst case).
M = Bending moment on vessel (worst case).
A = Cross sectional area of skirt.
c = Distance from the center of the base ring to the skirt (radius of skirt).
I = Moment of inertia of the skirt cross section.
In tension this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required
thickness can be calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the
allowable stress must be calculated from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where
the geometry factor is calculated from the skirt thickness and radius, and the materials factor is found in the Code external pressure charts. As with all external pressure chart calculations, this is an iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress is calculated,
the allowable stress is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allowable stress approaches the actual stress.
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring
If there are gussets or gussets and a top ring included in the base plate geometry, there is
an additional load in the skirt. Jawad & Farr have analyzed this load and determined that
the stress in the skirt due to the bolt load on the base plate is calculated as follows:
s = (1.5 * F * b) / (PI * h * t ** 2)
Where
F = Total load in one bolt = load on one gusset
b = Width of the gusset at the base
t = thickness of the skirt
h = height of the gusset.
Jawad & Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight
and bending moment, and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They
thus categorize this stress as secondary bending. The program performs the calculation of
this stress, and then repeats the iterative procedure described above to determine the
required thickness of the skirt at the top of the base ring.
20-5
Discussion of Input
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Base Ring Number
The base ring number should start out at 1 and increment by 1 for each successive base
ring analyzed. A blank entry for the base ring number will cause PVElite not to analyze
the data for that base ring.
Base Ring Description
Enter an optional alpha-numeric description for the base ring to be analyzed. This may be
a project number that will help keep track of the base ring.
Analyze or Design Base Ring
The Base Ring program in PVElite can either analyze existing base rings or design new
ones. Two valid entries are
AnalyzeExisting Base rings
DesignNew Base rings
When in design mode, PVElite may change the following items:
Number of Bolts
Size of Bolts
Normally base rings operate at temperatures which are near ambient. If the base ring is at
a higher temperature, enter it here, otherwise leave the default temperature.
Thickness of Base Ring
Enter the actual thickness of base ring. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance etc.
should be subtracted from this entered thickness. PVElite will compute the required base
ring thickness using the simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user
entered thickness value will be used only for comparison.
Base Ring\Skirt\Bolt Material Specification
Enter the base ring material. Plate materials such as SA-516 70 and SA-36 are commonly
used. The material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If your material is not present, enter the
allowable stresses at the base ring design metal temperature.
Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
If your base ring material is not in the database, enter the hot allowable stress here.
20-6
Discussion of Input
Enter the inside diameter of the base ring. This entry must be greater than 0 and less than
the bolt circle diameter and the base ring OD. If the you have specified the program to
design the base ring, PVElite may change this value. A good approximation for the base
ring ID should be entered when using either the analyze or design option.
Outside Diameter of Base Ring
Enter the outside diameter of the base ring. This entry must be greater than the base ring
ID and the bolt circle diameter. When in design mode, PVElite may change this value.
Nominal Bolt Diameter
The nominal bolt diameters accepted by PVElite range between 1/2 and 4 inches (1.27
and 10.16) centimeters. Values outside of this range will not be accepted. When in design
mode PVElite may change the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters are
Bolt Size(inches)
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 3/8
1 1/2
1 5/8
1 3/4
1 7/8
2
2 1/4
2 1/2
2 3/4
3
3 1/4
3 1/2
3 3/4
4
0.126
0.202
0.302
0.419
0.551
0.728
0.929
1.155
1.405
1.680
1.980
2.304
2.652
3.423
4.292
5.259
6.324
7.487
8.749
10.108
11.566
This information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, (c) 1984, p 425.
20-7
Discussion of Input
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the base ring design calls for. If the BASE RINGS program is in design
mode, it may change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the
maximum load per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 120.
Diameter at Bolt Circle
Enter the diameter of the bolt circle. This value must be greater than the base ring Id and
less than the base ring OD. When in design mode, PVElite may change the bolt circle
diameter. Whenever this happens, it will be reported in the output. The word DESIGN will
appear followed by the value and description of the input the program has changed.
Bolt Table (TEMA, UNC, USER)
Enter the thread series identifier. If the option is picked you will be prompted to enter the
root area of a single bolt. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering
handbook.
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete
Enter the Nominal Compressive stress of the Concrete to which the base ring is bolted.
This value is fc in Jawad and Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Are Gussets to be Used?
If your base ring design includes the use of gusset plates, check this field, otherwise continue.
Thickness of Top Ring Plate (if any)
If your base ring design incorporates a top ring, enter its thickness here. If a thickness
greater than 0.0 is entered, PVElite will compute the required thickness of the top plate. If
no top ring thickness is entered, PVElite will not perform top ring thickness calculations.
Radial Width of Top Ring/Plate (if any)
Enter the radial width of the top ring or plate, if any. This is simply the half of (top ring
OD - top ring ID). This value must be entered if you entered last field, and must be positive.
Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss ( Type 3-Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring )
Enter the type of top Ring or Plate per Moss (Type 3 = Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring).
Refer to Dennis Moss Pressure Vessel Design Manual p129. If type 3 or 4 is entered, the
program will calculate per p130.
External Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance that would be applied to the skirt, base plate, gussets and
top ring. The external corrosion allowance will simply be added to the required thickness
of these components.
20-8
Discussion of Input
Skirt Thickness
Enter the thickness of the skirt here. This entry must be greater than 0. PVElite will automatically compute the required skirt thickness for both combinations of bending and axial
stress. PVElite uses the ASME code compression allowable B for axial stresses.
Skirt Temperature
If the skirt is at an elevated temperature, enter it here. Normally, skirts are at ambient temperature.
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base
Enter the skirt Od at the junction of the skirt and base ring. This value should be greater
than the base ring ID and less than the base ring bolt circle.
Joint Efficiency for Skirt Weld at Bottom Head
Enter the joint efficiency for the weld that joins the skirt to the bottom head. This value
depends on the weld detail used. Typical values range between 0.49 and 1.0.
Skirt Diameter at Bottom Head
Enter the diameter of the skirt at the bottom head of the vessel. Not all skirts are cylindrical. Some skirts are cone shaped and as such have different diameters at the top and bottom.
Dead Weight of Vessel
Enter the weight of the vessel with all peripheral equipment (ladders, cages, catwalks,
packing) etc. The working fluid of the vessel should not be included here. This entry is
optional and can be 0.
Operating Weight of Vessel
Enter the operating weight of the vessel here. This includes all contents and associated
hardware. This value must be greater than 0.
Test Weight of Vessel
Enter the test weight of the vessel here. This weight will include the fluid used for the
hydrotest of the vessel. This entry is optional and can be 0.
Operating Moment of Base Ring
Enter the total moment exerted on the skirt by the wind, reboilers, attached piping etc.
when the vessel is operating. This value must be greater than 0.
Test Moment on Base Ring
Enter the test moment on the base ring. The entry for the test moment is optional and can
be 0.
Are Stress Multipliers to be Used?
If you wish to increase the allowable stress the program uses for the skirt design, check
this field.
20-9
If your base ring design calls out for special bolts, enter the root area of a single bolt in this
filed. Note, however, this option is mutually exclusive from the design option. If this condition is detected, the numbers from Table 2 (UNC) will be used.
Thickness of Gusset Plates
Enter the thickness of the gusset plates to be used for this base ring. Any allowances for
corrosion should be considered when making this entry.
Temperature for Gussets (if not ambient)
Enter the temperature for the gusset plates. Normally, the gussets will operate at ambient
temperature. If the temperature is above ambient, enter it here.
Height of Gussets
Enter the gusset dimension from the base ring to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in
the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
Distance from Bolts to Gussets
Enter the distance from a bolt to the nearest gusset. Normally, each bolt will have two gussets. This distance would be 1/2 of the spacing between the gusset plates.
Average Width of Gusset Plates
Enter the number of gussets per bolt. Usually, each bolt will have 2 gusset plates associated with it. For base rings that have a large number of bolts, this may not always be the
case. In these occasions, each bolt may have a single gusset plate associated with it.
Elastic Modules for Plates
The elastic modulus is used to determine the allowable stress for plates in compression
according to AISC. This is a required value. For most common steels, this value is 29E6
psi.
Factor for the Skirt Allowable at the Skirt Top
This factor is multiplied by the skirt operating allowable wherever it is used. For example:
The skirt allowable stress at the top would be = stress multiplier X joint efficient X skirt
operating allowable. If you do not wish to use this value, enter a 1.00 for this value. This
multiplier is usually between 1 and 2.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (OPE)
This factor will be multiplied by the Code compression allowable B for the operating case.
PVElite will look at the minimum of this factor times its allowable and the skirt yield
stress times its allowable multiplier. This minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the skirt.
20-10
This factor will be multiplied by the Code compression allowable B for the test case.
PVElite will look at the minimum of this factor times its allowable times 1.5 and the skirt
yield stress times its allowable multiplier. This minimum value will then be used, as a
comparison to the actual compressive stress in the skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (OPE)
PVElite will multiply the skirt yield stress by this factor. The minimum of this result and
the basic hot allowable stress times its factor will be the skirt operating allowable stress.
This minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in
the skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (TEST)
PVElite will multiply the skirt yield stress by this factor. The minimum of this result and
the basic hot allowable stress times its factor will be the skirt test allowable stress. This
20-11
minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the
skirt.
TOPWTH
TTA
HG
DS
DI
DC
DO
TBA
BND
CG
TGA
20-12
Example Problem
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS
------------------------------------- Page
1,
ITEM:
1,
04:10pm,
05/18/98
AORD
RNGTMP
300.00
TBA
2.0000
in.
Basering Material
SA-516 70
BASOPE
17500.00
psi
Basering Ambient
BASAMB
17500.00
psi
Diameter of Basering
DI
47.0000
in.
DO
66.2500
in.
2.0000
in.
Inside
Allowable Stress
BND
Bolt Material
SA-193 B7
Allowable Stress
Number of Bolts
Diameter of Bolt Circle
SA
25000.00
psi
SABAMB
25000.00
psi
NGIV
12
DC
59.5000
in.
FPC
3000.0
psi
in.
TGA
.7500
GUSTMP
100.0000
AVGWDT
5.0000
F
in.
SA-516 70
E
29000000.0
psi
SY
38000.00
psi
Height of Gussets
HG
12.0000
in.
CG
4.0000
in.
NG
Skirt Thickness
Skirt Temperature
TTA
2.0000
in.
TOPWTH
6.1250
in.
TOPTYPE
CA
.0000
in.
TS
.5000
in.
SKTTEM
100.0000
Skirt Material
SA-516 70
SKTOPE
17500.00
psi
Skirt Ambient
SKTAMB
17500.00
psi
DS
54.0000
in.
SKTHED
54.0000
in.
ARCJNT
.4900
Allowable Stress
DW
36000.0
lb.
ROW
36000.0
lb.
TW
36000.0
lb.
20-13
Example Problem
ROM
692100.0
ft.lb.
TM
692100.0
ft.lb.
SAM
1.0000
1.0000
BXHYD
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
SYXHYD
1.7411
sq.in.
2.6520
sq.in.
31.8240
sq.in.
16413.17
1712.22
21315.69
psi
sq.in.
in.^3
478.85
psi
12548.70
psi
RM = (FT*2.0*CG)/8.0,
Bending Moment
SB = (1.5*BASOPE),
WT = (TOPWTH
T = SQRT( 6 * RM / ( SB * WT )) + CA
T = SQRT( 6 * 66300 / ( 26250 * 4.1250 )) + .0000
T = 1.9167 in.
20-14
Example Problem
= ( Dc-Ds )/2
= Sa * Abss
= Avgwdt
g1 = Gamma 1
g2 = Gamma 2
Allowable Stress
Mo = P/(4)[1.3(ln((2lsin(a/l)/(g)))+1]-g1*P/(4)
Tc = ( 6 * Mo / Fb )^1/2 + CA
Required Thickness
.3789
in.
.7500
in.
110.7266
122.7360
11779.41
psi
8840.00
psi
.6725
in.
123.4821
122.7360
9793.61
psi
9858.35
psi
1.9372
in.
1.4328
in.
2.0000
in.
1.9167
in.
1.4678
in.
2.0000
in.
.6725
in.
.7500
in.
Operating
Dead Load
27.0000
27.0000
.5000
.5000
692100
692100
Test Load
27.0000 in.
.5000 in.
692100 ft.lb.
36000
36000
6828
6828
6828 psi
8575
8575
12862 psi
36000 lb.
20-15
Example Problem
.3982
.3982
.2654 in.
.5000
.5000
.5000 in.
Operating
Dead Load
27.0000
27.0000
Test Load
.5000
.5000
692100
692100
36000
36000
7677
7677
7677 psi
15506
15506
23260 psi
27.0000 in.
.5000 in.
692100 ft.lb.
36000 lb.
.2835
.2835
.2092 in.
.5000
.5000
.5000 in.
Operating
Dead Load
Test Load
.3982
.3982
.2654 in.
.2835
.2835
.2092 in.
.5000
.5000
.5000 in.
20-16
&KDSWHU
The Thin Joint Module
Introduction
The Thin Joint Module calculates the stresses in a metal bellows expansion joint of the
type typically used in piping systems and heat exchangers. The module does elastic stress
analysis for stresses due to internal pressure and closing or opening of the joint. The maximum combined stress is used to calculate the cycle life of the joint, which is based on the
appropriate formula in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26, 2001, A2001.
21-1
Enter the thin walled expansion joint number. This should typically start out at 1 and
increase by one for each expansion joint in the file.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description of the expansion joint in this field. This should relate in
some way to the expansion joint i.e. (a project id).
Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles
Enter the number of cycles that the expansion joint is to be designed for. This value is to
be compared to the total number of cycles that this design will be capable of handling.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the expansion joint. During normal operation, expansion
joints typically run cooler than the piping/pressure vessel. Determine that temperature and
enter it here.
Design Internal Pressure
Enter the internal pressure to be exerted on the expansion joint. This analysis is limited to
internal pressure only. External pressure is not considered.
Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution
Typical expansion joints are formed from various stainless steels, monels and inconels. An
example of a material is SA-516 70.
Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the bellows material at the operating temperature. If your
material is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the bellows material at the ambient temperature. If your
material is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
21-2
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows operating temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3
CODE for PRESSURE PIPING. The table is C-6.
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3
CODE for PRESSURE PIPING. The table is C-6.
Material Category for Cycle Life Evaluation
Materials:
Carbon Steel
Low Alloy Steel
Martensitic Stainless
Austenitic Stainless
Nickel Chrome Iron
Nickel Copper
Inside Diameter of Bellows
Enter the inside diameter of the bellows. This value will normally be equal to the pipe or
vessel inside diameter. Some geometries are larger in diameter than the attached cylinder.
Thus, the bellows id (d) will be larger than the vessel/pipe id.
Convolution Depth
The convolution depth is the distance from the top of the convolution to the trough of
the convolution. This is referred as the variable w in the ASME Code.
Convolution Pitch
This is the distance between the tops of successive bellows convolutions. This is
referred to as q in the ASME Code.
Bellows Minimum Thickness Before Forming
Enter the nominal thickness of the plate that the expansion joint is to be made of before it
is pressed or formed. Expansion joints are typically thin compared to the matching pipe.
Reinforcing Ring Present
Some applications of expansion joints include a continuous reinforcing ring which lies in
the convolutions. If your application includes a reinforcing ring, check this field.
Fastener Bolt Present
If the expansion design includes a reinforcing ring, it may be held together by a bolted
geometry in lieu of a welded ring geometry. If your application includes a fastener, check
this field.
21-3
Enter the cross sectional metal area of the reinforcing ring. Typical reinforcing rings can
be circular in shape or tear-drop shaped.
Reinforcing Ring Material
Enter the reinforcing ring material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. The material
can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while
the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification
and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the
Main Menu.
Ring Material Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the ring material at the operating temperature. If your material is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Ring Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the ring material at the ambient temperature. If your material
is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3
CODE for PRESSURE PIPING. The table is C-6.
Fastener Cross-Sectional Area
Enter the cross-sectional root area of one bolt that retains the reinforcing ring.
Effective Length of Fastener Bolt
Enter the effective length of the bolt that is being stressed. This is typically the distance
from the center of the nut to the center of the head on the bolt.
Fastener Material Specification
Enter the fastener material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. The material can be
selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting Database, while the
cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and
properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main
Menu.
Fastener Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the fastener material at the operating temperature. If your
material is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Fastener Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the fastener material at the ambient temperature. If your
material is not in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
21-4
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient temperature. Tables of elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3
CODE for PRESSURE PIPING. The table is C-6.
q
d diam
tm
UNREINFORCED BELLOWS
A-A
A
Reinforcing
rings
AF
Equalizing
ring
q
A
End equalizing
ring
W
tm
Ar
Ar
d diam
REINFORCED BELLOWS
21-5
Example Problems
Example Problems
The following two example problems were adapted from ASME Section VIII Div. 1
Appendix 26. The first example is for an unreinforced geometry, while the second example is for a reinforced geometry. Agreement for the results is excellent with the exception
of the reinforced example problem. As of this printing the value Ar (area in the reinforcement) in the ASME problem was incorrect. Thus the computed value in the Code for Sarcoma is also incorrect. All of the other results are in good agreement.
FileName: CHECKS --------------------------------- Page
ITEM:
1,
1,
04:23pm,
05/18/98
NCYC
1800
TEMP
200.0
150.0
psig
.1250
in.
MAT1
SA-240 304
ALLST1
17800.0
psi
EMOD1
.27700E+08
psi
EAMB1
.2830E+08
psi
24.0
in.
Convolution Depth
1.0000
in.
Convolution Pitch
1.1250
in.
TM
.0500
in.
Kg
1.0000
.0490 in.
.1294 sq.in
Tu =
.0449 in.
21-6
Example Problems
RKN = ( Q / 4 - TM / 2 )
RKN = ( 1.1250 / 4 - .0500 / 2 )
RKN = .2562 in.
.0490
in.
TREQ
.0449
in.
RKN
.2562
in.
3*TM
.1500
in.
Ab
.1294
sq.in.
1.0000
RKS
.2951
q/2W
.56250
q/(2.2((d+w)**.5 *t))
.46207
Figure Factor
Cp
.63207
Cf
1.74880
Cd
1.78330
21-7
Example Problems
CYCU = 1106.
Actual
Allowed
Scmp
16301
17800
Smmp
1530
17800
Smbp
19752
Smmd
2427
Smbd
161967
21283
26700
185677
153960
185677
1105
21-8
Example Problems
FileName : CHECKS
------------------------------------
2,
ITEM:
2,
Page
04:23pm,
1
05/18/98
NCYC
900
TEMP
200.0
450.0
psig
.1000
in.
MAT1
SA-240 304
ALLST1
17800.0
psi
EMOD1
.27700E+08
psi
EAMB1
.2830E+08
psi
24.0
in.
Convolution Depth
1.2500
in.
Convolution Pitch
1.1250
in.
TM
.0600
in.
Kg
1.0000
AR
.1963
MAT2
SA-240 304
sq.in.
ALLST2
17800.0
psi
EMOD2
27700000.0
psi
.0585 in.
.1838 sq.in
.9364
Tr =
.0553 in.
21-9
Example Problems
RKN = ( Q / 4 - TM / 2 )
RKN = ( 1.1250 / 4 - .0600 / 2 )
RKN = .2512 in.
.0585
in.
TREQ
.0553
in.
RKN
.2512
in.
3*TM
.1800
in.
Ab
.1838
sq.in.
.9364
RKS
.2997
q/2W
.45000
q/(2.2((d+w)**.5 *t))
.42076
Figure Factor
Cp
.68792
Cf
1.62577
Cd
1.62942
21-10
Example Problems
CYCR = 543.
Actual
Allowed
Scmp
16820
17800
Smmp
3511
17800
Smbp
37690
Smmd
3915
Smbd
203222
41201
53400
248339
201572
248339
542
pressure
Actual
Allowed
16814
17800
21-11
Example Problems
21-12
&KDSWHU
The Thick Joint Module
Introduction
This module applies to fixed tubesheet exchangers which require flexible elements to
reduce shell and tube longitudinal stresses, tubesheet thickness, or tube-to-tubesheet joint
loads. Light gauge bellows type expansion joints within the scope of the Standards of the
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) are not included within the purview
of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these paragraphs are based upon the
equivalent geometry used in Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers by S. Kopp and M.F.
Sayre; however, the formulas have been derived based upon the use of plate and shell theory. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints can be analyzed with
this method. (TEMA 8th Edition, Paragraph RCB-8, page 61).
The formulas contained in the module are applicable based on the following assumptions:
(TEMA Eighth Edition, Paragraph RCB-8.1, page 61: note that other systems of units may
be used for input and output, since the program converts these to inches and pounds for its
internal calculations.)
The sequence of calculation used by the program is as follows:
1. Select a geometry for the flexible element per RCB-8.21 (user input)
2. Determine the effective geometry constants per RCB-8.22.
3. Calculate the flexibility factors per RCB-8.3
4. Calculate the flexible element geometry factors per RCB-8.4
5. Calculate the overall shell spring rate with all contributions from flexible shell elements per RCB-8.5
6. Calculate Fax for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.6. This requires that you
run the PVElite Tubesheet module to determine the differential expansion and shellside and tubeside equivalent pressures.
7. Calculate the flexible element stresses per RCB-8.7
22-1
Introduction
8. Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the
Code, for the load conditions as noted in step 6.
9. Modify the geometry and rerun the program if necessary.
Note
More than one analysis may be needed to evaluate hydrotest and uncorroded conditions.
Figure 22A shows geometry for the Thick Joint module. (TEMA Figure RCB-8.21 and
RCB-8.22). Both the input geometry and the equivalent geometry used for the analysis are
shown. The discussion of input data below uses the nomenclature shown on this figure.
A recent computational change was made to the program to allow users to better comply
with the design rules for allowable stresses per appendix CC of the ASME Code. In previous versions, the program designed expansion joints based on fatigue analysis techniques.
The default behavior for computation of the allowables has not changed. If you prefer to
design per CC then check the Use App CC box. Also the program uses the minimum of
the expansion joint allowable stress and the shell allowable stress for the default to use
when designing for the shellside pressure case. If you wish to use the expansion joint
allowable only, then check the Use EXP. Jt. Allowables box.
22-2
Enter an ID number for the Expansion Joint. This may be the item number on the drawing,
or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Expansion Joint Description
Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming.
This will usually be somewhat thinner than the unformed metal.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as te.
Expansion Joint Corrosion Allowance
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not con-
22-3
tained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Note that the program uses the external pressure charts to determine the modulus of elasticity and material type for the analysis.
Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
Enter the inside diameter of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is attached.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as G.
Shell Wall Thickness
Enter the actual wall thickness of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is
attached.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as ts.
Shell Corrosion Allowance
Enter the length of the shell cylinder to the nearest body flange or head.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 included the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the
cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements
are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the
cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero.
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA procedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this
length if less than the cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as li.
22-4
Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion
joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web
and the shell diameter for joints with a square inside corner.
Note that in both cases this distance is frequently zero.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as fa.
Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp inside corner.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as ra.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset
Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion
joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web
and the outer diameter for joints with a square outside corner.
Note that in both cases this distance is frequently zero, and that for an expansion joint with
a outside radius but no outside cylinder, this distance is the distance from the end of the
knuckle to the symmetrical centerline of the joint.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as fb.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle.
Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp outside corner. (Flanged Only)
This value is shown on Figure 22A as rb.
Use Appendix CC ?
Check this box to use the ASME Sec. VIII, Div.1, APP-CC design rules for allowable
stresses. Otherwise the program will use the fatigue analysis techniques.
Use Expansion Joint Allowable Stress
The program uses the minimum of the expansion joint allowable stress and the shell
allowable stress for the shellside pressure case. Check this box if you wish to use the
expansion joint allowable value only.
Is There an Outer Cylinder?
Check this field if there is a cylindrical section attached to the expansion joint at the OD.
This will always be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolute. It
may also be true when there is a relatively long cylindrical portion between two half convolutes, as in the case of certain inlet nozzle geometries for heat exchangers.
22-5
You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis of fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Shellside Design Pressure
You do not need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program to get this value - it is simply the
design pressure for the shell.
Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet)
You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded
You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the TEMA tubesheet module computes the Shellside Prime
Design Pressure, in both corroded and uncorroded conditions.
Tubeside Design Pressure
You do not need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program to get this value - it is simply the
design pressure for the channel.
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet)
You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded
You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the TEMA tubesheet module computes the Tubeside Prime
Design Pressure, in both corroded and uncorroded conditions.
Analyze Differential Expansion?
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded
You need to run the PVElite Tubesheet program in order to determine this value. It is
listed in the output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the TEMA tubesheet module computes the Differential
Expansion Pressure, in both corroded and uncorroded conditions.
22-6
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Analyze Tubeside Pressure
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside Pressure
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Analyze Shellside + Differential Expansion
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Analyze Tubeside + Differential Expansion
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling
from the final printout.
Enter the actual wall thickness of the outer cylindrical element at the point where the
expansion joint is attached.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as to.
Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance
Enter the length of the outer cylinder to the nearest body flange or head, or to the centerline of the convolute.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 includes the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the
cylinders welded to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements
22-7
are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the
cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero.
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA procedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this
length if less than the cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as lo.
22-8
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
The three most significant results for the THICK JOINT analysis are the spring constant
for the joint, the stresses in the joint, and the cycle life for the joint. These are discussed
below.
Spring Constant
The program does not calculate the deflection of the joint. Instead it calculates the spring
constant for the joint, which can be used in the Tubesheet program or elsewhere to determine the effect of the joint on the heat exchanger design.
Stresses
The program calculates the combined meridional bending and membrane stresses in the
expansion joint and the attached cylinders. According to ASME, Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix CC, this stress should be limited to KS, where K is 1.5 for flat sections (the
annular ring or cylinders) and 3.0 for curved areas of the inner and outer torus (or sharp
corners). S is the basic allowable stress for the expansion joint material at operating temperature. Note, however, that this stress limit applies only to the stresses due to pressure stresses due to deflection are limited by fatigue considerations rather than stress allowables. Thus the program only prints the allowable membrane plus bending stress for the
case of shellside pressure.
Cycle Life
The cycle life of the joint is analyzed using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix CC. For Series 3xx stainless steels, nickel-chromium iron alloys,
nickel-iron chromium alloys and nickel-copper alloys, the equation for cycle life is as follows:
N < [(2.2)/(( 14.2*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.03 )]^2.17
For carbon and low alloy steels, Series 4xx stainless steels, and high alloy steels, the equation for cycle life is:
N < [(2.0)/(( 15*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.011 )]^2.17
Where:
Kg = fatigue strength reduction factor which accounts for geometrical stress concentration
factors due to local thickness variations, weld geometries, and other surface conditions.
The range of Kg is 1.0 <= Kg <= 4.0 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical
shapes and its maximum for 90 deg. welded corners and fillet welds. The program uses a
Kg of 1.0 when the knuckle radius is greater than three times the expansion joint thickness.
Sn = Maximum combined meridional membrane and bending stress range in a flexible
element due to the cyclic components of pressure and deflection.
Eb = Modulus of elasticity at design temperature. The program determines both the modulus of elasticity and the material type from the name of the external pressure chart given by
22-9
Discussion of Results
the user. To check the name of the external pressure chart in your input, move to the material name and press [E] (Material Edit).
22-10
Example Problem
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS
---------------------------------- Page
ITEM:
1,
1,
04:30pm,
05/18/98
TEMP
214.3000
RID
33.0000
in.
ROD
34.0000
in.
TE
.4378
in.
CAE
.0000
in.
SA-240 316
SOE
18742.80
psi
Ambient
SAE
18800.00
psi
25.2500
in.
TS
.3750
in.
CAS
.0000
in.
RLI
40.0000
in.
SA-516 70
SOS
17500.00
psi
Ambient
SAS
17500.00
psi
FA
1.0000
in.
RA
1.5000
in.
FB
1.0000
in.
RB
1.5000
in.
TO
.5000
in.
CAO
.0000
in.
RLO
1.0000
in.
SA-240 316
SOO
18742.80
psi
Ambient
SAO
18800.00
psi
PD
515.9200
psig
PS
200.0000
psig
PSP
-38.7500
psig
PT
100.0000
psig
PTP
86.8900
psig
+ Differential Expansion
22-11
Example Problem
Ta
= IF(RA<>0,Te,Ts)
.4378
in.
Tb
= IF(RA<>0,Te,To)
.4378
in.
= ( G + TA ) / 2.0
12.8439
in.
= (ROD-TB)/2-(4-PI)*(RA+RB)/4
16.1373
in.
2.3970
in.
2.3970
in.
YA
4.7426
in.
YB
3.3970
in.
.272E+08 psi
ES
.290E+08 psi
EO
.272E+08 psi
.272E+08 psi
.272E+08 psi
Ba = 1.285 / SQRT( A * TA )
.5419 1/in.
Bb = 1.285 / SQRT( B * TB )
.4834 1/in.
Da = 0.0916 * EA * TA**3
Db = 0.0916 * EB * TB**3
De = 0.0916 * EE * TE**3
Wa
= 2 * BA * YA
5.1400
3.5134
-5.5266
42.8877
SINH( WA ) + SIN( WA )
84.4450
1.0158
1.0216
1.0059
Wb
= 2 * BB * YB
3.2845
2.4803
-.1914
ZZB =
RK0B =
RJ1B**2 + RJ2B**2
SINH( WB ) + SIN( WB )
6.1887
13.1872
.9386
1.0216
1.0887
1.0108
.8566
.9379
-.0198
C5A = -1.06871+(1.01164/C2A)-(0.122627/C2A**2)
-.0548
C6A = 0.0696709+(1.76415*C2A)-(5.46103*C2A**3)
-1.8512
C7A = -0.142734+(0.918656*C2A)-(2.00749*C2A**3)
-.6174
C8A = (C5A/C1A**2-C6A/C1A**3+C7A/C1A**4-C4A)
/(C3A**0.2)
EAA = 2.718**C8A
22-12
1.1821
3.2609
.9018
1.1421
Example Problem
C3B = ( EB / EO )
C4B = (3.3731-1.707962*C2B+0.226216*C2B**2)/1000
1.0000
.0017
C5B = -0.403287+0.320037*C2B-0.0307508*C2B**2
-.0779
C6B = -0.684978+0.582549*C2B-0.0547812*C2B**2
-.0911
C7B = -0.201334+0.168201*C2B-0.015728*C2B**2
-.0298
C8B = (C5B/C1B**2-C6B/C1B**3+C7B/C1B**4-C4B)
/(C3B**0.2)
EBB = 2.718**C8B
-.0182
.9819
14.1679 / 10^6
RY2 = (EBB*(RK3B-RK2B**2/(2*RK1B))/(DB*BB))
5.1753 / 10^6
1.7284
= ( B / A )
1.2564
-321.0036 / 10^6
368.7490 / 10^6
RX3 = -A*A*(1.538+LN(D)*(2+C*(2+3.71*D*D)))
/(4*DE)
RX4 = ( -2.2 * B * C ) / DE
RX5 = (B * C * (0.769 * D * D + 1.428) / DE)
RX6 = (-A*B*(1.538 + 5.714*C*ln(D)) / (4*DE))
XBOT = (RX1 - RY1) * (RX5 + RY2) - (RX2 * RX4)
-1.0049 / 10^3
-293.4925 / 10^6
352.4486 / 10^6
-939.8965 / 10^6
-.0116 / 10^6
-1.0980
1.7271
= ( A / B )
210.3250
-247.0719
668.5906
.7959
-.2499
-.1422
-17.1808 / 10^3
.5649
1.5418 * 10^6
.7709 * 10^6
.000 psig
.000 psig
515.920 psig
.000 psig
-515.920 psig
-3313.213 lb.
ZA
= (Ps*A**2-0.3*A*FAX)/(EA*TA)
ZB
= (Ps*B^2-0.3*(A*FAX+((B^2-A^2)/2)*Ps))
.0000 / 10^6
.0000 / 10^6
1.0721 / 10^3
22-13
Example Problem
/ (EB*TB)
1.0721 / 10^3
MT1A = (RX5+RY2)*(-THA-FAX*RX3-BA*ZA)
-1.1909 / 10^3
MT2A = RX2*(FAX*RX6+THB-(BB*RK2B*ZB/RK1B))
1.1481 / 10^3
RMA
3.6737 * 10^3
= (MT1A+MT2A)/XBOT
MT1B = (RY1-RX1) *
(THB+FAX*RX6-(BB*RK2B*ZB/RK1B))
1.0436 / 10^3
MT2B = RX4*(FAX*RX3+THA+BA*ZA)
-977.3136 / 10^6
RMB = (MT1B+MT2B)/XBOT
-5.6912 * 10^3
-10.9644 * 10^3
RA12 = PSS*(0.325*RM2*B*B+0.4125*A*A)
RA1
.0000 / 10^6
= (RA1D1-RA12)
-10.9644 * 10^3
RA21 = C*RMA-C*RMB-0.65*A*C*FAX*ln(GG)
5.2732 * 10^3
RA22 = 0.0875*RM3*PSS*B*B
RA2
= B*B*(RA21+RA22)
RA3
= 0.206*PSS
RA4
= 0.65*A*(FAX-0.5*A*PSS)
.0000 / 10^6
1.3732 * 10^6
.0000 / 10^6
-27.6605 * 10^3
(A)
12.8439
in.,
115001.80
psi
Location:
(B)
16.1373
in.,
-178157.20
psi
1.2516 / 10^3
-1.2849 / 10^3
B2A = (1/ZZA)*(-RJ1A*RMA/(2*BA*BA*EAA*DA)
-RJ2A*DEA)
U1A = +BA*(YA-YA)
-590.3668 / 10^6
.0000 / 10^6
U2A = B1A*SIN(U1A)*SINH(U1A)+B2A*COS(U1A)
*COSH(U1A)
SMYA = EA*(DEA+U2A)/RRA
-590.3668 / 10^6
1.4003 * 10^3
1.2516 / 10^3
B1A = (1/ZZA)*(RJ2A*RMA/(2*BA^2*EAA*DA)-RJ1A*DEA
-1.2849 / 10^3
B2A = (1/ZZA)*(-RJ1A*RMA/(2*BA^2*EAA*DA)-RJ2A*DE
-590.3668 / 10^6
U1A = BA*(YA-LA)
U2A = B1A*SIN(U1A)*SINH(U1A)+B2A*COS(U1A)*COSH(U
SMYA = EA*(DEA+U2A)/RRA
1.2711
-2.3509 / 10^3
-2.3281 * 10^3
1.0721 / 10^3
B1B = (1/ZZB)*(RJ2B*RMB/(2*BB^2*EBB*DB)-RJ1B*DEB
1.4046 / 10^3
B2B = (1/ZZB)*(-RJ1B*RMB/(2*BB^2*EBB*DB)-RJ2B*DE
23.8024 / 10^3
U1B = BB*(YB-YB)
.0000 / 10^6
U2B = B1B*SIN(U1B)*SINH(U1B)+B2B*COS(U1B)
*COSH(U1B)
SMYB = EB*(DEB+U2B)/RRB
22-14
23.8024 / 10^3
41.9267 * 10^3
Example Problem
1.0721 / 10^3
B1B = (1/ZZB)*(RJ2B*RMB/(2*BB^2*EBB*DB)-RJ1B*DEB
1.4046 / 10^3
B2B = (1/ZZB)*(-RJ1B*RMB/(2*BB*BB*EBB*DB)-RJ2B*D
23.8024 / 10^3
U1B = BB*(YB-RLB)
.4834
U2B = B1B*SIN(U1B)*SINH(U1B)+B2B*COS(U1B)
*COSH(U1B)
23.9138 / 10^3
SMLB = EB*(DEB+U2B)/RRB
42.1145 * 10^3
.1226 * 10^6
RNA= 47.11*EXP((ln(SCLA*28.3E6/EB)-14.12)**2/1.023
11.1028 * 10^3
.1842 * 10^6
RNB= 47.11*EXP((ln(SCLB*28.3E6/EB)-14.12)**2/1.023
1.9882 * 10^3
.000
PSPC=
-38.750
PDC =
.000
PSC =
200.000
PSS =
-38.750
FAX =
-248.851
-.354
THB
-.334
ZA
2.851 /10^3
ZB
4.214 /10^3
MT1A
36.591 /10^6
MT2A
-37.612 /10^6
RMA
87.651
MT1B
-34.187 /10^6
MT2B
30.030 /10^6
RMB
357.143
1.643 *10^3
RA12
13.319 *10^3
RA1
-11.676 *10^3
RA21
-1.285 *10^3
RA22
2.574 *10^3
RA2
.336 *10^6
RA4
-12.800 *10^3
RA3
41.200
(A)
12.8439
in.,
2406.65
psi
Location:
(R)
14.0268
in.,
-2191.15
psi
Location:
(B)
16.1373
in.,
10695.02
psi
3.329 /10^3
B1A
-300.896 /10^6
B2A
411.004 /10^6
U1A
.000 /10^6
U2A
411.004 /10^6
SMYA
7.920 *10^3
3.329 /10^3
B1A
-300.896 /10^6
B2A
411.004 /10^6
U1A
1.271
U2A
-238.757 /10^6
SMLA
6.544 *10^3
22-15
Example Problem
4.214 /10^3
B1B
-1.804 /10^3
B2B
-1.361 /10^3
U1B
.000 /10^6
U2B
-1.361 /10^3
SMYB
4.808 *10^3
4.214 /10^3
U1B
.483
B1B
-1.804 /10^3
B2B
-1.361 /10^3
U2B
-1.770 /10^3
SMLB
4.119 *10^3
3.312 *10^3
RNA
1.000 *10^6
RNB
1.000 *10^6
12.079 *10^3
13.110
PSPC=
.000
PDC =
.000
PSC =
.000
PSS =
13.110
FAX =
84.192
.000 /10^6
THB
.000 /10^6
ZA
-27.242 /10^6
ZB
-27.242 /10^6
MT1A
30.261 /10^6
MT2A
-29.174 /10^6
RMA
-93.352
MT1B
-26.518 /10^6
MT2B
24.834 /10^6
RMB
144.618
278.616
RA12
.000 /10^6
RA1
278.616
RA21
-133.998
RA22
.000 /10^6
RA2
-34.895 *10^3
RA3
.000 /10^6
RA4
702.878
(A)
12.8439
in.,
-2922.30
psi
Location:
(B)
16.1373
in.,
4527.14
psi
-31.805 /10^6
B1A
32.650 /10^6
B2A
U1A
.000 /10^6
U2A
15.002 /10^6
SMYA
15.002 /10^6
-35.584
-31.805 /10^6
1.271
B1A
32.650 /10^6
B2A
U2A
59.740 /10^6
SMLA
15.002 /10^6
59.159
22-16
DEB
-27.242 /10^6
B1B
-35.692 /10^6
B2B
-604.840 /10^6
U1B
.000 /10^6
U2B
-604.840 /10^6
SMYB
-1.065 *10^3
Example Problem
-27.242 /10^6
U1B
.483
B1B
-35.692 /10^6
B2B
-604.840 /10^6
U2B
-607.672 /10^6
SMLB
-1.070 *10^3
3.115 *10^3
RNA
1.000 *10^6
RNB
1.000 *10^6
4.680 *10^3
13.110
PSPC=
-38.750
PDC =
.000
PSC =
200.000
PSS =
-25.640
FAX =
-164.659
-.354
THB
-.334
ZA
2.824 /10^3
ZB
4.187 /10^3
MT1A
66.852 /10^6
MT2A
-66.786 /10^6
RMA
-5.701
MT1B
-60.705 /10^6
MT2B
54.864 /10^6
RMB
501.762
1.921 *10^3
RA12
13.319 *10^3
RA1
-11.398 *10^3
RA21
-1.419 *10^3
RA22
2.574 *10^3
RA2
.301 *10^6
RA4
-12.097 *10^3
RA3
41.200
(A)
12.8439
in.,
-515.62
psi
Location:
(R)
13.6401
in.,
-2565.13
psi
Location:
(B)
16.1373
in.,
15222.18
psi
3.297 /10^3
B1A
-268.246 /10^6
B2A
426.006 /10^6
U1A
.000 /10^6
U2A
426.006 /10^6
SMYA
7.884 *10^3
3.297 /10^3
B1A
-268.246 /10^6
B2A
426.006 /10^6
U1A
1.271
U2A
-179.018 /10^6
SMLA
6.603 *10^3
4.187 /10^3
B1B
-1.840 /10^3
B2B
-1.966 /10^3
U1B
.000 /10^6
U2B
-1.966 /10^3
SMYB
3.743 *10^3
4.187 /10^3
.483
B1B
-1.840 /10^3
B2B
-1.966 /10^3
U2B
-2.378 /10^3
SMLB
3.048 *10^3
22-17
Example Problem
554.577
RNA
1.000 *10^6
RNB
1.000 *10^6
16.759 *10^3
.000
PSPC=
-38.750
PDC =
515.920
PSC =
200.000
PSS =
-554.670
FAX =
-3562.063
-.354
THB
-.334
ZA
3.923 /10^3
ZB
MT1A
-1.154 /10^3
MT2A
5.286 /10^3
1.110 /10^3
RMA
3.761 *10^3
MT1B
1.009 /10^3
MT2B
-947.284 /10^6
RMB
-5.334 *10^3
-9.322 *10^3
RA12
13.319 *10^3
RA1
-22.641 *10^3
RA21
3.988 *10^3
RA22
2.574 *10^3
RA2
1.709 *10^6
RA4
-40.461 *10^3
RA3
41.200
(A)
12.8439
in.,
117408.10
psi
Location:
(B)
16.1373
in.,
-167462.10
psi
4.580 /10^3
B1A
-1.586 /10^3
B2A
-179.361 /10^6
U1A
.000 /10^6
U2A
-179.361 /10^6
SMYA
9.320 *10^3
4.580 /10^3
B1A
-1.586 /10^3
B2A
-179.361 /10^6
U1A
1.271
U2A
-2.590 /10^3
SMLA
4.215 *10^3
5.286 /10^3
B1B
-399.321 /10^6
B2B
22.441 /10^3
U1B
.000 /10^6
U2B
22.441 /10^3
SMYB
46.735 *10^3
5.286 /10^3
.483
B1B
-399.321 /10^6
B2B
22.441 /10^3
U2B
22.144 /10^3
SMLB
46.233 *10^3
22-18
Example Problem
.126 *10^6
RNA
9.822 *10^3
RNB
2.589 *10^3
.172 *10^6
13.110
PSPC=
.000
PDC =
515.920
PSC =
.000
PSS =
-502.810
FAX =
-3229.021
.000 /10^6
THB
.000 /10^6
ZA
1.045 /10^3
ZB
1.045 /10^3
MT1A
-1.161 /10^3
MT2A
1.119 /10^3
RMA
3.580 *10^3
MT1B
1.017 /10^3
MT2B
-952.479 /10^6
RMB
-5.547 *10^3
-10.686 *10^3
RA12
.000 /10^6
RA1
-10.686 *10^3
RA21
5.139 *10^3
RA22
.000 /10^6
RA2
1.338 *10^6
RA3
.000 /10^6
RA4
-26.958 *10^3
(A)
12.8439
in.,
112079.20
psi
Location:
(B)
16.1373
in.,
-173630.10
psi
1.220 /10^3
B1A
-1.252 /10^3
B2A
-575.363 /10^6
U1A
.000 /10^6
U2A
-575.363 /10^6
SMYA
1.365 *10^3
1.220 /10^3
B1A
-1.252 /10^3
B2A
-575.363 /10^6
U1A
1.271
U2A
-2.291 /10^3
SMLA
-2.269 *10^3
1.045 /10^3
B1B
1.369 /10^3
B2B
23.198 /10^3
U1B
.000 /10^6
U2B
23.198 /10^3
SMYB
40.861 *10^3
1.045 /10^3
.483
B1B
1.369 /10^3
B2B
23.198 /10^3
U2B
23.306 /10^3
SMLB
41.044 *10^3
.119 *10^6
RNA
12.514 *10^3
22-19
Example Problem
SCLB
.180 *10^6
RNB
2.195 *10^3
Annular Element
Inside Junction
Outside Junction
Actual
Actual
Allowed
115002. (Fatigue)
Allowed
-178157. (Fatigue)
psi
16.137
178157. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point Y
1400. (Fatigue)
41927. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point L
-2328. (Fatigue)
42114. (Fatigue)
psi
122570. (Fatigue)
184181. (Fatigue)
psi
11103. Cycles
1988. Cycles
Annular Element
Inside Junction
Outside Junction
Actual
Actual
2407.
Allowed
52500.
14.027
Allowed
10695.
52500. psi
-2191.
28114. psi
Cyl. at point Y
7920.
17500.
4808.
17500. psi
Cyl. at point L
6544.
17500.
4119.
17500. psi
3312. (Fatigue)
999999. Cycles
12079. (Fatigue)
psi
999999. Cycles
Annular Element
Inside Junction
Outside Junction
Actual
Actual
Allowed
-2922. (Fatigue)
Allowed
4527. (Fatigue)
psi
16.137
4527. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point Y
-36. (Fatigue)
-1065. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point L
59. (Fatigue)
-1070. (Fatigue)
psi
3115. (Fatigue)
4680. (Fatigue)
psi
999999. Cycles
999999. Cycles
Annular Element
Inside Junction
Outside Junction
Actual
Actual
Allowed
-516. (Fatigue)
Allowed
15222. (Fatigue)
psi
13.640
-2565. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point Y
7884. (Fatigue)
3743. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point L
6603. (Fatigue)
3048. (Fatigue)
psi
555. (Fatigue)
16759. (Fatigue)
psi
999999. Cycles
999999. Cycles
Outside Junction
Actual
Actual
Allowed
Allowed
Annular Element
117408. (Fatigue)
-167462. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point Y
9320. (Fatigue)
46735. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point L
4215. (Fatigue)
46233. (Fatigue)
psi
125881. (Fatigue)
172102. (Fatigue)
psi
9822. Cycles
2589. Cycles
22-20
Inside Junction
Outside Junction
Actual
Actual
Allowed
Allowed
Example Problem
Annular Element
112079. (Fatigue)
-173630. (Fatigue)
psi
16.137
173630. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point Y
1365. (Fatigue)
40861. (Fatigue)
psi
Cyl. at point L
-2269. (Fatigue)
41044. (Fatigue)
psi
119455. (Fatigue)
179500. (Fatigue)
psi
12514. Cycles
2195. Cycles
22-21
Example Problem
22-22
&KDSWHU
The ASME Tubesheets Module
Introduction
This module computes the required thickness for tubesheets according to the ASME Code
Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA, A-2001. Currently ASME addresses required
thickness for both U-tube tubesheets as well as fully fixed tubesheets. Other tubesheet
types such as floating tubesheets are not supported by ASME at this time.
23-1
Figure 23A shows the geometry for the ASME Tubesheets Module.
23-2
23-3
Enter an ID number for the Tubesheet. This may be the item number on the drawing, or
numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Note, that more than one pressure or temperature case can be run. Use the page down key, enter a new tubesheet number and
change the relevant input items.
Tubesheet Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. Entering a description will help you to keep up with each item when reviewing the output.
Shell Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external
pressure, enter a negative pressure. The program will add this pressure with the positive on
the tube (channel) side.
Shell Wall Thickness
Enter the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the
program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets. It is used in the computation of the Beta parameter as well as the spring rate and other factors.
Shell Corrosion Allowance
Enter the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate
the corroded thickness of the shell.
Shell Inside Diameter
Enter the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum
design condition, enter a negative pressure. The program will add the absolute value of
this pressure with the positive pressure on the other side.
Channel Wall Thickness
Enter the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by
the program to calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types. An example of
such a parameter is the Beta dimension for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Channel Corrosion Allowance
Enter the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate
the corroded thickness of the channel.
Channel Inside Diameter
23-4
Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for
determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Tubesheet Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Tubesheet Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature
Enter the tubesheet thickness that you are going to be using. For fixed exchangers, all of
the initial calculations will be performed and printed using the original tubesheet thickness. PVElite will converge on the minimum required tubesheet thickness for the given
loading condition. For U-Tube geometries, PVElite will simply compute the required
thickness for the geometry.
Type of Tubesheet
ASME has two distinct types of tubesheets for analysis purposes. These are fixed and Utube exchangers. A fixed tubesheet exchangers is one that is subject to loads arising from
differential thermal expansion. Based on the selected tubesheet type, the program will
automatically reset other inputs on this dialog, such as tubesheet Gasketed with which side
or tubesheet integral with which side. The list below identifies the tubesheet types supported:
U-Tube Tubesheet Exchangers:
(U)
(V)
23-5
Enter the number of tubes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube
area and stiffness.
Note
For U-tube exchangers, this is the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. (Normally equal to 2 times the number of tubes.)
Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area
and stiffness. The following table gives thicknesses for some common tube gauges:
B.W.G.
Gauge
Thickness
(Inches)
B.W.G.
Gauge
Thickness
(Inches)
.180
17
.058
.165
18
.049
10
.134
19
.042
11
.109
22
.028
13
.095
24
.022
14
.083
26
.018
15
.072
27
.016
16
.065
Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75,
.875, 1.0, or 1.25. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term eta
in the tubesheet formulas. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.
23-6
Enter the design temperature of the tubes. This value will be used to look up the allowable
stress values for the tube material from the material tables.
Tube Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (Chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Tube Material Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature
Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term eta in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular
and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. In the ASME, code square patterns have a 90 degree layout angle and triangular patterns have a 60 degree angle.
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and
pattern are used to calculate the term mustar in the tubesheet thickness equation. These
rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for
square or rotated square layouts.
Distance between Innermost Tube Centers (UL)
The ASME defines this input also as the largest center-to-center distance between adjacent
tube rows. This is not the tube pitch, however the values for the tube pitch and this value
may be the same.
Length of Expanded Portion of Tube
The expanded portion of a tube is that part which is radially expanded outward. When the
tube is expanded it is also pressed into the tubesheet. Simply enter this expanded length.
Some tubes are welded into place and this value may be 0. The maximum this value can be
is the thickness of the tubesheet.
23-7
Enter the distance from the centerline of the exchanger to the centerline of outermost tube.
Tube Side Pass Partition Groove Depth (hg)
Check this box to enter the bolting information. If it is a U-tube tubesheet exchanger then
this information is needed if the tubesheet is extended as flange. For a Fixed tube
tubesheet exchanger this information is needed if the tubesheet is Gasketed with channel
or shell, irrespective of the tubesheets extension as a flange. Programs (PVElite from version 4.1) now require, the bolting information for tubesheet not extended as flange.
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both)
This input is used with U-Tube and Fixed type exchangers. For U-Tube exchangers, the
elastic properties of either the shell or channel are needed to properly compute reduced
bending moment in the second elastic iteration. While for Fixed Tubesheet exchangers,
just the information that, which side the tubesheet is integral with is needed.
Enter the Dimension G for the Backing Flange
This input is only required for fixed tubesheet exchanger configuration C. G is the midpoint of the contact between the backing flange and the tubesheet.
Enter the Outside Diameter of the Tubesheet
This value is referred to as "A" in the ASME code. For the tubesheet extended as flange,
this will be the diameter of the extended portion of the tubesheet.
Is There a Shell Band
The shell band can be used to reduce the bending stresses in the tubesheet, shell, or channel.
Fixed tubesheets where the shell is integral to the tubesheet, configuration a, b, or c, can
have a different thickness of shell adjacent to the tubesheet. The band of shell can be made
of a a different material as well. If that is the case then check this box.
23-8
23-9
Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Shell Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Shell Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Channel Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Channel Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
23-10
Enter the overall length of the tubes, the length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the
inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of
the tubes.
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint,
enter a one (1.0). If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant
for the joint. The expansion joint spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite
THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a similar analysis technique. The
spring rate reported from the THICKJNT program is reported in units of pounds per inch.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, different inputs for the uncorroded and corroded spring rates
will be required, these will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and
corroded condition.
Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint,
enter a one (1.0). If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant
for the joint. The expansion joint spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite
THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a similar analysis technique. The
spring rate reported from the THICKJNT program is reported in units of pounds per inch.
As of version 4.1 of PVElite, different inputs for the uncorroded and corroded spring rates
will be required, these will be used for running the multiple load cases in uncorroded and
corroded condition.
Expansion Joint Projection from Shell OD
For fixed tubesheet heat exchangers that have an expansion joint enter the value (wj). This
distance is measured from the OD of the shell to the ID of the expansion joint. This is the
dimension hj in Fig. AA-2.0 of ASME Code VIII Div. 1 (pg. 644, 1998 ed) pressure vessel
code.
23-11
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required.
Where,
SL : Unsupported Span of the tube
k : Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below displays the different values of k:
K
End Condition
0.6
0.8
1.0
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combination of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tubespan between two support baffles.
Enter the Tube End Condition, K Corresponding to Span SL
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required.
Where,
SL : Unsupported Span of the tube
k : Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below displays the different values of k:
K
End Condition
0.6
0.8
1.0
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combination of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tubespan between two support baffles.
Metal Temperatures
It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that
you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may
have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to
thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient
and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Dont forget to evaluate the condition of
23-12
shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may govern the exchanger design.
Mean Shell Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell
along its length, under realistic operating conditions.
Mean Tube Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tube
along its length, under realistic operating conditions.
Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. Enter the actual metal temperature for
the tubesheet at the rim, under realistic operating conditions.
Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the
shell at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for
the channel at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
Classification for Tube Joint Connection (1 - 11)
Enter a value between 1 and 11 based on the following table from ASME VIII appendix A
table A-2 (pg. 463 1992 ed.).
Type
Joint
Description
Fr.(test)
Fr.(no test)
1.00
.80
.70
.55
brazed examined
1.00
.80
0.50
.40
1.00
.80
.95
.75
.85
.65
.70
.50
.90
.70
10
.80
.65
11
expanded no grooves
.60
.50
Enter a value between .40 and 1.0 based on the following table from ASME VIII appendix
A table A-2 (Pg. 463 1992 ed.). This is needed when the tube connection class is not specified above. See the table above for these factors.
23-13
Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will be used ion the calculation of the required
thickness. The final results should therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five
percent. Since ASME does not have a single equation to compute this required thickness,
the appropriate formula from TEMA 7th edition was used.
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ?
Check this box if you want to run multiple load cases for the tubesheet design, per the
ASME standard.
Load
Case #
Uncorroded
Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca
Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca
Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
Ps + Pt - Th + Ca
Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca
Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca
Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca
Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
Ps + Pt + Th + Ca
Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca
Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shellside and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube side Design Pressures.
Th
Ca
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel
side vacuum pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example for full atmospheric
vacuum condition enter a value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified then 0 psi will be
used.
23-14
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate summarized results for all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and
intermediate calculations for one or more load cases select those load cases.
Is This a Pressure Only Case ?
The program designs the tubesheet under all the load cases. If you manually want to run
the load cases then use this input. If you check this box the allowable stress amplification
factor of 2 will be used and there will be no stresses due to differential thermal expansion.
Nominal Bolt Diameter
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range
from 0.5 to 4.0 inches.
Thread Series (TEMA,UNC)
UNC
Bolt Table
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. This is usually an even number.
Bolt Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (Chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Bolt Allowable Stress, Design Temp
Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the flange
face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact
point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that
the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange
face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
23-15
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the Flange
Face ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Flange Face Facing Sketch
Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the following correlations:
Facing Sketch
PVElite Equivalent
1a
1b
1c
1d
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
flat finish faces
serrated finish faces
raised nubbin-flat finish
raised nubbin-serrated finish
1/64 inch nubbin
1/64 inch nubbin both sides
large serrations, one side
large serrations, both sides
metallic O-ring type gasket
Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The program uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point,
but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the
bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange face
ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
Gasket Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the Flange Face
ID and the Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Note
For gasket properties, refer to the table in Chapter 12, The Flange Module.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Length of Partition Gasket
This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated
with this flange. If the pass partition gaskets are a different width than the main gasket,
scale the length you enter so that the area of the gasket is correct.
23-16
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. The gasket properties such as the facing
sketch, column, M and Y will be taken from the main gasket. Using these properties and
the known width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Design Temperature for Integral Part
Enter the actual metal temperature for either the channel or shell part. This temperature
will be used to retrieve the elastic properties from the material tables.
Material Specification for Integral Part
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the PVElite Appendix (chapter 21). The name to be used is labeled as the range name and is in the center column.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by right clicking and
selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
Specify the material for the shell band. This material can be different than the shell material.
Shell Band Input
23-17
23-18
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
Appendix AA of the Code is divided into two major sections. One section is for the UTube exchangers and the other is for fixed types. There is a sequence of steps to go
through when performing calculations for each type of exchanger. PVElite will perform
each individual; step and print the applicable formula substitution and answer for each
step. All results shown are for the given geometry. In addition, the program will iterate for
the minimum thickness of the tubesheet. If needed PVElite will also perform the second
elastic iteration if high discontinuity stresses exist. As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the program can run multiple load cases for the fixed tubesheet design as per the ASME code.
The table below displays the load cases that are considered.
Load
Case #
Corroded
Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca
Uncorroded
Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca
Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
Ps + Pt - Th + Ca
Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca
Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca
Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca
Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
Ps + Pt + Th + Ca
Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca
Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell side and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt
Th
Ca
When running these load cases the program automatically adjusts the allowable stresses.
For pressure only load cases (!, 2, 3, 8) the tubesheet, shell and channel allowable stresses
are 1.5 * their allowable tensile stresses respectively. For cases involving thermal and/or
pressure (4, 5, 6, 7) the tubesheet, shell and channel allowable stresses are 3.0 * their
allowable tensile stresses respectively.
Upset conditions may need to be analyzed. The user can enter his own shell/channel vacuum pressures for the multi-case analysis, e.g. 0, 15 psi. This will simulate one of the process fluid streams being stopped, while the other stream continues.
In addition to satisfying stress criteria for the tubesheet, the tubes must also be capable of
withstanding the axial forces imposed on them due to the differential thermal expansion.
These forces must be less than the allowable force on the tube per the ASME code equations (App A). Tube stresses are also checked against the criteria in appendix AA.
23-19
Discussion of Results
Finally, the discontinuity stresses must be less than their allowables. If these allowables
are exceeded, PVElite will perform a second elastic iteration. This is where the plasticity
of the integral component is considered. Typically, when this iteration is performed, the
stresses will come down below their allowables. If for any reason they do not, the geometry of the unit must be reconsidered.
If your tubesheet contains a center groove, the groove depth should be subtracted from the
overall tubesheet thickness. Bending stress in the tubesheet, shell, or the channel can also
be reduced by having a local shell thickness adjacent to the tubesheet.
23-20
Discussion of Results
Example Problem
The following example problem is a comparison to another Heat Exchanger Program.
Both programs were in excellent agreement, including the values read from each of the
various figures. The stress results were less than .1 percent different.
FileName : CHECKS
-------------------------------
ITEM:
1,
1,
Page
04:46pm,
05/18/01
Ps
50.00
psig
Shell Thickness
Hs
.2500
in.
CAS
.0000
in.
Ds
112.0000
in.
Pt
50.00
psig
Channel Thickness
HC
.2500
in.
CAC
.0000
in.
DC
112.0000
in.
TEMPTS
15900.00
psi
SATS
18800.00
psi
1.8125
in.
649.00
Thickness of Tubesheet
TUBESHEET TYPE:
649.00
SA-240 304
DELTs
Shell Material
Shell Allowable Stress at Temperature
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient
Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure
SA-240 304
Ss
15900.00
psi
SAS
18800.00
psi
DELTC
649.00
Channel Material
Channel Allowable Stress at Temperature
SA-240 304
Sc
15900.00
psi
SAC
18800.00
psi
RL
152.25
in.
SYT
20000.00
psi
Sj
49250.
lbs./in.
wj
2.6250
in.
SL
50.00
in.
SLT
50.0000
in.
wu
.0000
in.
%ED
100.00
rc
55.2813
in.
156.00
226.00
233.00
FASME
.70
TJNT
23-21
Discussion of Results
Number of Tubes
RNTUBS
3100
.0490
in.
.7500
in.
649.00
Square
Tube Material
SA-249 TP304
SOT
13500.00
psi
SAT
16000.00
psi
1.3500
in.
DF
116.2500
in.
DB
114.7500
in.
Flange Thickness
TF
5.1250
in.
DBOLT
.6250
in.
Number of Bolts
176
Bolt Material
SA-193 B7
SBO
25000.00
psi
SBA
25000.00
psi
FOD
113.6250
in.
FID
112.6250
in.
1, Code Sketch 1a
GOD
113.6250
in.
GID
112.6250
in.
3.75
10000.00
Gasket Factor, m,
Gasket Design Seating Stress
Column for Gasket Seating
psi
2, Code Column II
Gasket Thickness
.1250
SIDE
in.
CHANNEL
70.00
ASME TUBE SHEET RESULTS PER APP. AA, 1995 WITH A-97 :
RN = (GODC-GIDC) / 2.0
.500
in.
B0 = RN / 2.0
.250
in.
BE = B0
.250
in.
113.125
in.
888640.80
lb.
Shell
23-22
- TEMA
: TP304
.9608E-05 / deg F
.2505E+08 psi
Discussion of Results
Channel
- TEMA
: TP304
.9608E-05 / deg F
.2505E+08 psi
Tubes
- TEMA
: TP304
.9608E-05 / deg F
.2505E+08 psi
TubeSheet - TEMA
: TP304
.9608E-05 / deg F
.2505E+08 psi
a = rc + d* / 4
a = 55.2813 + .6668 / 4
a = 55.4480 in.
Au = 2 * rc * wu
Au = 2 * 55.2813 * .0000
Au = .0000 in.^2
x = * a^2 - Au
x = 3.14159 * 55.4480^2 - .0000
x = 9658.7590 in.^2
P = P * SQRT( 1 + Au/x )
P = 1.3500 * SQRT( 1 + .0000/ 9658.76 )
P = 1.3500 in.
ETA = 1 - d* / P
ETA = 1 - .6668 / 1.3500
ETA = .5061
K = b/a
K = 56.1250/ 55.4480
K = 1.0122
Kbar = a1/a
Kbar = 58.1250/ 55.4480
Kbar = 1.0483
Kc = ac/a
Kc = 56.5625/ 55.4480
Kc = 1.0201
XI = 2/n*(b/d)(hs/t)(1/(1-t/d))*(Es/Et)
XI = 2 / 3100 *( 56.1250 / .7500 )( .2500 / .0490 ) *
23-23
Discussion of Results
s = 1.285/SQRT( b * hs )
s = 1.285/SQRT( 56.1250 * .2500 )
s = .3430 ( = 0.0 if Gasketed )
c = 1.285/SQRT( ac * hc )
c = 1.285/SQRT( 56.5625 * .2500 )
c = .0000 ( = 0.0 if Gasketed )
J = 1/( 1 + ( 2**b*Es*hs)/Sj*L )
J = 1/(1+(2**56.1250*25054998*.2500)/49250*152.25)
J = .0034 ( = 1.0 if No Exp. Joint )
Lambdat = .3/2(d/t)*(1-2t/d)+a^2/(ndt(1-t/d)) *
[1-nd^2/(4a^2)(1-4t/d+4t^2/d^2)]
Lambdat = .3/2(.7500/.0490)*(1-2*.0490/.7500)+55.4480^2/
(3100*.7500*.0490*(1-.0490/.7500))*
[1-3100*.7500^2/(4*55.4480^2)
(1-4*.0490/.7500+4.0490^2/.7500^2)]
Lambdat = 27.7752
Qe = J(t*Tt-s*Ts)+J*Lambdas(Ps/Es)
Xa = 2.161(n*Et*t(d-t)/(e*E*L*a)^.25 * (a/h)^.75
Xa = 2.161(3100*25054998*.0490(.7500-.0490)/
(.6087*25054998*152.25*55.4480)^.25*(55.4480/1.8125)^.75
Xa = 10.6654
Mu = 2.198/(E*h^3)[s*hs^3*Es*b(1+s*h+s^2*h^2/2)
+ c*hc^3*Ec*ac*(1+c*h+c^2*h^2/2)]
Mu = 2.198/(25054998*1.8125^3)[.3430*0^3*25054998*56.1250
(1+.3430*1.8125+.3430^2*1.8125^2/2)+.0000*.2500^3*
23-24
Discussion of Results
25054998*56.5625*(1+.0000*1.8125+.0000^2*1.8125^2/2)]
Mu = .2016
Gammabs = s^2*hs^2*K^3(1+s*h)/5.46
Gammabs = .3430^2*.2500^2*1.0122^3(1+.3430*1.8125)/5.46
Gammabs = .0023
Gammabt = c^2*hc^2*Kc^3(1+c*h)/5.46
Gammabt = .0000^2*.2500^2*1.0201^3(1+.0000*1.8125)/5.46
Gammabt = .0000
Gammat = 0.25*(Kc^2-1)(Kc+1)-0.5(Kc^3-K)+Gammabt
Gammat = 0.25*(1.0201^2-1)(1.0201+1)-0.5(1.0201^3-1.0122)+.0000
Gammat = -.0041
.143346
Zv*Xa/Xa =
.008752
Q1 = (K-1-*Zv)/( 1 + *Zm )
Q1 = ( 1.0122-1- .3719* .0088)/( 1 + .3719* .1433 )
Q1 = .0085
23-25
Discussion of Results
Q2 = (a^2(Pt*Gammat+P*t*Gammabt+Ps*Gammas-P*Gammabs)+B*dundb*Gammab)/
( 1 + *Zm )
Q2 = (55.4480^2(50.00*-.0041+11.1724*.0000+50.00
*-.002226.2721*.0023)+2465*57.3750*-.0147)/(1+.3719*.1433)
Q2 = -2719.0950
8.351214
QZ2 =
65.097820
Q3 = Q1 + Q2/(Pea^2/2)
Q3 = .0085 + -2719.1/( -76999)
Q3 = .0438
.039082
23-26
.044
Discussion of Results
Xa
QZ1* =
Pe
10.665
10.300
-50.090
psi
qt = Pe * QZ1*
qt = -50.09 * 10.3001
qt = -515.9258 psi
ft = 1 - (nd^2)/(4a^2)[1-2t/d]^2
ft = 1-(3100*.7500^2)/(4*55.4480^2)[1-2*.0490/.7500]^2
ft = .8928
55.4480^2/(3100*.0490*.7500(1-.0490/.7500))*
(50.00*.8582-50.00*.8928515.9258)
= 14846.4700 psi
23-27
Discussion of Results
HREQ
.9680
in.
HH
1.8125
in.
.8857
in.
5.1250
in.
1602.0910
lb.
TubeForce Allowed
1019.7550
lb.
Actual
TF
23-28
&KDSWHU
The Half-Pipe Module
Introduction
The PVElite Half-Pipe Module performs pressure calculations for half-pipe jackets
attached to cylindrical shells using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
24-1
24-2
Enter the Shell Section ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Half-Pipe Section Description
Enter the inside diameter of the shell or head. The value entered should be the uncorroded
dimension of the inside diameter. This analysis is only valid for cylindrical shells, therefore, inputting inside diameter values for torispherical, elliptical, spherical, or conical
heads will produce erroneous results.
Thickness of Shell
Enter the thickness of the shell used to withstand the internal pressure. This thickness
value will be tested to see if it can withstand both the internal shell pressure and the externally applied jacket pressure.
Internal Pressure in Shell
Enter the internal design pressure used in the vessel analysis. This value will be used as an
initial check on the required thickness of the shell. The value entered should be a positive
value, i.e. 14.7 psia.
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update material properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible
to update them for the given temperature.
Shell Section Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
24-3
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This will be
the efficiency of the longitudinal seam in the cylindrical shell. Please be sure to refer to
Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket
Enter the nominal pipe size of the half-pipe jacket. The pipe size entered must lie within
the range of values supported in ASME Section VIII, Div. 1, Appendix EE. The supported
sizes range between NPS 2 inch and NPS 4 inch.
If working in SI units, the proper conversion values must be entered. For example, if
working with a NPS 50 pipe, the corresponding SI value of 5.08 cm must be entered. The
following table lists the accepted values for the NPS.
English
Input NPS
NPS
2.0 in
2.5 in
3.0 in
3.5 in
4.0 in
50658090100-
SI
PVElite Input
5.08 cm
6.35 cm
7.62 cm
8.89 cm
10.16 cm
Enter the radius of the formed half-pipe. This value will be used rather than the standard
nominal pipe sizes.
Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket
Enter the thickness of the jacket used to withstand the internal pressure. If the thickness
value of the jacket is not adequate to withstand the internal pressure, an acceptable thickness will be determined. Therefore, if the program is used for design purposes, enter a
minimal value for jacket thickness. The program will determine an appropriate pipe
schedule through iteration.
It is important to note that the program selected pipe schedules include a standard mill tolerance of 0.875 (a reduction of 12.5%). This tolerance will not, however, be included in
24-4
the user input value of thickness. This allows users to include their own mill tolerance in
their input value, without having this value further adjusted.
Design Pressure in Jacket
Enter the internal design pressure used in the half-pipe jacket analysis. This value will be
used to determine the required thickness of both the shell and the jacket. The value entered
should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psia.
Design Temperature for Jacket Pressure
Enter the temperature associated with the internal jacket pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update material properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible
to update them for the given temperature.
Jacket Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Jacket Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
24-5
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
Shell Thickness Calculations
The first calculation the Half-Pipe Module performs is the required thickness of the shell
due to the internal pressure. This value of required thickness is calculated using Equation
1 from Paragraph UG-27 of the ASME Code. The corroded value of thickness is used in
this calculation. Because the exterior of the shell wall is also used as the internal half-pipe
jacket wall (see Figure 24A), both the corrosion allowance of the shell and the corrosion
allowance of the jacket must be accounted for. Both the calculation and the result are displayed in this section of the output.
Once the required thickness due to inside pressure is determined, the required thickness
due to the external pressure (jacket pressure) is determined and displayed. This value is
obtained through the pressure calculations discussed in the next section.
Pressure Calculations for Input Shell Thickness
The calculations displayed in this section of the output are the external (jacket) pressure
calculations, performed using the input value of shell thickness. The first step in the pressure calculations is to determine the K-factor from the appropriate chart. The chart is
selected based on the Nominal Pipe Size of the jacket and the K-factor is a factor of the
shell inside diameter and the shell thickness. Both the chart and K-factor are displayed in
the output. As stated earlier, for Nominal Pipe Size 2.5 or 3.5, an iteration is performed
between the charts to obtain the K-factor. When this is the case, the output will display the
two charts from which the iteration was performed.
The next step in the external pressure calculations is to determine the longitudinal stress.
This calculation accounts for the corrosion allowance by using a corroded value of the
shell inside radius, as well as the corroded value of the shell thickness. Using the longitudinal stress and the previously determined K-factor, the permissible jacket pressure is
determined using Equation 1, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. The permissible jacket pressure is considered the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure for the input shell thickness, and it is compared to the input jacket design pressure.
Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations
The input jacket thickness is tested to see if it is adequate to withstand the internal pressure
of the jacket. The calculation is based on Equation 2, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. As in
previous calculations, the corrosion allowance is included in the thickness calculation. If
the input thickness is not adequate, the program iterates for an appropriate pipe thickness.
The iteration begins with Schedule 5S pipe and continues on until an acceptable schedule
is found.
As mentioned in the Discussion of Input section, the program selected pipe schedule is
adjusted by a standard mill tolerance value (0.875). The user input value of thickness,
however, does not use the mill tolerance adjustment. In the event that the input thickness is
not adequate, both the selected pipe schedule and the adjusted thickness are displayed in
the output.
Minimum Fillet Weld Size Calculations
As mentioned in Paragraph EE-1, The fillet weld attaching the half-pipe jacket to the vessel shall have a throat thickness not less than the smaller of the jacket or shell thickness.
24-6
Discussion of Results
Therefore, the program selects the smaller of the two thicknesses, multiplies by a weld
factor (1.414), and uses this value as the minimum fillet weld size. The output report indicates which of the two thicknesses that the calculation was based upon.
Summary of Results
The first values displayed in the summary section are the shell thickness values. The echo
of the input thickness is displayed along with the results of the two required thickness calculations. The comparison of these results provides a quick check of whether the thickness
of the shell is governed by the internal or external pressure. The next three displayed values are the jacket pressure results. The input design pressure is shown along with the
MAWP for both the input thickness and the required thickness. The next displayed values
are those of the half-pipe jacket thickness. The input thickness is shown along with the
required thickness. Additionally, if the input thickness is not adequate, the thickness
selected by the program is displayed. Finally, the minimum fillet weld size is shown.
24-7
Example Problem
Example Problem
The example problem is taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix
EE. The Code example problem asks to find the required thickness of a cylindrical shell
subjected to an inside pressure of 190 psi and a half-pipe jacket pressure of 300 psi. The
ID of the shell is 40 inches, the allowable stress of the shell is 16,000 psi, the joint efficiency is 1.0, the half-pipe jacket is NPS 3, the allowable stress of the jacket is 12,000 psi,
and there is no corrosion allowance.
FileName : CHECKS
-----------------------------
1,
ITEM:
Page
04:56pm,
DIN
40.0000
in.
TS
.3125
in.
190.00
psig
716.67
16000.00
psi
SA
17500.00
psi
CA
.0000
in.
1.00
NPS
3.0000
in.
TJCK
.0730
in.
P1
300.00
psig
800.00
05/18/98
SA-516 70
1,
SA-516 70
S1
12000.00
psi
S1A
17500.00
psi
CAJ
.0000
in.
24-8
Example Problem
Reqd Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness per App. EE-1, Eqn. (2) (Includes CA):
T = ( P1 * R ) / ( .85 * S1 - .6 * P1 ) + CAJ
T = ( 300.0000 * 1.6770 ) / ( .85 * 12000.00 - .6 * 300.0000 ) + .0000
T = .0502 in.
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
.3125
in.
.2392
in.
.2813
in.
300.0000
psig
385.3765
psig
323.8394
psig
.0730
in.
.0502
in.
.1180
in.
24-9
Example Problem
24-10
&KDSWHU
The Large Opening Module
Introduction
The PVElite Large Opening Module calculates the stresses and their allowables which act
on integrally attached flat heads that have a large centrally located opening. This program
is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and Appendix 14 of the
2001 Code, A-2001.
25-1
Figure 25A shows the geometry for an attached nozzle. Figure 25B shows the geometry
for an opening without an attached nozzle.
Figure 25A
Figure 25B
25-2
Enter the Flange ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Opening Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. It is however
printed on output reports. This field should be meaningful to the item you are analyzing.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for this flange. This value will be used to look up the stress
values for the material you have chosen from the material tables.
Design Internal Pressure
Enter the design internal pressure for this flange. The pressure is used to compute the
forces which act on the inside of the flange. One such example would be the hydrostatic
end force. Note that only positive (internal) pressures are considered.
Flat Head Thickness
Enter the thickness of the plate to be used to construct the flat head.
Opening Inside Diameter
Enter the Inside Diameter (Bn) of the Opening here. Appendix 14 states that the opening
should be centrally located in the flat head. The diameter of the opening should also be
greater than 1/2 of the flange outside diameter. If your opening does not meet these criteria, do not use this module to analyze the opening.
Flat Head Outside Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flat head. This is the dimension A as it appears in Appendix
14. It is normally the shell outside diameter.
Shell Side Hub Thickness, Small End
Enter the thickness of the shell. This is referred to as value g0 in the ASME code. PVElite
will use this value to compute the shell inside diameter Bs.
Shell Side Hub Thickness, Large End
Enter the Large End hub thickness on the shell side. This value is g1 in the ASME Code.
This will typically be the leg dimension of the weld which attaches the flat head to the
shell.
Shell Side Hub Length
Enter the length of the Hub on the shell side of the flange. This will usually be the length
of the weld leg. The ASME Code refers to this as dimension h (shell). The hub length and
25-3
other hub dimensions g1 and g0 are used to determine the flange stress factors from
Appendix 2.
Corrosion Allowance
If your specification includes a corrosion allowance enter it here. PVElite corrects all
dimensions such as the flange ID, and all hub thicknesses for the effect of corrosion. The
CA cannot be greater than any of the entered shell hub or flange thickness dimensions.
This will be flagged as an error.
Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Material Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head enter the hub thickness here. If there is no nozzle attached, then enter a 0.0 here. This dimension will usually be the nozzle neck thickness. This dimension is referred to as g0 for the nozzle.
Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Large End
If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head enter the hub thickness of the large end. If
there is no nozzle attached, enter a 0.0 . This dimension will usually be the weld leg
dimension. This dimension is referred to as g1 for the nozzle.
Nozzle Side Hub Length
If there is a nozzle attached to the flat head enter the hub length here. If there is no nozzle
attached, enter a 0.0 . This dimension will usually be the weld leg dimension. This dimension is referred to as h for the nozzle.
25-4
Example Problem
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS
------------------------------
ITEM:
4,
Design Temperature
Page
4,
05:04pm,
05/18/98
TEMP
300.00
Design Pressure
225.00
psig
2.5000
in.
13.2500
in.
24.0000
in.
SG0
.3750
in.
SG1
.3750
in.
5.0000
in.
.0000
in.
FCOR
SA-516 70
SFO
17500.00
psi
SFA
17500.00
psi
NG0
.3750
in.
NG1
.3750
in.
NHL
5.0000
in.
25-5
Example Problem
K =
1.811
T =
1.580
U =
3.779
Y =
3.439
Z =
1.877
H0 = SQRT(B*GZERO)
2.229 in.
Hub Ratio,
HRAT = HBLNG / H0
2.243
Thickness Ratio,
GRAT = (GONE/GZERO)
1.000
.908
.542
1.000
d =
2.185 in.^3
e =
Stress Factors
.407 in.^-1
ALPHA =
2.018
BETA =
2.358
GAMMA =
1.278
DELTA =
7.151
LAMBDA =
8.429
25-6
H0 = SQRT(B*GZERO)
HRAT = HBLNG / H0
2.976 in.
1.680
Example Problem
Thickness Ratio,
GRAT = (GONE/GZERO)
1.000
.909
.547
1.000
d =
2.891 in.^3
e =
.305 in.^-1
The X1 Factor
X1 = ( Mo - Mh( 1 + Ft/ho ) ) / Mo
X1 = ( 310557 - 22817 ( 1 + .9086 * 2.5000 / 2.9765 ) ) / 310557
X1 = .8705
.64*F*Z1*Mh/(Bs*ho*t)
25-7
Example Problem
Long.
Hub
Radial
Tangential
Head/Shell
Allowed
Opening
Allowed
13357
26250
17212
26250
psi
605
17500
913
17500
psi
5567
17500
9732
17500
psi
343.133
psig
245.2
lb.
2.0640
in.
25-8
&KDSWHU
The Rectangular Vessel Module
Introduction
The PVElite Rectangular Vessel Module performs internal pressure calculations for rectangular vessels using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
Fig. 13-2 (a)(1) -Vessel with equal long-side and short-side thickness. (Figure 26A)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(7) -Rectangular vessel with single stay plate/row of bars. (Figure 26F)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(8)-Rectangular vessel with two stay plates/rows of bars. (Figure 26G)
Fig. 13-2 (b)(3) - Obround vessel with single stay plate/row of bars. (Figure 26J)
Fig. 13-2 (c)(1)-Circular vessel with single diametral plate. (Figure 26K)
The program first performs ligament efficiency calculations for those vessels with holes in
the side plates. The membrane and bending ligament efficiencies are used to adjust the
stress calculations at the mid-side of the plates. The ligament efficiency calculations are
based on section 13-6, and are performed for both uniform and multi diameter hole patterns.
Once the ligament efficiencies are determined, the individual stress calculations are performed. Membrane, bending, and total stress calculations are performed as prescribed by
26-1
the Code in Sections 13-7 through 13-13. These stresses are compared to their allowables,
and a highest percentage of allowable calculation is performed.
The final calculation performed by the Rectangular Vessel module is the Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure calculation. The program computes a M.A.W.P. for all three
types of stresses (Membrane, Bending, and Total). Additionally, depending on the specific
geometry of those vessels stayed by bars, an additional M.A.W.P. is computed per Equation 2 of UG-47.
The Rectangular Vessel module takes full account of corrosion allowance. The program
uses the corroded condition for all dimensions in its calculations. The only exception is the
reinforcement calculations. The reinforcing member is assumed to be entered in its corroded state.
Figure 26A - Rectangular vessel with equivalent long side thickness (Type A1)
26-2
Figure 26B - Rectangular vessel with different long side thickness (Type A2)
26-3
26-4
26-5
26-6
Figure 26J - Obround vessel stayed by stay plate/stay bars (Type B3 or B3-B)
26-7
Figure 26K - Circular vessel stayed by single diametral plate (Type C1)
26-8
Enter the Rectangular Vessel ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or
numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Rectangular Vessel Description
Enter the Internal Design Pressure. The internal design pressure is a required entry. For
vessel type C1 (Figure 26K), this is the entry for P1. If analyzing vessel type C1 be aware
that the P1 value is associated with only one of the two chambers. If both chambers are
operating at the same pressure, then an equal value must be entered for P2.
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The PVElite program
will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change
the design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible
to update them for the given temperature.
Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Material Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
26-9
Enter the yield stress for this material. The ASME Code, Section II Part D lists the yield
stress for the material at ambient temperature. For many kinds of analysis, this is the
appropriate value to enter. If you need to use the yield stress at design temperature, you
can probably find it in the ASME Code, Section II Part D.
If analyzing a reinforced vessel this is a required entry for both the shell material and the
reinforcement material. These entries are used in determining an allowable stress for both
bending and total stresses, and if this entry is left blank, the program will assume zero for
the allowable stress.
Figure Number for Type of Vessel
Enter the ID of the type of rectangular vessel to be analyzed. The possible ID types are as
follows:
ID
Figure
Vessel Type
A1
Figure 26A
A2
Figure 26B
A3
Figure 26C
A4
Figure 26D
A5
Figure 26E
A6
Figure 26EE
A7
Figure 26F
A7-B
Figure 26F
A8
Figure 26G
A8-B
Figure 26G
B1
Figure 26H
Obround vessel
B2
Figure 26I
B3
Figure 26J
B3-B
Figure 26J
C1
Figure 26K
Enter the design length of the short-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the
particular vessel being analyzed.
For Figure:
26-10
A1 H
A2 H
A3 L1
A4 H
A5 L3
A6 L3
A7 h
A7-Bh
A8 h
A8-Bh
B1 2R
B2 2R
B3 2R
B3-B2R
Enter the minimum thickness of the short-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a
required entry for all vessel types. For those vessels that the Code specifies a single thickness (A3 and C1), the short-side thickness is used for both t1 and t2.
Joint Efficiency for Welded Seams
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency
value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The midside joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead,
the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Please be sure to
refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
Typical values are
0.70 No - Radiography
If the plate has uniform or multi diameter holes, check this field in order to enter the pitch,
diameter, and depth parameters. Ligament efficiency calculations will be performed in
order to adjust the calculated actual stress values.
Type of Reinforcement
Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel.
When a reinforced vessel is selected, the first responses are those of the pitch distance and
the delta value.
26-11
Enter the design length of the long-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the
particular vessel being analyzed.
For Figure:
A1 h
A2 h
A3 L2
A4 h
A5 L4
Half-length of long-side
A6 L4
A7 h
A7-Bh
A8 h
A8-Bh
B1 L2
B2 L2
B3 L2
B3-BL2
Enter the minimum thickness of the long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel.
Per Appendix 13, vessels A3 and C1 (Figure 26C and 26K, respectively) are assumed to
have equivalent long and short-side thickness. Thus, the long-side thickness is not a
required entry for these two vessel types.
Minimum Thickness of End Plate
Enter the minimum thickness of the end plate. If a valid thickness is entered, the end plate
will be analyzed per UG-34. If the thickness value is entered as zero, or left blank, no calculations will be performed on the end plate.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the appropriate corrosion allowance. The program adjusts the actual thickness and
the inside diameter of the vessel, and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter
of the stay plate/bar.
C Factor for End Closure Plate/Vessel Head
The C Factor is used in the equation to compute the required thickness of welded end
plates. Typical values are 0.2 or 0.3. See UG-34 for details.
26-12
Enter the design external pressure for figure A1 or A2 if you wish to have the external
pressure calculations performed. When entered external pressure stress calculations as
well as vessel stability calculations will be performed.
Modulus of Elasticity
If an external pressure has been input, enter the Elastic Modulus of the material from Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature.
Length of Vessel
Enter the minimum thickness of the 2nd long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel.
This entry is only used in the analysis of vessel A2 (Figure 26B). Appendix 13 allows vessels of this type to have differing long-side thickness. If analyzing a type A2 vessel this is
a required entry.
Radius of Corner Section
Enter the radius of the corner section for vessels A3 and A5. The program assumes each of
the corner sections to have equivalent radii.
Pitch Distance Between Reinforcement
Enter the maximum pitch distance between reinforcing members. This value must be
greater than or equal to the width of the reinforcing member.
C-Factor
26-13
Material
English
Carbon Steel
6000
Austinitic SS
5840
Ni-Cr-Fe
6180
Ni-Fe-Cr
6030
Aluminum
3560
Nickel Copper
5720
Unalloyed Titanium 4490
SI
15754.54
15334.42
16227.17
15833.31
9347.69
15019.33
11789.65
Enter the unreinforced length dimension for figure A6. This dimension is L11 for the
short-side and L21 for the long-side.
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T3)
Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a
stayed vessel.
This is a required entry if analyzing type A7, A7-B, A8, A8-B, B3, or B3-B.
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T4)
Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a
stayed vessel.
This is a required entry if analyzing type A8, or A8-B.
Is the Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate?
If you do not check this box, PVElite will perform the end plate calculations based on the
entire long-side length. If you do check this box, the program will use the dimensions of
the compartment formed by the stay plate.
Pitch Distance Between Bars
Enter the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or
equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars.
Vessel Radius
Enter the internal pressure of the 2nd compartment in vessel C1. You must enter an internal design pressure that is less than or equal to P1. In the event that the two compartments
have equivalent pressure, the value entered for P2 must equal the value entered for P1. If
left blank, a value of zero is used for P2.
Center to Center Distance Between Poles
Enter the maximum pitch distance between holes in the side plates of the vessel being analyzed. This pitch distance is shown in Figure 26L.
This value must be greater than the hole diameter.
26-14
Diameter of Hole
Enter the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the
hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure
26L. The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size.
Depth of Hole
Enter the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole
is of uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure 26L.
The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness.
Type of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the distance from the outer surface of the vessel to the outermost point on the reinforcing bar or beam.
Width of Reinforcing Member
Enter the width of the reinforcing member. This value is the distance that the reinforcement remains in contact with the vessel wall.
This value cannot be greater than the reinforcement pitch, as that would indicate that the
reinforcement if overlapping.
Length of Reinforcing Member
For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforcement.
No entry is required for other vessel types.
26-15
Enter the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as reinforcement.
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member
Enter the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcement,
in the direction parallel to the surface of the vessel.
Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel
Enter the distance from the surface of the vessel to the centroid of the reinforcing ring.
This distance should be measured normal to the vessel surface.
Length of Reinforcing Member
For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforcement. No entry is required for other vessel types.
In all cases the program includes the vessel wall in the calculation of the moment of inertia.
26-16
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
Ligament Efficiency Calculations
When the side plates have uniform or multi diameter holes, ligament efficiency calculations are performed according to Section 13-6. For the case of uniform diameter holes, the
ligament efficiency factors em and eb for membrane and bending stresses, respectively, are
considered to be the same. In the case of multi diameter holes (see Figure 26L), the neutral
axis of the ligament may no longer be at mid thickness of the plate; in this case, for bending loads, the stress is higher at one of the plate surfaces than at the other surface.
If the calculated values of em and eb are lower than the entered midpoint joint efficiencies,
the calculated stress values are divided by these calculated ligament efficiencies. It is
important to note that if the stresses have been adjusted by the ligament efficiencies, then
the calculations for the allowable stresses will assume an E value of 1.0. This avoids incorrectly increasing the stress values while decreasing the allowables at the same time.
Reinforcement Calculations
The reinforcement calculations performed for vessels A4, A5, and B2 (Figures 26D, 26E,
and 26I), are discussed in section 13-8. The rectangular vessel program only addresses
those vessels in which the reinforcement on opposite side plates have the same moment of
inertia. Additionally, the reinforcement for vessels A4 and B2 is assumed to be continuous, while A5 is assumed to be non-continuous.
The first reinforcement calculation is that of the maximum pitch between reinforcing
member center lines. Equation 1 of UG-47 is used to set a basic maximum distance. Using
this maximum value, equations (1a)-(1d) in Section 13-8 are used to obtain a maximum
value for both the long and short-side plates. The minimum calculated value shall be considered the maximum distance between reinforcement center lines. In addition to the
above calculations, the geometry of the reinforcement must be checked. Specifically, the
width of the reinforcing members cannot physically exceed the pitch.
Once the pitch is determined, the moment of inertia of the composite section (shell and
reinforcement) is determined by the Area-Moment method. The moment of inertia calculations are performed for locations where the plate is in compression, and then also performed for locations where the plate is in tension. Equation (2) of Section 13-8 is used to
calculate the maximum width of the shell plate which can be used to compute the effective
moments of the composite section at locations where the shell plate is in compression. At
locations where the shell plate is in tension, an effective width equal to the actual pitch
distance is used in the computations.
Stress Calculations
The stress calculations are performed for membrane, bending, and total stresses. The calculations are performed for both the inner and outer surface of the long and short-side
plates. These actual stress values are displayed along with their allowables in tabular form.
A positive (+) stress indicates tensile stress, while a negative (-) stress indicates compressive stress.
As previously discussed, the calculated values for the membrane and bending stresses are
adjusted by the ligament efficiency calculations if em and eb are less than the joint efficiency E. At the mid-side locations, the stresses are increased by dividing the calculated
value by the membrane or bending ligament efficiency. In the event that the plates have
26-17
Discussion of Results
holes but the ligament efficiencies are higher than the joint efficiency E, there is no adjustment to the stress calculations, rather the allowables are adjusted by the value E.
Calculations performed on stay plates/bars are membrane stresses, and these stresses are
used in the M.A.W.P. calculations for membrane stresses. Computation of the stresses on
end plates is performed if a thickness value for the end plate is input. The calculations are
performed per UG-34 with a C factor entered by the user. These stresses are not used in
the computation of the MAWP.
Allowable Calculations
Membrane stresses are in general compared to the adjusted allowable stress, SE. Note that
for reinforced members the program compares the membrane stress to the lower of the
plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress. Note also that when there are holes in the
side, the joint efficiency may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculation as necessary.
Bending stresses and total stresses are in general compared to 1.5 times the adjusted
allowable stress, SE. Note that for reinforced members the program compares the actual
stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress, and also to the
lower of 2/3 times the plate yield stress or beam yield stress. It chooses the lowest of these
four combinations as the allowable for reinforced cases. Note also that when there are
holes in the side, the joint efficiency at the mid-side may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculations as necessary.
Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations
After performing the actual stress calculation and computing the allowable stresses at all
locations, the program computes the highest stress/allowable ratio for each of the three
stress types. The program displays the highest percentage of the allowable used, and the
actual stress value that this percentage relates to.
MAWP Calculations
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for each of the three stress types.
The computation of the M.A.W.P. is performed by setting the stress equations equal to the
allowables, and solving for P. The minimum computed P value is considered to be the
maximum allowable working pressure for the particular stress type.
When analyzing vessels A7-B or A8-B (Figures 26G and 26H stayed by bars), an additional pressure rating is computed. If the long-side height is greater than the pitch of the
stay bars, then a pressure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with the long-side
height substituted for the pitch. If this value of pressure is less than the previously calculated M.A.W.P.s, then this becomes the vessel pressure rating. Similarly for vessel B3-B
(Figure 26J stayed by bars), if (L2 + R/2) is greater than the pitch, then an additional pressure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with (L2 + R/2) substituted for the pitch.
External Pressure Calculations
External pressure calculations are performed on vessel A1 and A2 if the user has entered a
value for external pressure. These calculations are performed per Appendix 13, Section
13-14. First, the external pressure is substituted for internal pressure, and the calculations
discussed previously are performed again. Next, the four side plates and the end plates are
26-18
Discussion of Results
checked for stability per equation (1) of 13-14(b). Finally, the entire cross section is
checked for column stability in accordance with equation (1) from paragraph 13-14(c).
26-19
Example Problems
Example Problems
Example problem 1 analyzes vessel type A1 (Figure 26A). This vessel has holes in the two
long-side plates, and uses the ligament efficiency calculations. This is the Code example
problem 13-17(a).
Rectangular Vessels Per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix 13
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
ITEM:
1,
05:15pm,
05/18/98
Description: EXAMPLE A1
1,
A1
115.0000
psig
Temp
650.0000
17500.0000
psi
SA
17500.0000
psi
Sy
.0000
psi
Design Temperature
SA-516 70
6.0000
in.
t1
.6250
in.
.8000
EC
.8000
13.5000
in.
t2
1.0000
in.
.8000
t5
.5000
in.
3.7500
in.
d0
1.5000
in.
Depth of Holes
T0
1.0000
in.
Long-side Plate # 2,
Pitch Distance
# 1: Hole Diameter
Hole Depth
# 2: Hole Diameter
Hole Depth
3.7500
in.
d0
1.7500
in.
T0
.6250
in.
d1
1.2500
in.
T1
.3750
in.
26-20
Example Problems
t1, I1
= .0203 in**4
Thickness
t2, I2
= .0833 in**4
Eb
Ci
Short-side 1
.800
.800
.313
-.313
.800
.800
.313
-.313
.600
.600
.500
-.500
.583
.564
.473
-.527
Long-side
Co
H / h
= .4444
= (I2/I1)*Alpha = 1.8204
MEMBRANE STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Actual
Allowable
Short-side 1
1242.00
14000.00
Short-side 2
1242.00
14000.00
Short-side Corner
1242.00
14000.00
Long-side
1 at A
575.00
17500.00
Long-side
2 at A
591.43
17500.00
345.00
14000.00
Long-side Corner
BENDING STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Inner
Outer
Allowable
Short-side 1 at N
4983.24
-4983.24
21000.00
at Q
12932.04
-12932.04
21000.00
Short-side 2 at N
4983.24
-4983.24
21000.00
at Q
12932.04
-12932.04
21000.00
1 at M
-17779.14
17779.14
26250.00
at Q
5051.58
-5051.58
21000.00
2 at M
-17909.12
19936.57
26250.00
at Q
4780.96
-5322.20
21000.00
Long-side
Long-side
TOTAL STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Inner
Outer
Allowable
Short-side 1 at N
6225.24
-3741.24
21000.00
at Q
14174.04
-11690.04
21000.00
Short-side 2 at N
6225.24
-3741.24
21000.00
at Q
14174.04
-11690.04
21000.00
Long-side 1 at M
at Q
Long-side
18354.14
26250.00
5396.58
-4706.58
21000.00
2 at M
-17317.69
20527.99
26250.00
at Q
5125.96
-4977.20
21000.00
-17204.14
Actual
7728.00
Allowable
17500.00
26-21
Example Problems
1242.00
8.87
1296.30
psi
%
psig
19936.57
75.95
151.42
psi
%
psig
20527.99
78.20
147.06
psi
%
psig
26-22
Example Problems
Example problem 2 analyzes vessel type A4 (Figure 26D). This reinforced vessel is the
Code example problem 13-17(d).
Rectangular Vessels Per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix 13
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
ITEM:
4,
05:15pm,
05/18/98
Description: EXAMPLE A4
4,
A4
15.0000
Temp
400.0000
13800.0000
psi
SA
13800.0000
psi
Sy
25700.0000
psi
Design Temperature
psig
F
SA-285 C
61.6250
in.
t1
.3750
in.
.8500
EC
1.0000
83.6250
in.
t2
.3750
in.
.8500
Sr
14500.0000
psi
SA
14500.0000
psi
Sy
30800.0000
psi
14.0000
in.
SA-36
2.1000
6000.0000
3.6100
21.8000
sq.in.
in**4
6.0000
in.
3.0000
in.
7.0000
in.
5.3400
sq.in.
26-23
Example Problems
56.9000
in**4
8.0000
in.
4.0000
in.
7.0000
in.
4, Description: EXAMPLE A4
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS:
Maximum Distance B/W Reinforcing Member (Eq.(1) of UG-47):
p = 16.4829 in.
= 2.0261
BETA = 5.0734
J
= 2.0000
Max Pitch Values for Long and Short-side Based on Equations (1a)-(1d)
from Section 13-8:
Short-side p1 = 16.1904 in.
Long-side
p2 = 16.0857 in.
Ap = 5.2500 sq.in.
Il = .0615 in**4
Co
1.4862
-4.8888
in Tension
1.4862
-4.8888
in Compression
2.2990
-6.0760
in Tension
2.2990
-6.0760
Short-side, in Compression
Long-side,
26-24
Example Problems
H1 / h1
= .7787
MEMBRANE STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Actual
Allowable
Short-side 1
991.04
11730.00
Short-side 2
991.04
11730.00
Short-side Corner
991.04
13800.00
Long-side
1 at A
611.01
11730.00
Long-side
2 at A
611.01
11730.00
611.01
13800.00
Long-side Corner
BENDING STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Outer
Allowable
Short-side 1 at N
-291.75
959.65
17133.33
at Q
3106.81
-10219.35
17133.33
Short-side 2 at N
-291.75
959.65
17133.33
at Q
3106.81
-10219.35
17133.33
1 at M
-2055.69
5432.82
17133.33
at Q
2026.58
-5355.88
17133.33
2 at M
-2055.69
5432.82
17133.33
at Q
2026.58
-5355.88
17133.33
Long-side
Long-side
TOTAL STRESSES:
Inner
STRESS LOCATIONS
Inner
Short-side 1 at N
699.30
1950.69
17133.33
at Q
4097.85
-9228.31
17133.33
Short-side 2 at N
699.30
1950.69
17133.33
at Q
4097.85
-9228.31
17133.33
1 at M
-1444.68
6043.83
17133.33
at Q
2637.59
-4744.87
17133.33
2 at M
-1444.68
6043.83
17133.33
at Q
2637.59
-4744.87
17133.33
Long-side
Long-side
Outer
Allowable
18487.50 psi
18487.50 psi
Long-side
1 at M, outer allowable
18487.50 psi
Long-side
2 at M, outer allowable
18487.50 psi
20533.33 psi
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
991.04
8.45
177.54
psi
%
psig
26-25
Example Problems
-10219.35
psi
59.65
25.15
psig
-9228.31
psi
53.86
27.85
psig
26-26
Example Problems
Example problem 3 analyzes vessel type A7 (Figure 26F). This vessel which is stayed by a
single plate is a COADE generated example problem.
Rectangular Vessels Per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix 13
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
ITEM:
5,
05:15pm,
05/18/98
Description: EXAMPLE A5
5,
A5
20.0000
Temp
500.0000
17500.0000
psi
SA
17500.0000
psi
Sy
30800.0000
psi
L3
25.0000
in.
t1
.7500
in.
1.0000
EC
1.0000
L4
30.0000
in.
t2
1.0000
in.
1.0000
7.5000
Sr
17500.0000
psi
SA
17500.0000
psi
Sy
30800.0000
psi
7.0000
in.
2.1000
6000.0000
Design Temperature
psig
F
SA-515 70
in.
SA-515 70
3.0000
in.
14.0000
in.
.7500
in.
26-27
Example Problems
3.0000
in.
18.0000
in.
.7500
in.
5, Description: EXAMPLE A5
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS:
Maximum Distance B/W Reinforcing Member (Eq.(1) of UG-47):
p = 32.1496 in.
= 4.2489
BETA = 1.3997
J
= 3.3196
Max Pitch Values for Long and Short-side Based on Equations (1a)-(1d)
from Section 13-8:
Short-side p1 = 45.7300 in.
Long-side
p2 = 53.8952 in.
Ap = 7.0000 sq.in.
Il = .5833 in**4
Long-side,
26-28
Co
.9375
-2.8125
in Tension
.9375
-2.8125
in Compression
.8919
-3.1081
in Tension
.8919
-3.1081
Example Problems
p * P * K4
Theta (Sec.13-8 )
= -30262.6900
= 37.8778
p * P * K4
= -30262.6900
MEMBRANE STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Actual
Allowable
Long-side
1 at A
500.00
17500.00
at B
500.00
17500.00
at C
500.00
17500.00
2 at A
500.00
17500.00
at B
500.00
17500.00
at C
500.00
17500.00
Short-side 1 at F
800.00
17500.00
at G
800.00
17500.00
at H
800.00
17500.00
Short-side 2 at F
800.00
17500.00
at G
800.00
17500.00
at H
800.00
17500.00
960.12
17500.00
Long-side
Corner Sections
BENDING STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Long-side
Inner
Outer
Allowable
1 at A
-2945.20
10263.58
20533.33
at B
-21079.45
21079.45
26250.00
at C
4435.55
-4435.55
26250.00
2 at A
-2945.20
10263.58
20533.33
at B
-21079.45
21079.45
26250.00
at C
4435.55
-4435.55
26250.00
Short-side 1 at F
15885.43
-15885.43
26250.00
at G
-11554.57
11554.57
26250.00
at H
-1381.98
4145.95
20533.33
Short-side 2 at F
15885.43
-15885.43
26250.00
at G
-11554.57
11554.57
26250.00
at H
-1381.98
4145.95
20533.33
14339.50
-14339.50
26250.00
Long-side
Corner Sections
TOTAL STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Long-side
Long-side
Inner
Outer
Allowable
1 at A
-2445.20
10763.58
20533.33
at B
-20579.45
21579.45
26250.00
at C
4935.55
-3935.55
26250.00
2 at A
-2445.20
10763.58
20533.33
at B
-20579.45
21579.45
26250.00
at C
4935.55
-3935.55
26250.00
26-29
Example Problems
Short-side 1 at F
16685.43
-15085.43
26250.00
at G
-10754.57
12354.57
26250.00
at H
-581.98
4945.95
20533.33
Short-side 2 at F
16685.43
-15085.43
26250.00
at G
-10754.57
12354.57
26250.00
at H
-581.98
4945.95
20533.33
15299.62
-13379.38
26250.00
Corner Sections
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
960.12
5.49
364.54
psi
%
psig
21079.45
psi
80.30
24.91
psig
21579.45
psi
82.21
24.33
psig
26-30
Example Problems
Example problem 4 analyzed vessel type B1 (Figure 26H). This obround vessel is the
Code example problem 13-17(f).
Rectangular Vessels Per ASME VIII Div.1 Appendix 13
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
ITEM: 11,
11,
05:15pm,
05/18/98
Description: EXAMPLE B1
B1
20.0000
Temp
650.0000
17500.0000
psi
SA
17500.0000
psi
Sy
30800.0000
psi
2R
20.0000
in.
t1
.5000
in.
1.0000
EC
1.0000
L2
10.0000
in.
t2
.7500
in.
1.0000
t5
.6250
Design Temperature
psig
F
SA-515 70
in.
t1, I1
= .0104 in**4
Thickness
t2, I2
= .0352 in**4
I2 / I1
= 3.3750
Gamma
L2 / R
= 1.0000
C1
MEMBRANE STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Actual
Allowable
26-31
Example Problems
Long-side
1 at A
266.67
17500.00
at B
266.67
17500.00
2 at A
266.67
17500.00
at B
266.67
17500.00
Short-side 1 at B
400.00
17500.00
at C
800.00
17500.00
Short-side 2 at B
400.00
17500.00
at C
800.00
17500.00
Long-side
BENDING STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Long-side
Inner
Outer
Allowable
1 at A
20964.14
-20964.14
26250.00
at B
-10297.47
10297.47
26250.00
2 at A
20964.14
-20964.14
26250.00
at B
-10297.47
10297.47
26250.00
Short-side 1 at B
-23169.32
23169.32
26250.00
at C
24830.68
-24830.68
26250.00
Short-side 2 at B
-23169.32
23169.32
26250.00
at C
24830.68
-24830.68
26250.00
Long-side
TOTAL STRESSES:
STRESS LOCATIONS
Long-side
Inner
Outer
Allowable
1 at A
21230.81
-20697.47
26250.00
at B
-10030.81
10564.14
26250.00
2 at A
21230.81
-20697.47
26250.00
at B
-10030.81
10564.14
26250.00
Short-side 1 at B
-22769.32
23569.32
26250.00
at C
25630.68
-24030.68
26250.00
Short-side 2 at B
-22769.32
23569.32
26250.00
at C
25630.68
-24030.68
26250.00
Long-side
Actual
Allowable
4096.00
17500.00
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
800.00
4.57
437.50
psi
%
psig
-24830.68
psi
94.59
21.14
psig
25630.68
psi
97.64
20.48
psig
26-32
&KDSWHU
7KH:5&$QQH[*
0RGXOH
Introduction
The WRC 297 analysis module performs local stress calculations on cylinder to cylinder
attachments according to the Welding Research Councils bulletin number 297 or PD
5500, Annex G.
Enter the items ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Description
The dimension basis can be specified on either inside (Id) or outside (Od) dimension basis.
Vessel Diameter
Enter in the actual diameter of the vessel using the Id or Od as specified above.
Vessel Wall Thickness
Enter in the wall thickness of the vessel. This thickness should be measured at the intersection of the nozzle and the vessel.
27-1
Enter in the corrosion allowance if there is any. The program will adjust the Id and thickness appropriately.
Design Pressure
The design pressure will be used to compute membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel
wall. It will also be used to compute axial pressure thrust if instructed to do so.
Design Temperature
This is design temperature for the vessel. This value is used to look up allowable stresses
for the vessel and nozzle materials from the ASME Section II Part D material table.
Vessel Material
The vessel material can be typed in selected from the material database. Right Click on
this field to access the properties for this material or access the database.
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor
This value typically varies from 1 to 3 and is a function of the quality of the weld and the
local dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld.
Stress concentration factors are a measure of a very local stress riser because of sharp corners, no filet radii, etc.
This stress concentration factor will apply for the stress calculations in the vessel on both
the inside and outside of the vessel.
This stress concentration factor is not used in any way with the pressure stress calculations.
Is there a Reinforcing Pad?
If this nozzle has a pad check this button and you will be prompted to enter in the diameter
of the pad along the vessel surface and the pad thickness. This will cause the program to
perform stress calculations at the edge of the pad.
Diameter Basis for Nozzle
The dimension basis can be specified on either inside (Id) or outside (Od) dimension basis.
Diameter of Nozzle
Enter in the minimum nozzle wall thickness at the shell to nozzle junction. This value
should include any allowances for mill tolerance.
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance
Enter in the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 3/
16" or more depending on the service and design specifications.
27-2
Enter the value for the load which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel.
The program does not account for the effect of pressure thrust. In WRC 107 convention:
Positive loads to "push" the nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the nozzle. While in
PD 5500 convention Positive loads try to "pull" the nozzle while negative loads try to
"push" the nozzle. The following figures should clarify these conventions.
Shear Force VC (IN WRC 107 ) or FC (IN PD 5500)
Enter the longitudinal shear load VC (or FC in PD 5500 convention) in the units above.
Enter this value in accordance with the convention used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The
following figure should clarify these conventions.
Shear Force VL (IN WRC 107 ) or FL (IN PD 5500)
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL (or FL in PD 5500 convention) in the units above.
Enter this value in accordance with the convention used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The
following figure should clarify these conventions.
Torsional Moment MT
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance
with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following figures should clarify these conventions.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. Enter this value
in accordance with the used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following figures should
clarify these conventions. Note that this moment has opposite signs in these conventions.
27-3
Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in
accordance with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following figures
should clarify these conventions.
27-4
If this box is checked the force due to pressure times the internal pipe area will be added to
or subtracted from the radial load "P".
Use Stress Indices (AD 560.7)?
If this box is checked the nominal computed pressure stress on the vessel wall as defined
in paragraph AD-560.7 will be multiplied by the stress indices as they are listed in that
paragraph of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 2. This is essentially the computation
of the surface stress intensity. If the design specification requires the use of these indices,
check this box. Please note that these indices are not used in the calculation of the pressure
stress on the nozzle. The program will multiply the pressure stress on the nozzle by a factor of 1.2.
27-5
27-6
Sample Calculation
Sample Calculation
Input Echo, WRC297 Item
1,
Vbasis
Cas
Dv
Tv
Scfn
OD
0.0000
120.000
1.000
0.000
in.
in.
in.
Nbasis
Can
Dn
Tn
Scfv
OD
0.0000
12.000
0.375
0.000
in.
in.
in.
Dp
P
Vc
Vl
Mt
Mc
Ml
100.00
100.00
200.00
300.00
400.00
0.00
0.00
psig
lb.
lb.
lb.
ft.lb.
ft.lb.
ft.lb.
No
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0.082
0.109
0.084
0.209
0.185
0.118
0.174
0.150
0.143
0.098
0.121
0.300
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Stresses Normal to
longitudinal plane)
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Top
Top
Bottom
Bottom
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Outplane Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Outplane Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Outplane Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Normal Pressure Stress
7139
18444
7139
18444
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Outplane Stress Summary
7139
18444
7139
18444
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Stresses Normal to
longitudinal plane)
Au
Top
Outside
Al
Top
Inside
Bu
Bottom
Outside
Bl
Bottom
Inside
27-7
Sample Calculation
-----------(psi
)-----------Inplane Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Inplane Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Inplane Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Pressure Stress
5949
-1189
5949
-1189
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Inplane Stress Summary
5949
-1189
5949
-1189
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Shear stress normal to
longitudinal plane)
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Top
Top
Bottom
Bottom
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Outplane Shear (Vc)
10
10
-10
-10
Outplane Shear (Vl)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Shear (Mt)
21
21
21
21
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Shear Stress Summary
31
31
11
11
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Stress Intensities
Au
Al
Top
Top
Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
7139
19633
Bu
Bl
Bottom
Bottom
Outside
Inside
)-----------7139
19633
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
(Stresses Normal to
circumferential plane)
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
Left
Left
Right
Right
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Outplane Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Outplane Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Outplane Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Outplane Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Normal Pressure Stress
12494
5949
12494
5949
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Outplane Stress Summary
12494
5949
12494
5949
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
(Stresses parallel to
circumferential plane)
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
Left
Left
Right
Right
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Inplane Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Inplane Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Inplane Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Inplane Pressure Stress
15469
-1189
15469
-1189
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Inplane Stress Summary
15469
-1189
15469
-1189
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
(Shear stress normal to
circumferential plane)
Outplane
27-8
Shear
(Vc)
Cu
Cl
Left
Left
Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
0
0
Du
Dl
Right
Right
Outside
Inside
)-----------0
0
Sample Calculation
Cu
Cl
Left
Left
Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
15469
7138
Du
Dl
Right
Right
Outside
Inside
)-----------15469
7138
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Stresses in the
hoop direction)
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Top
Top
Bottom
Bottom
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Hoop Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Hoop Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Hoop Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Hoop Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Hoop Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Hoop Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Hoop Pressure Stress
1741
1861
1741
1861
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Hoop Stress Summary
1741
1861
1741
1861
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Stresses Normal to
pipe cross-section)
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Top
Top
Bottom
Bottom
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Axial Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Axial Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Axial Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Axial Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Axial Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Axial Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Axial Pressure Stress
870
870
870
870
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Axial Stress Summary
870
870
870
870
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Shear stress)
Au
Al
Bu
Bl
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Shear due to (Vc)
28
28
-28
-28
Shear due to (Vl)
0
0
0
0
Shear due to Torsion
56
56
56
56
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Shear Stress Summary
84
84
28
28
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE
(Stress Intensities
Two * Max Shear Stress
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
(Stresses in the
hoop direction)
Hoop Membrane (P )
Hoop Bending (P )
Au
Al
Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
1749
1868
Bu
Bl
Outside
Inside
)-----------1741
1861
Cu
Cl
Left
Left
Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
0
0
0
0
Du
Dl
Right
Right
Outside
Inside
)-----------0
0
0
0
27-9
Sample Calculation
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
Left
Left
Right
Right
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Axial Membrane (P )
0
0
0
0
Axial Bending (P )
0
0
0
0
Axial Membrane (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Axial Bending (Mc)
0
0
0
0
Axial Membrane (ML)
0
0
0
0
Axial Bending (ML)
0
0
0
0
Axial Pressure Stress
870
870
870
870
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Axial Stress Summary
870
870
870
870
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
(Shear stress)
Cu
Cl
Du
Dl
Outside
Inside Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
)-----------Shear due to (Vc)
0
0
0
0
Shear due to (Vl)
-42
-42
42
42
Shear due to Torsion
56
56
56
56
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------Shear Stress Summary
14
14
98
98
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
(Stress Intensities
Two * Max Shear Stress
27-10
Cu
Cl
Outside
Inside
-----------(psi
1741
1861
Du
Dl
Outside
Inside
)-----------1751
1870
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
The WRC 297 stress evaluation method computes stress intensities in the nozzle and vessel wall at the junction of the intersection on the upper and lower surface at eight different
points. Typically, stress intensities can be compared with the yield stress of the material at
operating temperature. However, users should read the WRC 297 bulletin carefully for
further clarification and evaluation of stress results.
Since this method produces quite a bit of output, it may be useful to use the option to produce only the summary of results. To do this use the tools -> configuration option (miscellaneous tab) and check the appropriate box to produce the results in a summary fashion.
Note that this directive will affect all of the generated reports in the file.
27-11
mm.
mm.
mm.
N./mm
N./mm
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
N./sq.mm.
N.
N.
N.
N.mm.
N.mm.
N.mm.
==================================================
Intermediate Values
L o n g i t u d i n a l
At Point A
Circ.
Point B
Radial
At C
---------------------------------------------------------------------------K Factor
K
Load over the Area
W
Equivalent Length
Le
Parameter
Cx
Parameter
C
Parameter
64r(Cx/r)
Parameter
2Cx/Le
Parameter
C/Cx
G6
G7
G8
G9
Curve
Curve
Curve
Curve
G6
G7
G8
G9
at
at
at
at
Circ.
Long.
Circ.
Long.
27-12
Value
Value
Value
Value
Zero
Zero
Zero
Zero
8.0000
19317.4
2530.1311
39.5817
118.7450
2.6284
0.0313
3.0000
8.0000
-19317.4
2530.1311
39.5817
118.7450
2.6284
0.0313
3.0000
1.5748
47972.2
2540.0000
118.7450
39.5817
23.6552
0.0935
0.3333
0.1425
0.1381
-0.1917
-0.1427
0.1425
0.1381
-0.1917
-0.1427
0.1774
0.1074
-0.1601
-0.1491
0.3139
0.2267
-0.2050
-0.1609
0.3139
0.2267
-0.2050
-0.1609
value
value
value
value
M
Mx
N
Nx
0.4539
0.6092
0.9352
0.8867
0.4539
0.6092
0.9352
0.8867
Curve Value
Curve Value
M3/W
Mx3/W
0.1058
0.0376
0.1058
0.0376
9785.6
2540.0000
118.7450
118.7450
23.6552
0.0935
1.0000
Curve Value
Curve Value
N3/W
Nx3/W
-0.0550
-0.0982
-0.0550
-0.0982
Value
Value
Value
Value
M2/W
Mx2/W
N2/W
Nx2/W
0.0480
0.0229
-0.0514
-0.0870
0.0480
0.0229
-0.0514
-0.0870
M/W
Mx/W
Nt/W
Nxt/W
0.0945
0.1152
-0.1403
-0.0557
0.0945
0.1152
-0.1403
-0.0557
Circ.
Long.
Circ.
Long.
value
value
value
value
0.1774
0.1074
-0.1601
-0.1491
0.1232
0.0838
-0.1538
-0.1427
2.0455
Q1
In
Q2
Out
Q3
Q4
In
Out
In
Out
In
Out
Circumferential Stresses:
Membrane Component (N/t) due to:
Radial Load
-2.
-2.
-2.
Circ. Moment
-12.
-12.
-12.
Long. Moment
-4.
-4.
4.
Sub-Total loc.
-19.
-19.
-10.
Pressure (fp)
84.
84.
84.
Sub-Total(fm)
66.
66.
74.
-2.
-12.
4.
-10.
84.
74.
-2.
12.
4.
14.
84.
98.
-2.
12.
4.
14.
84.
98.
-2.
12.
-4.
5.
84.
90.
-2.
12.
-4.
5.
84.
90.
-11.
-80.
17.
-74.
11.
-80.
-17.
-86.
-11.
80.
17.
86.
11.
-80.
17.
-52.
-11.
80.
-17.
52.
174.
-43.
149.
0.
12.
184.
38.
141.
Longitudinal Stresses:
Membrane Component (Nx/t) due to:
Radial Load
-2.
-2.
-2.
Circ. Moment
-11.
-11.
-11.
Long. Moment
-2.
-2.
2.
Sub-Total loc.
-15.
-15.
-12.
Pressure (fp)
84.
84.
84.
Sub-Total(fxm)
69.
69.
73.
-2.
-11.
2.
-12.
84.
73.
-2.
11.
2.
11.
84.
95.
-2.
11.
2.
11.
84.
95.
-2.
11.
-2.
7.
84.
92.
-2.
11.
-2.
7.
84.
92.
-8.
-49.
21.
-35.
8.
-49.
-21.
-62.
-8.
49.
21.
62.
8.
-49.
21.
-20.
-8.
49.
-21.
20.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Tot. Long. fx
147.
-8.
108.
37.
33.
157.
72.
112.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
27-13
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
184.
157.
-27.
72.
38.
-34.
141.
112.
-30.
0.
0.
0.
0.
184.36 Allowable:
0.00 Allowable:
98.62 Allowable:
310.28
-197.02
165.48
27-14
&KDSWHU
The Appendix Y Module
Introduction
This module performs stress evaluation of Class 1, category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form
identical flange pairs. This module conforms to the latest version (A-2001) of the ASME
Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y.
28-1
28-2
Sample Calculation
Sample Calculation
Input Echo, App Y Flange Item
1,
Description: APPY
Design Pressure
150.00
psig
100.00
FCOR
0.0000
in.
10.0000
in.
16.0000
in.
Flange Thickness
0.6250
in.
G0
0.2500
in.
G1
0.3750
in.
Length of Hub
HL
1.0000
in.
Design Temperature
Corrosion Allowance
Flange Material
SA-240 316L
SFO
16300.00
psi
SFA
16300.00
psi
Bolt Material
SA-193 B7
SBO
18000.00
psi
SBA
18000.00
psi
14.2500
in.
DB
0.7500
in.
Number of Bolts
12
GOD
12.1000
in.
GID
11.9000
in.
Gasket Factor, m,
0.0000
0.00
psi
29538461
psi
28138460
psi
BCOR = B+2.0*FCOR
10.000
in.
G1COR = G1-FCOR
0.375
in.
G0COR = G0-FCOR
0.250
in.
Code R Dimension,
R = ((C-BCOR)/2.0)-G1COR
1.750
in.
Code R Dimension,
R = ((C-BCOR)/2.0)-G1COR
1.750
in.
28-3
Sample Calculation
0.100
in.
B0 = N / 2.0
N = (GOD-GID) / 2
0.050
in.
BE = B0
0.050
in.
12.000
in.
0.875
in.
G = (GOD+GID) / 2.0
hcmax = (A - C) / 2
28-4
Sample Calculation
LOADING
Force
Distance
Bolt Corr
Moment
End Pressure,
MD
11775.
1.9375
1.0000
1901. ft.lb.
Face Pressure,
MT
5181.
1.6250
1.0000
702. ft.lb.
Gasket Load,
MG
0.
1.1250
1.0000
0. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, MA
41094.
1.1250
1.0000
3853. ft.lb.
Gasket Seating, MA
41094.
1.1250
1.0000
3853. ft.lb.
RMO
2603. ft.lb.
3853. ft.lb.
1.581
Hub Ratio,
HRAT = HL / H0
0.632
Thickness Ratio,
GRAT = (G1COR/G0COR)
1.500
in.
0.831
0.289
1.000
K =
1.600
T =
1.668
U =
4.732
Y =
4.306
Z =
2.282
= g0 * ( h0 + F * T ) / V
= 0.2500 * ( 1.5811 + 0.8308 * 0.6250 ) / 0.2894
= 0.4535
Factor:
Js
Factor:
Jp
Ms
28-5
Sample Calculation
= -( Jp * F * Mp )/( t^3 + Js * F )
= -( 0.2435 * 0.4535 * 31233.18 )/( 0.6250 + 0.4009 * 0.4535 )
= -674.8762 ft.lb.
Hc
= ( Mp + Ms ) / hc
= ( 31233.18 + -8098.51 ) / 0.8750 )
= 26440. lb.
Wm1
= H + Hg + Hc
= 16956.00 + 0.00 + 26439.60
= 43396. lb.
Sigmab
= Wm1 / Ab
= 43395.60 / 3.6240
= 11975. psi
Si
Sr
SRid
= -(( 2*F*t)/(h0+F*t)+6))*Ms/(pi*B1*t)
= -((2*0.831*0.625)/(1.581+0.831*0.625)+6))*-8098/(pi*-8098.514
= -3501.9504 psi
STid
28-6
Sample Calculation
Sh
= ( h0 * Ethetab * f )/((0.91*(g1/g0)*B1*V)
= (1.5811*31033.9*0.831)/((0.91*(0.3750/0.2500)*10.3750*10.3750
= 6630. psi
Allowable
10369.78
16300.00 psi
2296.76
16300.00 psi
-3501.95
16300.00 psi
6630.05
24450.00 psi
Average of Sh and Sr
1564.05
16300.00 psi
Average of Sh and St
4463.40
16300.00 psi
11974.50
18000.00 psi
Bolt Stress
0.4509
in.
Estimated M.A.W.P.
235.78
psig
28-7
Discussion of Results
Discussion of Results
Based on the given input the program computes the MAWP for the given geometry. With
the given loading conditions the required thickness is also computed. The program computes flange stresses and compares those stresses with the appropriate allowables as
described in paragraph Y-7 of the ASME Code.
28-8
&KDSWHU
Miscellaneous Processors
File Manager
The file manager window allows the users to browse drives and directories for a file that
will be created, opened, saved or deleted. The following options are available:
Filename - This field contains the name of the file you wish to create, open, save or
delete. Enter the name of the desired file then press [Enter] or select the OK button.
The filename is composed of two portions, the (job)name and the extension (such as
.PVI, .FIL, etc. ). The user can enter the full filename (name+extension) or just the
name; in which case, the program will add the appropriate extension.
The first portion of the filename must be eight characters or less, and only consists of
letters, numbers or _. The program will check the filename you entered (or selected)
to make sure it is valid.
Directories - Contains the directories that may be browsed. A directory can be selected
from the list by pressing on the lists up or down arrow, moving the cursor to the
desired directory then pressing [Enter].
Drives - Contains the active drives on the system. The drives in this field can be
selected by pressing on the lists up or down arrow, moving cursor to the desired drive,
Miscellaneous Processors
29-1
File Manager
then pressing [Enter]. If the drive is available the directory and file fields will be
updated. Otherwise an error message is presented.
The OK button causes the information in the filename field to be processed by the program. If the process is successful the file manager window is then removed from the
screen. In most cases, a message window will appear after pressing this button. The user
should answer the questions presented by the message window so that the process can be
fully carried out. The only circumstances where the message window does not appear is
when there is no previously opened file. In the DELETE option, after the process is finished, the file manager window is not removed from the screen, instead the file list is
updated and the program is waiting for another DELETE event. If the user does not wish
to delete any more files, press the CANCEL button to close the file manage window.
Selecting the CANCEL button causes the file manage window to be removed without any
further processing.
The HELP button displays information about this window.
29-2
Miscellaneous Processors
Heading Edit
Heading Edit
Heading Edit mode allows the user to input and edit the heading and the title page for the
current job.
Miscellaneous Processors
29-3
Material Definition
Material Definition
Element materials may be selected for the Material button on the Define screen. When
clicking on the Material button, the following screen is presented:
By clicking on the OK button, the material name and the appropriate material parameters
are loaded in the element. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the
Material Edit Window by pressing the Enter key when the cursor is in the Material field.
Material Edit Window lets the user display and modify the material properties of the current element or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here
29-4
Miscellaneous Processors
Material Definition
are directly from the programs material database, otherwise the data are from the data
structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in
the programs material database, the program will assume that is a User-defined material, in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
OK - Allows the user to save the data to the memory then close the window.
Cancel - Allows the user to close the window without saving the data.
Miscellaneous Processors
29-5
Material Name
Material Name
Enter the name of the material for this element. This program contains a database which
includes most of materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
29-6
Miscellaneous Processors
Material Name
P Number Thickness
Enter the thickness for this P number.
Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness
above which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is base on the P
number for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code. This value is used
only for error checking.
Miscellaneous Processors
29-7
29-8
Miscellaneous Processors
rial name in the material input field, the program will look into its database and determine
the external pressure chart name for this material, and enter it into this cell. The program
will also determine this chart name when you select a material name from the material
selection window.
The following are the acceptable external pressure chart names:
Miscellaneous Processors
29-9
TEMA Number
NFN-3
NFN-4
NFN-5
NFN-6
NFN-7
NFN-8
NFN-9
NFN-10
NFN-11
NFN-12
NFN-13
NFN-14
NFN-15
NFN-16
NFN-17
NFN-18
NFN-19
NFN-20
NFT-1
NFT-2
NFT-3
NFZ-1
NFZ-2
UNF-28.7, Ni Cu Alloy
UNF-28.8, Annealed Ni Cr Fe
UNF-28.15, Ni Mo Alloy B
UNF-28.24, Ni Mo Cr Fe
UNF-28.25, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu
UNF-28.27, Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800
UNF-28.29, Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800H
UNF-28.33, Ni Moly Chrome Alloy N10276
UNF-28.34, Ni Cr Fe Mo Cu Alloys G and G-2
UNF-28.36, Cr Ni Fe Mo Cu Co, SB-462, 463, etc.
UNF-28.37, Ni Fe Cr Si Alloy 330
UNF-28.38, Ni Cr Mo Grade C-4
UNF-28.39, Ni Mo Alloy X
UNF-28.40, Ni Mo Alloy B-2
UNF-28.44, Ni Cr Mo Co N06625 (Alloy 625)
UNF-28.45, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3)
UNF-28.46, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3, >3/4)
UNF-28.47, Work Hardened Nickel
UNF-28.22, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 1
UNF-28.28, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 2
UNF-28.42, Titanium, Grade 1
UNF-28.35, Zirconium, Alloy 702
UNF-28.41, Zirconium, Alloy 705
The user may add material data to the standard material database using the
Edit/Add Materials option from Tools on the Main Menu.
TEMA Number
The TEMA number is used to determine the modulus of elasticity for materials at design
temperature. These values range from 1 to 52. They can be found in the TEMA tubesheet
chapter.
29-10
Miscellaneous Processors
Keyboard Commands
Keyboard Commands
The following movements are defined for the keyboard within the program:
Begin line
<Home>
Begin list
<Home>
Delete character
<Del.>
<Backspace>
Delete window
<Alt+F4>
End line
<End>
End list
<End>
Exit
<Shift+F3>
Help
<F1>
Hot key
<Alt+char(with _)>
Insert toggle
<Ins>
Left word
<Ctrl+left-arrow>
Mark
<Ctrl+F5>
Maximize
<Alt +>
Menu control
<Alt>
Minimize
<Alt ->
Move window
<Alt+F7>
Next cell
<Down_arrow>
Next Character
<Right_arrow>
Next field
<Tab>
Next window
<Alt+F6>
Page down
<Page Down>
Page up
<Page Up>
Previous cell
<Up_arrow>
Previous character
<Left_arrow>
Previous field
<Shift+Tab>
Refresh
<F5>
Right word
<Ctrl+right_arrow>
Select
<Enter>
Size window
<Alt+F8>
System button
<Alt .>
Miscellaneous Processors
29-11
Mouse Operation
Mouse Operation
The following movements are defined for the mouse within the program:
In window objects:
Choose <Left-down-click>
Select <Left-release>
In vessel graphics:
Select element <Left-release>
Select detail <Right-down-click>
29-12
Miscellaneous Processors
&KDSWHU
Vessel Example Problems
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to provide a listing for a typical vertical and horizontal vessel. The actual modeling instructions have been previously outlined in the chapter 3. At
this point it is assumed that you can use the input program to create a vertical vessel or
horizontal tank.
In addition to the following examples, this program comes with many examples that reside
in the EXAMPLES subdirectory underneath the main program directory. If you wish to
access these examples, you can use the File Open command sequence while in the vessel
building part of PVElite. Once you get into the file open screen, you can choose the directory option to switch directories. Once in the EXAMPLES subdirectory, you can open any
of the existing examples and analyze them.
Vessel Example
The Vertical and Horizontal Vessel problems can now be accessed at www.COADE.com.
30-1
Vessel Example
30-2
Index
Numerics
1.60D.5 6-44
1.60D10 6-45
1.60D2 6-44
1.60D5 6-44
1.60D7 6-44
3D Viewer 3-32
A
Above Ground Height 6-22, 15-7
Absolute 6-46
Abutting Nozzle Insertion 5-16, 11-7
Acc Based Factor Fv 6-46
Acc.Based Factor Fa 6-46
Acceleration Zone 6-34
Acceptance of terms of agreement by the user 1-2
AD-540.2 sketch b 3-25
Adding Details 3-42
Additional Area 15-5, 18-6
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad 5-17
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel 18-3
AISC Member Designation 18-9
Allowable Calculations, Highest Percentage of 26-18
Allowable Stress, Ambient 19-2
Allowable Stress, Ambient Tempature 14-4
Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 16-5, 23-17
Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 14-4, 16-5, 23-17
Allowable Stress, Operating 19-2
Amplification Factor ac 6-30
Analysis Type 12-5
Analysis, Performing an 9-20
Analyze Baseplate 18-3
Analyze Menu 3-22, 9-6
Analyze Shellside + Differential Expansion 22-7
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion
22-7
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside Pressure 22-7
Analyze Shellside Pressure 22-7
Analyze Tubeside + Differential Expansion 22-7
Analyze Tubeside Pressure 22-7
Angle Between Branch and Header 19-3
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell 5-13
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell (Usually 90) entered in
description field 5-13
Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way 6-7
ANSI Flange MAWP 7-4
Apex Angle 10-10, 11-11
Appendix Y Flanges 1-7
Appendix Y Module 28-1
B
B16.5 Flange 5-13, 11-11, 19-5
B16.5 Flange, Grade for Attached 5-13, 11-11, 19-5
Backing Ring 14-7
Backing Ring Actual Thickness 14-8
Backing Ring Inside Diameter 14-8
ii
C
C Factor for End Closure Plate/Vessel Head 26-12
Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads 9-10
Calculation Techniques 20-1
Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head 14-9
Calculations for Tubesheets Extended as Flanges 16-16
Calculations, Allowable 26-18
Carbon Steel Materials 29-9
Category Value 6-38
Center to Center Distance Between Poles 26-14
Center Web Height 5-27, 15-5
Centerline Dimension 5-26
Centerline Offset 4-35
Central Opening Number, Large 25-3
Centroid 13-8
Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel 26-16
C-Factor 26-13
Channel Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 23-11
Channel Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 23-10
Channel Corrosion Allowance 16-6, 23-4
Channel Cover Deflection 12-12
Channel Design Pressure 16-6, 23-4
Channel Inside Diameter 16-6, 23-4
Channel Material Specification 23-10
Channel Metal Design Temperature 16-6
Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. 23-13
Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure 23-10
Channel Wall Thickness 16-6, 23-4
Circumferential Moment 17-12
Circumferential Moment MC 27-3
Circumferential Shear Load 17-12
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers 1-9
Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design 6-13
Code Case 2260/2261 3-26
Coefficient Cd 6-47
Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc) 17-13
Combination Method 6-45
Compare Maximum Stress Intensity to 17-13
Component Analysis 7-9, 8-4
Component Analysis Main Menu 9-2
Component Analysis Module 9-1
Component Analysis Tutorial 9-1
D
Damping Factor 6-22, 6-36
Damping Ratio 15-7, 18-7
Datum Line Distance 6-2
Dead Weight of Vessel 20-9
Default units file 9-12
Delta 26-13
Density of Material 29-6
Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles 21-2
Design Data 6-2
Design External Pressure 10-5, 11-3, 26-13
Design Internal Pressure 6-2, 10-5, 11-3, 21-2, 25-3, 269
Design Internal Temperature 6-2
Design Length for Cylinder Volumn Calculations 10-9
Design Length of Section 10-9
Design Modification 6-9
Design Pressure 6-12, 12-5, 17-11, 18-2, 19-1, 27-2
Design Pressure + Static Head 6-12
Design Pressure in Jacket 24-5
Design Pressure, External 13-2
Design Temperature 11-3, 12-5, 14-3, 19-1, 21-2, 25-3,
27-2
Design Temperature for External Pressure 10-5
Design Temperature for Integral Part 23-17
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure 10-5, 24-3, 269
Design Temperature for Jacket Pressure 24-5
Design Temperature for Shell and Expansion Joint 22-3
Design Temperature of Attachment 18-2
Design Temperature of Tubes 23-7
Design Temperature, External 13-2
Design Wind Speed 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21
Detail Definition Buttons 5-4
Detail ID 5-6
Details, Definition of 5-6
Diagnostics Menu 3-29, 9-16
Diameter and Thickness, Actual 5-15
Diameter at Leg Centerline 5-29
Diameter Basis 10-7
Diameter Basis for Nozzle 27-2
Diameter Basis for the Nozzle 17-7
Diameter Basis for the Vessel 17-3
Diameter Basis for Vessel
iii
E
Earthquake Load Calculation 7-6
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv 6-41
Edit Menu 9-5
EigenSolver 3-27
El Centro 6-44
Elastic Modules for Plates 20-10
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature 21-3, 21-4, 215
Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature 21-3
Elements From Node 4-2
Elements To Node 4-3
End Reinforcing, Large 13-5
Enter the Dimension G for the Backing Flange 23-8
Enter the Outside Diameter of the Tubesheet 23-8
Enter the Shell/Channel Side Vacuum Pressures 16-13
Enter the Shell/Channelside Vacuum Pressures 23-14
Enter the Tube End Condition k, Corresponding to Span
SL 16-12
Enter the Tube End Condition, K Corresponding to Span
SL 23-12
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL for Max (k*SL)
16-11
iv
F
Failure Path Calculations 11-15
Fastener Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 21-4
Fastener Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature 214
Fastener Bolt Length 21-4
Fastener Bolt Present 21-3
Fastener Cross-Sectional Area 21-4
Fastener Material Specification 21-4
File Manager 29-1
File Menu 3-17, 9-2
Fillet or Groove Weld Leg Length 16-10
Fillet Radius Between Vessel & Nozzle (r) 17-16
G
Gasket and Gasket Factors 28-2
Gasket Inner Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16
H
Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections 10-10, 11-11
Half-Pipe Jacket 1-6, 24-4
Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations 24-6
Half-Pipe Jacket, Thickness of 24-4
Half-Pipe Module 24-1
Half-Pipe Section Description 24-3
Head Joint Efficiency 15-3
Head Thickness 15-3
Head Type 15-3
Head, Thickness of 14-4
Header Dimension Basis 19-3
Heading Edit 29-3
Heat-Treated Materials 29-9
Height above Ground 6-22
Height above Ground (z) 15-7
Height of Center Web 5-27, 15-5
Height of Composite Stiffener 5-26
Height of Extruded Outlet, HX 19-3
Height of Gusset Plate 18-12
Height of Gussets 5-20, 20-10
Height of Hill (H) 6-22
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H) 15-7, 18-7
Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest 10-9
Height of Liquid Column Operating 10-9
Height of Liquid Column, Operating 11-10
Height of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Height of Lug from Center of Hole to Bottom 18-14
Height of Packed Section 5-31
Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface 15-9
Height of Vessel above Grade 15-6
I
IBC 6-44
Impact Factor 6-7
Importance 6-45
Importance Factor 6-22, 6-28, 6-31, 6-33, 6-36, 6-37, 641, 6-45, 15-6, 18-6, 18-29
Include Missing Mass Components 6-47
Indias Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM 636
Individual Heads 1-4
Individual Shells 1-4
Input 15-1, 17-2, 18-2, 19-1, 20-6
Input Data 10-5, 11-3, 12-4, 14-3, 16-5, 21-2, 22-3, 234, 24-3, 25-3, 26-9, 27-1
Input Echo 7-3
Input Expansion (EXP) Loadings 17-5
Input Loads in Global Coordinates and Allowable
Stresses 17-5
Input Loads in WRC107 Convention 17-5
Input Menu 3-20
Input Occasional (OCC) Loadings 17-6
Input Processor 3-3
Input Processors 3-6
vi
J
Jacket Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 24-5
Jacket Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 24-5
Jacket Material Name 24-5
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams 10-6, 24-4
Joint Efficiency for Skirt Weld at Bottom Head 20-9
Joint Efficiency for Welded Seams 26-11
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck 5-15
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle
Passes 5-15
K
Keyboard Commands 29-11
Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End 13-8
Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End 13-8
Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads 10-9
Knuckle Radius of Torispherical Head 11-10
Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads 15-8
Knuckle Thickness, Large End 13-8
Knuckle Thickness, Small End 13-8
L
Lap Joint Contact Inside Diameter 12-11
Lap Joint Contact Outside Diameter 12-11
Lap Joint Flanges 12-5
Large Opening Module 25-1
Lease 1-10
Leg & Lug Module 18-1
Leg Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 18-9
Leg Allowable Stress at Design Temperature 18-9
Leg End Condition Factor K 18-8
Leg Orientation 5-29
Leg Results 18-10
Legs 5-29
Legs & Lugs 1-7
Legs Cross-Braced 18-9
Legs, Length of 5-30, 18-8
Legs, Number of 5-20, 5-30, 18-8
Length of Kettle Cylinder 16-12
Length of Kettle Port Cylinder (LP) 16-12
Length of Section 10-9
LGCENTER 1-6
License agreement, CAESAR II 1-2
License grant 1-2
Licenses 1-10
Lift Orientation 18-14, 18-29
Lifting Lug 1-5
Lifting Lug Input 18-13
Lifting Lug, Thickness of 18-14
Ligament Efficiency Calculations 26-17
Liguid on Tray 5-28
Limitations of remedies 1-3
Limited Run 1-10
Limited warranty 1-3
Lines of Support for External Pressure 13-7
Lining 5-36
Lining Density 5-36
Lining, Thickness of 5-36
Liquid 5-33
Liquid Column Hydrotest Height 10-9
Liquid Column Operating Height 10-9
Liquid Density 5-33
Liquid Height from Bottom of Tank 15-2
M
M.A.W.P. and Static Head 6-12
Main Input Fields 10-5, 11-3, 12-4, 14-3, 15-1, 16-5, 172, 18-2, 19-1, 20-6, 21-2, 22-3, 23-4, 25-3, 26-9
Main Menu 3-16
Manway or Inspection Opening 11-8
Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 13-3,
25-4, 26-9
Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 13-3,
25-4, 26-9
Material Category, Cycle Life Evaluation 21-3
Material Definition 29-4
Material Diameter and Thickness Limits 11-14
Material Name 22-3, 26-9, 29-6
Material Specification 14-3, 15-2, 19-1, 20-6, 25-4
Material Specification for Integral Part 23-17
Material Specification for Legs 18-8
Material Specification for Lifting Lugs 18-13
Material Specification for Support Lugs 18-11
Material Yield Stress 5-27
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating 12-13
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating 12-13
Mating Flange Design Bolt Load 12-13
vii
viii
N
Natural Frequency Calculation 7-6
Natural Frequency for the Structure 15-7, 18-7
NBC Seismic Data 6-33
NBC Wind Data 6-19
Network ESLs 2-8
Network Installation / Usage 2-7
Node Number 12-12
Nominal Bolt Diameter 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 18-24, 20-7,
23-15
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete 18-25, 20-8
Nominal Density of Material 29-6
Nominal Diameter and Thickness 5-15
Nominal of Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate 10-7
Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket 24-4
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle 5-15
Nominal Thickness of Branch/Header 19-2
Nominal Thickness of Nozzle 11-6
Non-Circular Flat Heads 11-11
Non-Ferrous Materials 29-9
Normal Force 18-14, 18-29
Novell File Server ESL Installation 2-8
Novell Workstation ESL Installation 2-8
Nozzle 17-7
Nozzle Analysis 5-11
Nozzle Angle Geometry 11-8
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance 5-15, 11-7, 17-7, 27-2
Nozzle Description 5-13, 11-3
Nozzle Design Modifications 6-12
Nozzle Design Pressure 6-12
Nozzle Diameter 17-7, 27-2
Nozzle Diameter and Thickness, Actual 11-13
Nozzle Diameter Basis 5-14, 11-6
Nozzle Diameter Limit 5-14, 11-6, 11-11
Nozzle Input Data 5-13
Nozzle Insertion 5-16, 11-7
Nozzle Inside Projection 5-16, 11-12
Nozzle Material Specification 5-14
Nozzle Module 11-1
Nozzle Outside Projection 5-16, 11-12
Nozzle Schedule 5-15
Nozzle Side Hub Length 25-4
Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Large End 25-4
Nozzle Side Hub Thickness, Small End 25-4
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis 5-14, 11-6
Nozzle Thickness 3-25, 9-9, 11-6
Nozzle Thickness Limit 5-14, 11-12
Nozzle Wall Thickness 27-2
Nozzle Weight 5-10
Nozzle, Diameter of 27-2
Nozzle, Thickness of Actual 5-15
Nozzles 1-6, 5-10
O
Occasional Load Factor 18-4
OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick 3-26
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline 5-13
Offset from Centerline 5-22
Offset from Left Tangent Line 27-6
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole 18-14
Opening Inside Diameter 25-3
Openings, Large 1-6
Operating Liquid Density 10-9, 11-10
Operating Moment of Basering 20-9
Operating Weight of Vessel 20-9
Ordinate Type 6-47
Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion 22-7
Outer Cylindrical Element Length 22-7
Outer Cylindrical Element Thickness 22-7
Output 18-16, 19-6
Output / Review 8-1
Output Menu 3-23, 9-8
Output Review 3-12
Outside Diameter of Basering 20-7
Outside Diameter of Flange 14-5
Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion 16-13, 23-14
Outside Diameter of Ring 5-8
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base 20-9
Outside Diameter of Vessel 18-2
Outside Diamter 5-29
Overall M.A.W.P. and Static Head 6-12
P
P instead of MAWP for UG-99B 9-10
P Number Thickness 29-7
Packed Section Height 5-31
Packing 5-31
Packing Density 5-31
Pad Diameter 17-9
Pad Diameter Along Header Surface 19-5
Pad Length 5-21
Pad Material 5-17
Pad Outside Diameter Along Vessel Surface 11-12
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface 5-17
Pad Parameter C11 (full length) 17-9
Pad Parameter C22 (full length) 17-9
Pad Thickness 5-17, 5-21, 11-12, 17-9, 19-5
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter 5-17
Pad Weld Leg Size at Outside Diameter 11-12
Pad Width 5-20
ix
Q
Quick Start with PVElite 3-40
R
Radial Force 17-12
Radial Load 17-12
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate 5-19
Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring 13-8
Radial Width of Top Bar Plate or Top Ring 18-12
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring 5-20
Radial Width of Top Ring/Plate 20-8
Radiography, Degree of 6-4
Radius of Corner Section 26-13
Radius of Curvature, RX, of Extruded Outlet 19-4
Radius of Half-Pipe Jacket 24-4
Radius of Semi-Circular ARC of Lifting Lug 18-14
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center 23-8
Range Type 6-47
Recording the Model 3-43
Rectangular Vessel Description 26-9
Rectangular Vessel Module 26-1
Rectangular Vessels 1-6
Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings 6-13
Reinforcement 18-28
Reinforcement Calculations 26-17
Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure 1310
Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure 139
Reinforcement Limit Modification 11-5
Reinforcement Type 26-11
Reinforcing Cone, Location of 13-7
Reinforcing Limits, Modification of 5-14
Reinforcing Member, Length of 26-15, 26-16
Reinforcing Pad 11-7, 27-2
Reinforcing Pad Present 19-3
Reinforcing Pad, Selecting 11-14
ture 21-4
Ring Outside Diameter 18-29
Ring Thickness 18-29
Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Requirements 1011
Ring Weld Attachment Style (Intermittent, Continuous,
Both) 10-11
Ring, Location of 10-11
Ring, Thickness of 5-8
Rings 5-7
Risk Factor 6-24
Roughness Factor 6-20, 6-22
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size? 3-25
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ? 16-13,
23-14
Running the Analysis 3-48
S
Saddle 15-3
saddle 15-4
Saddle Base 15-6, 15-7
Saddle Bearing Angle 15-4
Saddle Check 5-27
Saddle Contact Angle 5-26
Saddle Dimension A 5-27
Saddle Wear Plate Design 15-11
Saddle Webs & Base Plate 15-2
Saddle Width 15-4
Saddles 5-26
Sample Calculation 27-7, 28-3
Schedule of Nozzle, Actual 11-6
Section Identifier 5-30
Section Type 5-8
Seismic 5-23
Seismic Coefficient Av 6-30
Seismic Coefficient Ca 6-37
Seismic Coefficient Cc 6-30
Seismic Coefficient Cv 6-37
Seismic Data 6-27
Seismic Design Category 6-41
Seismic Design Code 6-27
Seismic for Hydrotest 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-34, 6-36, 6-38,
6-43
Seismic for Hydrotest, Percent 6-37
Seismic Load Input in Gs 6-40
Seismic Loads to Vessel, Applying 15-3
Seismic Zone 6-29, 6-32, 15-7, 18-7
Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout 16-13, 23-15
Select the Addenda for the Material Database 9-11
Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake 7-6
Shear Force VC 27-3
xi
roded 22-6
Shock Scale X|Y dir 6-45
Short-Side Length Dimension 26-10
Simple Bar Geometry 26-15
Site Distance 6-22, 15-7, 18-7
Skirt Allowable at the Skirt Top 20-10
Skirt at Base, Outside Diameter 20-9
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (OPE) 20-10
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (TEST) 2011
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (OPE) 2011
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (TEST) 2011
Skirt Diameter at Bottom Head 20-9
Skirt Temperature 20-9
Skirt Thickness 20-9
Skirt Thickness, Basic 20-5
Slip-on Flanges 12-4
Soehrens Calculation 14-7
Soehrens Calculations 14-9
Software Lock 2-1
Soil Factor 6-36
Soil Type 6-28, 6-31, 6-33
Special Service 6-4
Specifying Global Data 3-45
Splits in Backing Ring, Number of 12-11, 14-8
Spring Constant 22-9
SRSS 6-45
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials 29-9
Standard Bar Ring 6-8
Status Bar 10-13, 11-13, 12-14
Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate 26-14
Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis
Results 7-3
Stiffener from Shell Surface 15-9
Stiffener Type 6-6
Stiffening Ring Location 15-8
Stiffening Ring Material Specification 15-8
Stiffening Ring Present 15-4
Stiffening Ring Properties 15-8
Stiffening Rings for External Pressure, Selecting 6-9
Stored Liquid Density 15-2
Straight Flange, Length of 10-9
Stress at Ambient Temperature, Allowable 11-4, 12-6,
15-2, 20-7, 21-2, 29-6
Stress at Design Temperature, Allowable 11-3, 12-6, 224
Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness, Actual 10-14
Stress at Hydrotest Temperature, Allowable 29-6
Stress at Operating Temperature , Allowable 20-6
Stress at Operating Temperature, Allowable 15-2, 21-2,
xii
29-6
Stress Calculations 26-17
Stress due to Combined Loads 7-6
Stress in Skirt due to Gussets or Top Ring 20-5
Stress Multipliers 20-9
Stresses 22-9
Summary 1-7
Summary of External Pressure Results 10-15
Summary of Internal Pressure Results 10-14
Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements 1-12
Summary of Results 24-7
Support Contact Point 18-11
Support Lug Input 18-11
Support Lug Reinforcing Ring ( None, Girder Ring ) 1811
Support Lugs Above Grade, Location of 18-11
Support Lugs, Number of 18-11
System and Hardware Requirements 2-1
T
Tail Lug Type 4-35
Tailing Lug Analysis 4-35
Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel 18-3
Tangential Force 18-15, 18-29
Tapped Hole Area Loss 5-17
Technical Basis 10-1, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 16-1, 21-1,
23-1, 24-1, 25-1, 26-1, 27-1, 28-1
TEMA Channel Cover 12-12
TEMA Number 29-10
TEMA Tubesheet Module 16-1
TEMA Tubesheets 1-5
TEMA Tubesheets Metal Temperature, Actual 16-9
Temperature 10-5, 11-3, 12-5, 14-3, 19-1, 21-2, 22-3,
23-7, 23-17, 24-3, 24-5, 25-3, 26-9, 27-2
Temperature for Gussets (if not ambient) 20-10
Temperature of Basering 20-6
Term 1-2
Terrain Category 6-24
Test Moment on Basering 20-9
Test Weight of Vessel 20-9
Thick Joint Module 22-1
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure 10-13
Thickness of Kettle Cone (KC) 16-13
Thickness of Kettle Cylinder 16-12
Thickness of Kettle Port Cylinder (TP) 16-12
Thickness of Pipe or Plate 10-7
Thickness, Minimum 5-15
Thickness, Required 11-5
Thick-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Thin Joint Module 21-1
Thin-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Thread Series 12-8, 14-5, 16-14, 18-25
5
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance (Shellside/Tubeside)
23-5
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Chanel Side 16-8
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side 16-8
Tubesheet Description 23-4
Tubesheet Extended as Flange? 16-8
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both) 16-8,
23-8
Tubesheet Integral With 23-8
Tubesheet Material Specification 23-5
Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature 16-8, 23-5
Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. 23-13
Tubesheet Number 23-4
Tubesheet Thickness 16-8, 23-5
Tubesheet Type 16-6
Tubesheets Extended as Flanges 16-16
Tubeside Design Pressure 22-6
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) 22-6
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded 22-6
Tutorial / Master Menu 3-1
Tutorial Problem Printout 9-29
Type of Analysis 18-3
Type of Tubesheet 23-5
U
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data 6-38
UBC Earthquake Importance Factor 6-38
UBC Horizontal Force Factor 6-39
UBC Near Source Factor 6-38
UBC Seismic Coefficient CA 6-38
UBC Seismic Coefficient CV 6-38
UBC Seismic Data 6-31
UBC Seismic Zone 6-38
UBC Wind Data 6-17
UBC Wind Importance Factor 6-17
UCS-66 Chart Number 29-7
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness 11-14
Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate 16-11, 23-11
Unreinforced Length Dimension 26-14
Updates 1-10
Use Appendix CC ? 22-5
Use Code Case 2260? 9-11
Use Expansion Joint Allowable Stress 22-5
Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only 3-26
Use Stress Indices (AD 560.7)? 27-5
User Border Creation 3-54
User Defined 6-44
User-Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure 6-5
User-Defined MAWP/MAPnc 6-5
User-Defined Wind Profile 6-26
xiii
V
Velocity Zone 6-35
Version 3.5 Improvements 1-11
Version 3.6 Improvements 1-11
Version 4.1 Improvements 1-13
Version 4.3 Improvements 1-14
Vertical Vessels 1-4
Vessel 17-3
Vessel above Grade 15-6
Vessel Analysis Calculations 7-8
Vessel Centerline 15-6, 15-7
Vessel Centerline, Distance or Offset 5-6
Vessel Components (Details), Individual 3-50
Vessel Corrosion Allowance 27-2
Vessel Data, General 6-1
Vessel Description 15-1, 18-2
Vessel Description, Rectangular 26-9
Vessel Design Pressure 15-1
Vessel Design Temperature 15-2
Vessel Detail Data 5-1
Vessel Details, Design and Analysis of 3-14
Vessel Diameter 27-1
Vessel Example Problems 30-1
Vessel Leg Input 18-8
Vessel Material 27-2
Vessel Nozzles 1-4
Vessel Number 15-1
Vessel OD 5-19, 18-11
Vessel Orientation 18-9
Vessel Radius 26-14
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor 27-2
Vessel Tangent 15-3
Vessel Type 17-3, 26-10
Vessel Wall Thickness 17-3, 27-1
Vessel, Basic Definition of 3-40
Vessel, Diameter of 17-3
Vessel, Distance from Outside of 26-15
Vessel, Length of 26-13
Vessel, Outside Diameter 18-2
Vessel/Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosines 17-13
Vessels, General 1-4
Vibration Period 6-36
View Menu 3-30, 9-17
Vortex Shedding 6-5
W
Wall Thickness for Axial Stress, Selecting 6-9
Wall Thickness for External Pressure, Selecting 6-9
Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure, Selecting 6-9
xiv
X
XY Coordinate Calculations 7-3
Y
Yield Stress, Operating 29-7
Z
Zero Period Acceleration 6-45
Zone Number 6-36
xv
COADE, Inc.
12777 Jones Rd., Suite 480
Houston, Texas 77070
Phone: (281)890-4566
Fax: (281)890-3301
E-mail: techsupport@coade.com
WWW: www.coade.com
PVElite
USER'S GUIDE
V E R S I O N 4.30
( L A S T R E V I S E D 1/2002 )